UA5000 Configuration Guide-PVM CLI (V100R017 - 08)

UA5000 Universal Access Unit V100R017
Configuration Guide-PVM CLI

Issue Date 08 2011-11-15
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2011. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China http://www.huawei.com [email protected]
Website: Email:
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
UA5000 Universal Access Unit Configuration Guide-PVM CLI
About This Document
About This Document

Purpose
This document describes how to execute commands to configure the services supported by theUA5000: VoIP service, ISDN service, FoIP service, and MoIP service. It provides the networking, service configuration flow, service application example, and related operations of the services supported by UA5000. This document is intended for service configuration. It can also be used as a reference by system maintenance engineers to learn and improve technical knowledge.
Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document. Product Name UA5000 N2000 BMS Version V100R017 V200R011
Intended Audience
The intended audience of this document are: l l l Installation and commissioning engineer System maintenance engineer Data configuration engineer
Organization
This document describes the configuration of the UA5000. Each chapter provides an overview of the configuration first, and then describes the configuration flow and provides configuration examples (only some chapters provide configuration examples), and then describes the basic operations in detail.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ii
About This Document
For the readers who are familiar with the product, it is recommended that you read the configuration example directly. For the readers who are not familiar with the product, it is recommended that you read the basic operations first. The following table describes the contents of this document. Chapter 1 Managing the License 2 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal 3 CLI Operation Basics Describes The license feature and the procedure for configuring the license. The mode and procedure for configuring the maintenance terminal. The CLI operation features of the UA5000 and the basic operation that can be performed on theUA5000 through the CLI. The mode for connecting the UA5000 to the network management workstation and the procedure for the configuration on the UA5000 side. The classification of users and how to add, modify, delete, or disconnect a user. How to manage the shelf and the board of the UA5000. The functions of the DSP channel and the method for maintaining the system DSP resources. The method for realizing the clock synchronization and the operation for configuring the clock of the UA5000. How to configure an MG interface. How to configure the VoIP service through the PVMB control board and the A32 service board. The example for configuring the VAG service of theUA5000. How to configure the ISDN service through the PVMB control board, DSLD service board, and EDTB interface board. How to realize the FoIP function through the fax service. How to realize the MoIP function through the modem service. How to configure the R2 access. How to configure the V5 voice service.
4 Configuring the NMS
5 User Management 6 Device Management 7 Configuring the System DSP Channels 8 Configuring the Clock 9 Configuring the MG Interface 10 Configuring the VoIP Service 11 Configuring the VAG Service 12 Configuring the ISDN Service 13 Configuring the FoIP Service 14 Configuring the MoIP Service 15 Configuring the R2 Access Service 16 Configuring the V5 Voice Service
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
iii
About This Document
Chapter 17 Configuring the SPC 18 Configuring the DDI Service 19 Configuring the SDL Service 20 Configuring the MTA Service 21 Configuring the VFB Service 22 Configuring the ATI Service 23 Configuring the CDI Service 24 Configuring the EPON Upstream Transmission 25 Configuring the GPON Upstream Transmission
Describes How to configure the SPC. How to configure the DDI service. How to configure the SDL service. How to configure the MTA service. How to configure the VFB service. How to configure the ATI service. How to configure the CDI service. This topic describes the Ethernet passive optical network (EPON) technology and how to configure the EPON upstream transmission on the UA5000 MiniMSAN. This topic describes the gigabit-capable passive optical network (GPON) technology and describes how to configure the GPON upstream transmission on the UA5000 MiniMSAN. How to configure the remote subtending. How to configure the QoS of the voice service. How to configure the security of the voice service. Configuring the Reliability of the Voice Service.
26 Configuring the Remote Subtending 27 Configuring the QoS of the Voice Service 28 Configuring the Security of the Voice Service 29 Configuring the Reliability of the Voice Service 30 Configuring the Link Detection 31 Configuring the Environment Monitoring 32 Configuring the Integrated Data and Voice Networking Acronym and Abbreviation
How to configure the link detection on the UA5000 to ensure the quick detection and the quick switch of the link. This topic provides an overview of the environment monitoring and describes how to configure the environment monitoring on the UA5000. The related operation for configuring the integrated data and voice networking of the UA5000. Acronyms and abbreviations used in the document.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
iv
About This Document
Conventions
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol Description
DANGER
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could cause equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.
WARNING
CAUTION
TIP
NOTE
General Conventions
Convention Times New Roman Boldface Italic Courier New Description Normal paragraphs are in Times New Roman. Names of files, directories, folders, and users are in boldface. For example, log in as user root. Book titles are in italics. Terminal display is in Courier New.
Command Conventions
Convention Boldface Italic [] { x | y | ... } Description The keywords of a command line are in boldface. Command arguments are in italic. Items (keywords or arguments) in square brackets [ ] are optional. Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One item can be selected.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. v
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
About This Document
Convention [ x | y | ... ]
Description Optional alternative items are grouped in square brackets and separated by vertical bars. One item or none item can be selected. Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one or a maximum of all items can be selected.
{ x | y | ... } *
GUI Conventions
Convention Boldface > Description Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in Boldface. For example, click OK. Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Keyboard Operation
Format Key Key 1+Key 2 Key 1, Key 2 Description Press the key. For example, press Enter and press Tab. Press the keys concurrently. For example, pressing Ctrl+Alt +A means the three keys should be pressed concurrently. Press the keys in turn. For example, pressing Alt, A means the two keys should be pressed in turn.
Mouse Operation
Action Click Double-click Drag Description Select and release the primary mouse button without moving the pointer. Press the primary mouse button twice continuously and quickly without moving the pointer. Press and hold the primary mouse button and move the pointer to a certain position.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
vi
About This Document
Update History
Updates between document versions are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document version contains all updates made to previous versions.
Updates in Issue 08 (2011-11-15)

Based on issue 07 (2010-10-30), the document is updated as follows: The following information is modified: l l l l l 9.1 Introduction to the MG Interface 9.3 Configuration Example of the MG Interface (the MGCP Protocol) 9.4 Adding an MG Interface 10.2 Configuration Example of the VoIP Service 10.3 Configuration Example of the VoIP Service (in Integrated Upstream Mode)

Based on issue 06 (2010-05-30), the document is updated as follows: The following information is modified: l 32 Configuring the Integrated Data and Voice Networking

Based on issue 05 (2009-04-30), the document is updated as follows: The structure and content of the document are optimized comprehensively so that the document can better cater to user preferences and guide users.

Based on issue 04 (2008-11-20), the document is updated as follows: The following information is modified: l l l l l l l 9 Configuring the MG Interface 10 Configuring the VoIP Service 11 Configuring the VAG Service 12 Configuring the ISDN Service 13 Configuring the FoIP Service 14 Configuring the MoIP Service 15 Configuring the R2 Access Service

Based on issue 03 (2008-08-20), the document is updated as follows: The following information is added: 10.3 Configuration Example of the VoIP Service (in Integrated Upstream Mode)
Issue 08 (2011-11-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii
About This Document

Based on issue 02 (2008-05-20), the document is updated as follows: The following information is added: l l l 24 Configuring the EPON Upstream Transmission 25 Configuring the GPON Upstream Transmission 31 Configuring the Environment Monitoring

Based on issue 01 (2008-03-25), the document is updated as follows: The following information is added: l l 9.13 Configuring the Overload Control of the MGC 9.14 Configuring the Overload Control of the MG

This is the first release.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
viii
Contents
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii 1 Managing the License...................................................................................................................1
1.1 Introduction to the License.................................................................................................................................2 1.2 License Principle................................................................................................................................................3 1.3 Configuration Example of the License Application...........................................................................................3 1.4 Configuring the ESN..........................................................................................................................................6 1.5 Configuring the License Server..........................................................................................................................7
2 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal...................................................................................9

2.1 Introduction to the Maintenance Terminal.......................................................................................................10 2.2 Configuring the Terminal Through the Local Serial Port................................................................................11 2.3 Configuring the Terminal Through the Remote Serial Port.............................................................................14 2.4 Configuring the Outband Management Interface.............................................................................................19 2.5 Configuring the Inband Management Interface................................................................................................22
3 CLI Operation Basics..................................................................................................................26

3.1 Introduction to the CLI.....................................................................................................................................27 3.2 CLI Features.....................................................................................................................................................27 3.2.1 Introduction to the Command Mode.......................................................................................................27 3.2.2 Intelligent Matching................................................................................................................................28 3.2.3 Edit Characteristics..................................................................................................................................29 3.2.4 Interaction Characteristics.......................................................................................................................30 3.2.5 Parameter Prompt....................................................................................................................................30 3.2.6 Display Characteristics............................................................................................................................31 3.2.7 Saving and Querying the History Commands.........................................................................................32 3.2.8 CLI Error Prompt.....................................................................................................................................33 3.3 Basic Operation Through CLI..........................................................................................................................33 3.3.1 Obtaining the Online Help Information...................................................................................................33 3.3.2 Switching the Terminal Language...........................................................................................................35 3.3.3 Configuring the System Time..................................................................................................................36 3.3.4 Setting the System Name.........................................................................................................................36 3.3.5 Setting the Terminal Type.......................................................................................................................37 3.3.6 Setting the Timeout Exit Time................................................................................................................37 3.3.7 Locking the Terminal..............................................................................................................................38 Issue 08 (2011-11-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ix
Contents
3.3.8 Clearing the Terminal Screen..................................................................................................................39 3.3.9 Querying the Version Information..........................................................................................................39 3.3.10 Querying the CPU Usage of a Board.....................................................................................................40 3.3.11 Testing the Network Status....................................................................................................................40
4 Configuring the NMS.................................................................................................................42

4.1 Introduction to the NMS...................................................................................................................................43 4.2 Configuration Example of an Outband NMS...................................................................................................43 4.3 Configuration Example of an Inband NMS......................................................................................................45 4.4 Configuring the SNMP Agent..........................................................................................................................48 4.4.1 Configuring the Community Name and Read-Write Authority..............................................................48 4.4.2 Enabling Sending the Trap Packet...........................................................................................................49 4.4.3 Configuring the IP Address of the Target Host for the Trap Packet.......................................................49 4.4.4 Configuring the Administrator ID of the Device.....................................................................................50 4.4.5 Configuring the Location of the Device..................................................................................................51
5 User Management........................................................................................................................53
5.1 Introduction to the Operation User...................................................................................................................54 5.2 Adding a User...................................................................................................................................................54 5.3 Modifying the User Attributes..........................................................................................................................56 5.3.1 Changing a User Level............................................................................................................................56 5.3.2 Changing the User Password...................................................................................................................57 5.3.3 Changing the Number of Re-logins.........................................................................................................58 5.3.4 Modifying the Supplementary Information About a User.......................................................................59 5.4 Disconnecting an Online User..........................................................................................................................60 5.5 Deleting a User.................................................................................................................................................61
6 Device Management...................................................................................................................63
6.1 Introduction to the Device................................................................................................................................65 6.2 Adding the Connection Between the Shelves...................................................................................................66 6.3 Setting the Description of a Shelf.....................................................................................................................67 6.4 Resetting a Control Board................................................................................................................................68 6.5 Adding a Service Board....................................................................................................................................69 6.6 Deleting a Service Board..................................................................................................................................70 6.7 Resetting a Service Board.................................................................................................................................71 6.8 Prohibiting a Service Board..............................................................................................................................71
7 Configuring the System DSP Channels..................................................................................74

7.1 Introduction to the System DSP Channels.......................................................................................................75 7.2 Configuring the Attributes of the DSP Channel...............................................................................................75 7.3 Configuring the Number of the Globally Shared DSP Channels.....................................................................77 7.4 Configuring the Number of DSP Channels in the DSP Resources Reserved for the VAG.............................79 7.5 Prohibiting the DSP Channel............................................................................................................................80
8 Configuring the Clock................................................................................................................83

Issue 08 (2011-11-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. x
Contents
8.1 Introduction to the Clock..................................................................................................................................84 8.2 Configuration Example of a Clock Source.......................................................................................................85 8.3 Configuring the Reference Clock Source.........................................................................................................87 8.4 Setting the Clock Source Priority.....................................................................................................................88
9 Configuring the MG Interface..................................................................................................90

9.1 Introduction to the MG Interface......................................................................................................................92 9.2 Configuration Example of the MG Interface (the H.248 Protocol)..................................................................92 9.3 Configuration Example of the MG Interface (the MGCP Protocol)................................................................95 9.4 Adding an MG Interface...................................................................................................................................97 9.5 Configuring the IP Address Pool....................................................................................................................102 9.6 Configuring the Attributes of the MG Interface (the H.248 Protocol)...........................................................103 9.7 Configuring the Attributes of the MG Interface (the MGCP Protocol)..........................................................109 9.8 Configuring the Software Parameters of an MG Interface (the H.248 Protocol)...........................................112 9.9 Configuring the Software Parameters of an MG Interface (the MGCP Protocol).........................................114 9.10 Configuring the Ringing Mode of an MG Interface.....................................................................................115 9.11 Configuring Digitmaps of the MG Interface (the H.248 Protocol)..............................................................117 9.12 Configuring Digitmaps of the MG Interface (the MGCP Protocol).............................................................119 9.13 Configuring the Overload Control of the MGC...........................................................................................121 9.14 Configuring the Overload Control of the MG..............................................................................................122 9.15 Enabling an MG Interface............................................................................................................................124
10 Configuring the VoIP Service...............................................................................................126

10.1 Introduction to the VoIP Service..................................................................................................................128 10.2 Configuration Example of the VoIP Service................................................................................................128 10.3 Configuration Example of the VoIP Service (in Integrated Upstream Mode).............................................135 10.4 Configuring the Standalone Service.............................................................................................................142 10.5 Configuring the System Parameters.............................................................................................................144 10.6 Configuring the POTS Subscriber Data and Port Attributes........................................................................145 10.7 Configuring the QoS IP Precedence.............................................................................................................149 10.8 Configuring the QoS VLAN Priority...........................................................................................................152 10.9 Separating the Signaling IP Address from the Media IP Address................................................................153 10.10 Enabling the Voice Quality Enhanced Function........................................................................................154
11 Configuring the VAG Service...............................................................................................157

11.1 Introduction to the VAG Service..................................................................................................................158 11.2 Configuration Example of the VAG Service................................................................................................158 11.3 Configuring the TID Profile of the VAG.....................................................................................................163
12 Configuring the ISDN Service..............................................................................................167

12.1 Introduction to the ISDN Service.................................................................................................................168 12.2 Configuration Example of the P2P ISDN BRA Service..............................................................................169 12.3 Configuration Example of the P2MP ISDN BRA Service...........................................................................174 12.4 Configuration Example of the ISDN PRA Service (When the EDTB Service Board Is Used)...................179 12.5 Configuring the SIGTRAN Protocol Stack..................................................................................................183 Issue 08 (2011-11-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xi
Contents
13 Configuring the FoIP Service................................................................................................187

13.1 Introduction to the FoIP Service...................................................................................................................189 13.2 Configuring the V2 Transparent Transmission Flow...................................................................................190 13.3 Configuring the Selfswitch Transparent Transmission Flow.......................................................................192 13.4 Configuring the V2 T.38 Flow.....................................................................................................................194 13.5 Configuring the Selfswitch T.38 Flow.........................................................................................................196 13.6 Configuring the V3 Flow..............................................................................................................................198 13.7 Configuring the V5 Flow..............................................................................................................................199 13.8 Configuring the High-Speed Fax..................................................................................................................201 13.9 Configuring the High-Low Speed Selfswitch Fax.......................................................................................203 13.10 Configuring the Fax Transmission Parameters..........................................................................................205 13.11 Configuring the Fax Training Parameters..................................................................................................206
14 Configuring the MoIP Service..............................................................................................208

14.1 Introduction to the MoIP Service.................................................................................................................209 14.2 Configuring the MoIP Service......................................................................................................................209 14.3 Configuring the Modem Transmission Parameters......................................................................................210
15 Configuring the R2 Access Service......................................................................................212

15.1 Introduction to the R2 Access Service.........................................................................................................213 15.2 Configuration Example of the R2 Access Service.......................................................................................214 15.3 Adding an R2 Profile....................................................................................................................................219 15.4 Configuring the Adaptation Data of the R2 Profile .....................................................................................220 15.4.1 Configuring the R2 Address Receiving Attributes..............................................................................220 15.4.2 Configuring the R2 Address Sending Attributes.................................................................................221 15.4.3 Configuring the R2 Profile Attributes.................................................................................................222 15.4.4 Configuring the R2 Line Signaling Attributes....................................................................................222 15.4.5 Configuring the R2 Register Signaling Attributes..............................................................................223 15.5 Loading an R2 Signaling Configuration File...............................................................................................224
16 Configuring the V5 Voice Service........................................................................................226

16.1 Introduction to the V5 Voice Service...........................................................................................................227 16.2 Configuration Example of the V5 Voice Service.........................................................................................228 16.3 Configuring a PSTN Subscriber...................................................................................................................233 16.4 Configuring an ISDN Subscriber.................................................................................................................234 16.5 Blocking a V5 Service Port..........................................................................................................................236 16.6 Configuring the Loopback for a V5 Service Port.........................................................................................236
17 Configuring the SPC...............................................................................................................238

17.1 Introduction to the SPC................................................................................................................................239 17.2 Configuration Example of the Common SPC..............................................................................................240 17.3 Configuration Example of the U Interface Transparent Transmission.........................................................242
18 Configuring the DDI Service................................................................................................246

18.1 Introduction to the DDI Service...................................................................................................................247 Issue 08 (2011-11-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xii
Contents
18.2 Configuration Example of the DDI Service.................................................................................................248
19 Configuring the SDL Service................................................................................................252

19.1 Introduction to the SDL Service...................................................................................................................253 19.2 Configuration Example of the Normal SDL Service....................................................................................253
20 Configuring the MTA Service...............................................................................................258

20.1 Introduction to the MTA Service..................................................................................................................259 20.2 Configuration Example of the MTA Service...............................................................................................259
21 Configuring the VFB Service................................................................................................263

21.1 Introduction to the VFB Service...................................................................................................................264 21.2 Configuration Example of the VFB Service.................................................................................................264
22 Configuring the ATI Service.................................................................................................268

22.1 Introduction to the ATI Service....................................................................................................................269 22.2 Configuration Example of the 2-Wire/4-Wire VF and E&M Trunk Service Transparent Transmission ..............................................................................................................................................................................269 22.3 Configuration Example of the Hotline Service on the E&M Trunk Interface.............................................272
23 Configuring the CDI Service.................................................................................................275

23.1 Introduction to the CDI Service....................................................................................................................276 23.2 Configuration Example of the Z Interface Extension Service......................................................................276 23.3 Configuration Example of the PBX-Bothway Service.................................................................................279
24 Configuring the EPON Upstream Transmission..............................................................282

24.1 Introduction to the EPON Upstream Transmission......................................................................................283 24.2 Configuration Example of the EPON Upstream Transmission....................................................................283 24.3 Querying the Attributes of the Ports on the EP1A Board.............................................................................290 24.4 Querying the Statistics of the Ports on the EP1A Board..............................................................................291
25 Configuring the GPON Upstream Transmission..............................................................292

25.1 Introduction to the GPON Upstream Transmission.....................................................................................293 25.2 Configuration Example of the GPON Upstream Transmission...................................................................293 25.3 Querying the Attributes of the Ports on the GP1A Board............................................................................300 25.4 Querying the Statistics of the Port on the GP1A Board...............................................................................301
26 Configuring the Remote Subtending..................................................................................304

26.1 Introduction to the Remote Subtending........................................................................................................305 26.2 Configuration Example of the E1 Subtending..............................................................................................305
27 Configuring the QoS of the Voice Service.........................................................................311

27.1 Introduction to the Voice Service QoS.........................................................................................................312 27.2 Configuration Example of the QoS Test Task..............................................................................................312
28 Configuring the Security of the Voice Service..................................................................314

28.1 Introduction to the Voice Service Security...................................................................................................315 28.1.1 Registration Process When the H.248 Protocol Is Used.....................................................................315 28.1.2 Registration Process When the MGCP Protocol Is Used....................................................................316 Issue 08 (2011-11-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xiii
Contents
28.2 Configuring the Device Authentication........................................................................................................318 28.2.1 Configuring the Device Authentication (the H.248 Protocol).............................................................318 28.2.2 Configuring the Device Authentication (the MGCP Protocol)...........................................................320
29 Configuring the Reliability of the Voice Service..............................................................323

29.1 Introduction to the Voice Service Reliability...............................................................................................324 29.2 Configuring the Dual Homing......................................................................................................................325 29.2.1 Configuring the Dual Homing (the H.248 Protocol)...........................................................................325 29.2.2 Configuring the Dual Homing (the MGCP Protocol).........................................................................326 29.3 Configuring the Standalone Service.............................................................................................................327 29.4 Configuring an Emergency Channel............................................................................................................328 29.5 Configuring the Separation Between the Signaling Stream and the Media Stream.....................................329
30 Configuring the Link Detection...........................................................................................331

30.1 Introduction to the Link Detection...............................................................................................................332 30.2 Configuration Example of the ARP Link Detection....................................................................................332 30.3 Configuration Example of the BFD Link Detection....................................................................................335 30.4 Configuration Example of the ETH_OAM Layer 2 Link Detection............................................................339
31 Configuring the Environment Monitoring.........................................................................344

31.1 Introduction to the Environment Monitoring...............................................................................................346 31.2 Configuration Example of the ESC..............................................................................................................347 31.3 Configuration Example of the Fan Monitoring............................................................................................351 31.4 Configuration Example of the Power Monitoring........................................................................................353 31.5 Configuration Example of the Universal Power Monitoring.......................................................................356 31.6 Adding an EMU............................................................................................................................................358 31.7 Setting the ESC Analog Parameters.............................................................................................................359 31.8 Setting the ESC Digital Parameters..............................................................................................................361 31.9 Configuring the Fan Alarm Reporting..........................................................................................................362 31.10 Setting the Fan Speed Adjustment Mode...................................................................................................363 31.11 Setting the Fan Speed.................................................................................................................................364 31.12 Setting the Power Supply Parameters.........................................................................................................365
32 Configuring the Integrated Data and Voice Networking................................................371

32.1 Networking...................................................................................................................................................373 32.2 Prerequisites..................................................................................................................................................373 32.3 Data Plan (IPM)............................................................................................................................................374 32.4 Data Plan (PVM)..........................................................................................................................................375 32.5 Configuration Procedure (IPM)....................................................................................................................376 32.6 Configuration Procedure (PVM)..................................................................................................................380 32.7 Verification...................................................................................................................................................382
A Acronyms and Abbreviations................................................................................................383
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
xiv
1 Managing the License
1
About This Chapter
Managing the License
The license function can control the function entries and resource entries of the UA5000. To ensure that the required service on theUA5000 can be activated and accessed, you must implement the management of the license functions. 1.1 Introduction to the License The license function can control the function entries and resource entries of the UA5000. The prerequisite for using the license function normally is specifying the functions of and relations between the license server, license file, function entries, and resource entries. 1.2 License Principle The UA5000 adopts the network license scheme to manage and control the license. 1.3 Configuration Example of the License Application Configure the license equipment serial number (ESN) and specify the license server for the UA5000 so that the UA5000 and license server can communicate normally, and theUA5000 supports the controlled features normally. 1.4 Configuring the ESN The ESN uniquely identifies a device on the license server. Only after the UA5000 is configured with an ESN, the license server can identify the device. 1.5 Configuring the License Server Each UA5000 corresponds to a license file. This license file is saved on the license server which manages the license functions. Configure the IP address of the license server of the UA5000 and the TCP port number used for the communication between the UA5000 and the license server. Thus, the UA5000 and the license server can communicate with each other.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
1.1 Introduction to the License

The license function can control the function entries and resource entries of the UA5000. The prerequisite for using the license function normally is specifying the functions of and relations between the license server, license file, function entries, and resource entries.
Service Description
With the license function enabled, the license server performs license control on the function entries and the resource entries supported by the UA5000 to provide individualized services for users.
Service Specifications
The controlled features are the features that are controlled through the license. These features are unavailable without authorization. Such controlled features include function entries and resource entries. l l A function entry refers to the entry whose license is controlled based on the function. A resource entry refers to the entry whose license is controlled based on the number.
The controllable function entries and resource entries of the UA5000 include the following: l Calling feature Number of PSTN subscribers Number of BRA subscribers Number of PRA subscribers l l SPC service Number of SPCs Interface feature Number of V5 interfaces Number of H248 interfaces Number of MGCP interfaces Number of R2 subscribers l l EMM control power Number of EMM control power supplies MG property T38 coding and decoding function G723 and G729 coding and decoding function 2198 redundancy function Dual homing function of the H248 interface Standalone function of the H248 interface Dual homing function of the MGCP interface Dual homing function of L2UA
Issue 08 (2011-11-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2

NOTE
l If you need to use the license function supported by the UA5000, consider the installation of the license server in network planning. l It is recommended that you install the software of the license server on the same computer with the software of the network management system (NMS) server. If the NMS server does not exist, install one license server in the network.
1.2 License Principle

The UA5000 adopts the network license scheme to manage and control the license.
License Function Principle

l When the license server is deployed in a network, the license server can be installed on the same computer with the NMS server, but the two servers are different. The license server can also be installed on a separate server. Each multi-service access node (MSAN) device functions as a license client. The license server manages the licenses of all the clients in a centralized manner. In the management range of each license server, each product has one license file. Generally, a management range can be a district or a city. The license file is stored on the license server. The license file defines the product resources controlled by the license. One license server can manage multiple products. Hence, multiple license files can be stored on one license server.
License Implementation Principle

l In the system initialization process of the UA5000, each service module must register their controlled resource entries and function entries. After the system runs in the normal state, based on the registration information, the management module of a license client obtains the authorization information about the license controlling entries of the device from the license server. When you configure a service module through the command line or the NMS, the device checks whether the resource entries of the service module are overloaded or the function entries of the service module are authorized. For license-controlled resource entries, if the resource entries are overloaded, the system terminates the service configuration and prompts that the license resources are insufficient. For license-controlled function entries, if the function entries are not authorized, the system prompts you that the functions are unauthorized. If the resource entries are not overloaded or the function entries are authorized, the system allows you to continue the service configuration. For a license-controlled resources entry, the license resources applied for the service module are released when the service configuration is deleted.
1.3 Configuration Example of the License Application

Configure the license equipment serial number (ESN) and specify the license server for the UA5000 so that the UA5000 and license server can communicate normally, and theUA5000 supports the controlled features normally.
Prerequisite
l l l The network devices and the lines must be normal. All boards of the UA5000 must be normal. The license function must be enabled.
Networking
Figure 1-1 shows the example network for configuring the license application. The license function is enabled on the UA5000. The license server is installed on the same computer as the NMS server (N2000 BMS). The license management tool installed on the N2000 client configures and manages the license file. UA5000_A communicates with the license server through port 0/5/0. The TCP port number is 10010. Figure 1-1 Example network for configuring the license application
N2000 BMS&License Server
100.100.100.1/24
N2000 Client
60.60.60.2/24 60.60.60.1/24
Router
......
UA5000_A UA5000_B UA5000_N
Data Plan
Table 1-1 provides the data plan for configuring the license application. Table 1-1 Data plan for configuring the license application Item License server
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
Data IP address: 100.100.100.1/24

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4
Item
Data TCP port number: 10010
UA5000_A Router
IP address of the layer 3 interface: 60.60.60.1/24 IP address of the port connected to UA5000_A: 60.60.60.2/24
NOTE
l The configuration at the UA5000 side is the same. This section uses the configuration of UA5000_A as an example. l This topic describes only the configuration at the device side. For details on how to configure the license server, see the related configuration manual of the license server.
Configuration Flowchart
Figure 1-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the license application. Figure 1-2 Flowchart for configuring the license application
Start
Configure the ESN
Specify the license server
Save the data
End
Procedure
Step 1 Configure the equipment serial number (ESN).
NOTE
At the license server side, you need to add the ESN of the device to the license server, and add the function entries and resource entries for the device.
huawei(config)#license esn 60.60.60.1
Step 2 Specify the license server.

huawei(config)#license server ipaddress 100.100.100.1 tcpport 10010
Step 3 Save the data.


huawei(config)#save
----End
Result
After the configuration, run the display license info command to check whether the communication between the device and the license server is normal. UA5000_A is initialized, and each service module can register the controlled resource entries or function entries.
NOTE
The license does not take effect immediately after it is configured. By default, the license takes effect 15-20 minutes after it is configured successfully. After configuring the license, if you run the save command to save the configuration, and then run the reset command to reset the device, the license takes effect immediately after the system resets.
1.4 Configuring the ESN

The ESN uniquely identifies a device on the license server. Only after the UA5000 is configured with an ESN, the license server can identify the device.
Context
l l The ESN of the UA5000 must be an existing IP address in the IP address pool. You can run the ip address command to add the IP address to the IP address pool. After adding the ESN for the UA5000, you need to add the ESN of the device to the license server, and add the function entries and resource entries for the device.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the license esn command to configure the ESN for the device. Step 2 Run the display license info command to query the basic information about the license. ----End
Example
To configure the ESN, do as follows:
huawei(config)#license esn 60.60.60.1 huawei(config)#display license info License switch: enable ESN: 60.60.60.1 IP address of the first server: 100.100.100.1 IP address of the second server: 200.200.200.1 TCP port number: 1024 Communication status: abnormal License status: unregistered
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)

NOTE
l When the upper layer device is disconnected, the communication status of the license client is abnormal. The license status of the license client is unregistered. In this case, the controlled resources cannot be configured and the controlled function cannot be enabled. l When the related configuration is complete in the network, the communication status of the license client is normal. The license status of the license client is registered. In this case, new controlled resources can be configured and controlled functions can be enabled within the management range of the license.
Related Operation
Table 1-2 lists the related operation for configuring the ESN for the device. Table 1-2 Related operation for configuring the ESN for the device To Configure the license server Run the Command... license server
1.5 Configuring the License Server

Each UA5000 corresponds to a license file. This license file is saved on the license server which manages the license functions. Configure the IP address of the license server of the UA5000 and the TCP port number used for the communication between the UA5000 and the license server. Thus, the UA5000 and the license server can communicate with each other.
Context
l l l The IP address of the license server and the TCP port number must be the same as the data in the actual network plan. When the IP address of the license server and the TCP port number change, you need to re-configure the device. Two IP addresses of the license server can be configured at the device side. The two IP addresses must be different from each other. Only one TCP port number can be configured at the device side.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the license server command to configure the license server. Step 2 Run the display license info command to query the basic information about the license. ----End
Example
To configure the IP address of license server 1 as 10.10.10.1, the IP address of license server 2 as 20.20.20.1, and TCP port number as 1024, do as follows:
huawei(config)#license server ipaddress 10.10.10.1 20.20.20.1 tcpport 1024 huawei(config)#display license info Special license switch: disable Basic license switch: enable
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)

ESN: 10.71.55.192 IP address of the first server: 10.10.10.1 IP address of the second server: 20.20.20.1 TCP port number: 1024 Communication status: normal License status: registered
NOTE
l When the upper layer device is not connected, the communication status of the license client is abnormal. The license status of the license client is unregistered. In this case, the controlled resources cannot be configured and the controlled function cannot be enabled. l When the related configuration is complete in the network, the communication status of the license client is normal. The license status of the license client is registered. In this case, new controlled resources can be configured and controlled functions can be enabled within the management range of the license.
Related Operation
Table 1-3 lists the related operation for configuring the license server. Table 1-3 Related operation for configuring the license server To... Configure the ESN Run the Command... license esn
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
2 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal
Configuring the Maintenance Terminal
About This Chapter

This topic describes the different maintenance modes of theUA5000 through the maintenance terminal. 2.1 Introduction to the Maintenance Terminal Introduction to the maintenance terminal includes the different maintenance modes of the UA5000 through a maintenance terminal and the features of different maintenance modes. 2.2 Configuring the Terminal Through the Local Serial Port Connect the serial port on the PC to the UA5000 directly. Then, log in to the UA5000 CLI system through the HyperTerminal of the Widows OS to maintain and manage the device locally. 2.3 Configuring the Terminal Through the Remote Serial Port Connect the serial port on the PC to the UA5000 remotely. Then, log in to the UA5000 CLI system through the HyperTerminal of the Windows OS to maintain the device remotely. 2.4 Configuring the Outband Management Interface After the outband management interface is configured successfully, you can use the PC to log in to the UA5000 through the outband management interface of the UA5000 for maintenance and management. 2.5 Configuring the Inband Management Interface This topic describes how to log in to the UA5000 through the inband management interface of the UA5000 for maintenance and management. This example considers the PVMB control board as an example. The configuration of the PVMD control board is the same as the configuration of the PVMB control board. Therefore, the configuration of the PVMD control is not described here.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
2.1 Introduction to the Maintenance Terminal

Introduction to the maintenance terminal includes the different maintenance modes of the UA5000 through a maintenance terminal and the features of different maintenance modes. You can maintain the UA5000 Universal Access Unit (the UA5000) through the maintenance terminal in the command line interface (CLI) mode. The configuration of the maintenance terminal includes the following modes: l l l l 2.2 Configuring the Terminal Through the Local Serial Port 2.3 Configuring the Terminal Through the Remote Serial Port 2.4 Configuring the Outband Management Interface 2.5 Configuring the Inband Management Interface
Table 2-1 lists the features of different maintenance modes. Table 2-1 Features of different maintenance modes Maintenance Mode Local serial port Description Uses the embedded HyperTerminal of the operating system (OS) to complete the networking for managing and maintaining network devices. Uses the HyperTerminal of the OS to complete the networking for managing and maintaining network devices. Uses the service channel of the UA5000 to complete the networking for managing and maintaining networking devices. Uses the maintenance network port (ETH) on the control board of the UA5000 to complete the networking for managing and maintaining network devices. Feature The network management software is not required for the CLI maintenance. Generally, user interface is provided by the software embedded in the OS or by the commercial software.
Remote serial port
In the case of the maintenance through the remote serial port, you need to connect a modem to the UA5000 and another modem to the maintenance terminal, and then connect the maintenance terminal to the UA5000 through the modem dial-up. l Advantages: It uses flexible networking, and does not require additional networking devices, thus saving the networking cost. l Disadvantages: The maintenance cannot be performed if the service channel fails. l Advantages: It provides reliable device management channel. The fault can be located in time even if the managed device fails. l Disadvantages: Additional devices are required to provide the maintenance channel that is independent of the service channel.
Inband management interface
Outband management interface
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
10
2.2 Configuring the Terminal Through the Local Serial Port

Connect the serial port on the PC to the UA5000 directly. Then, log in to the UA5000 CLI system through the HyperTerminal of the Widows OS to maintain and manage the device locally.
Networking
Figure 2-1 shows the example network for configuring the terminal through the local serial port. Figure 2-1 Example network for configuring the terminal through the local serial port
PVMB
ETH0 ETH1 COM UA5000
Local maintenance serial port cable
Figure 2-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the terminal through the local serial port.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
11
Figure 2-2 Flowchart for configuring the terminal through the local serial port
Start
Connect the serial port cable
Start the HyperTerminal
Set the parameters of the terminal
Set the terminal emulation type
Set the line delay and the character delay
Log in to the system
End
Procedure
Step 1 Connect the serial port cable. Use a local maintenance serial port cable to connect the serial port of a PC to the maintenance serial port (COM) on the control board of the UA5000, as shown in Figure 2-1. Step 2 Start the HyperTerminal. 1. Set up a connection. On a PC, choose Start > Programs > Accessories > Communication > HyperTerminal to display the Connection Description dialog box. Enter the connection name, and click OK.
NOTE
When you use the HyperTerminal for the first time, the system displays the dialog box of the default telnet program.
2.
Configure the serial port. Select the standard character terminal or PC terminal serial port that is actually connected to the UA5000. Assume that it is COM2. Click OK.
Step 3 Set the parameters of the terminal. In the dialog box that is displayed, set the parameters as follows:
l Baud rate: 9600 bit/s l Data bits: 8 l Parity: None l Stop bits: 1 l Data flow control: None
NOTE
l When setting the baud rate, make sure that the baud rate of the HyperTerminal is the same as the baud rate of the serial port in the system. By default, the baud rate of the serial port is 9600 bit/s. l The illegible characters may exist in the input information after you log in to the system. This is due to baud rate inconsistency between the HyperTerminal and the system. In this case, use a different baud rate to log in to the system. The system supports the baud rates of 9600 bit/s, 19200 bit/s, 38400 bit/s, 57600 bit/s, and 115200 bit/s.
Click OK to display the interface of the HyperTerminal. Step 4 Set the terminal emulation type. Choose File > Properties on the HyperTerminal interface. Click the Settings tab in the dialog box that is displayed. Select VT100 or Auto Detect as the type of terminal emulation, as shown in Figure 2-3. Figure 2-3 Type of terminal emulation
Step 5 Set the line delay and the character delay. Click ASCII Setup. Set the line delay and the character delay for transmitting ASCII to 200 ms.

NOTE
When you paste text to the HyperTerminal, the character delay controls the character transmission speed, and the line delay controls the interval of transmitting each line. A very short delay may lead to the loss of characters. If the pasted text is not displayed properly, you can modify the settings.
----End
Result
On the HyperTerminal interface, press Enter. The system displays a message, prompting you to enter the user name. Enter the user name and the password for user registration (By default, the super user name is root and password is admin). When the registration is completed successfully, the prompt of the command line is displayed (such as huawei>), as shown in the following figure.
If the login fails, click the Hang-up icon and then click the Dial icon. If the login fails again, check and ensure that the parameter settings and physical connections are correct, and then log in to the system again.
2.3 Configuring the Terminal Through the Remote Serial Port

Connect the serial port on the PC to the UA5000 remotely. Then, log in to the UA5000 CLI system through the HyperTerminal of the Windows OS to maintain the device remotely.
Prerequisite
Connect the public switched telephone network (PSTN) modem on the UA5000 side and the PC side, before using the serial port for remote maintenance. In this way, you can set up a remote connection between the PC and the UA5000 through modem dial-up.
The PSTN modem on the UA5000 side is referred to as the called modem. The modem on the PC side is referred to as the calling modem. The modems must meet the following requirements: l l l Both the calling and called modems must comply with the related standards, and support AT command set. The called modem must be an external modem. The calling modem can be either a built-in modem or an external modem. For better compatibility and to facilitate status monitoring, it is recommended that you use an external modem made by the vendor of the called modem.
Precautions
l l l After the dial-up and before the connection is set up, pressing any key on the keyboard ends the call. Stop the connection after the remote maintenance. Do not close the HyperTerminal. Otherwise, certain types of remote modems are always online and the next dial-up fails. The following configuration is based on modems of the same type. In actual applications, you can configure the modems by referring to the related AT command set.
Networking
Figure 2-4 shows the example network for configuring the terminal through the remote serial port. Figure 2-4 Example network for configuring the terminal through the remote serial port
Local maintenance serial port cable
Telephone line
ETH0 ETH1 COM
The called modem
PVM
UA5000
Telephone line
Local The calling maintenance serial port PC modem cable
Figure 2-5 shows the flowchart for configuring the terminal through the remote serial port.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
15
Figure 2-5 Flowchart for configuring the terminal through the remote serial port
Start
Set the parameters of the called modem
Set the parameters of the calling modem
Set up the configuration environment
Start the HyperTerminal
Set the parameters of the terminal
Dial up on the HyperTerminal
End
Procedure
Step 1 Set the parameters of the called modem. Only three signal lines, namely SD, RD and SG, are used for connecting the UA5000 and the modem. Therefore, before connecting the modem to the terminal, shield the handshake signals and flow control signals of the modem. The configuration of a modem requires an intelligent terminal. The following modem configuration is based on the HyperTerminal on Windows platform. 1. Connect the serial port of the modem to the port of the maintenance terminal by using the dedicated cable for the modem, and then power on the system. A driver is not required at this step. Assume that the modem is connected to the COM2 port. Start the HyperTerminal. Select Direct to COM2 in the column of Connect using in the dialog box that is displayed. Set the parameters of the serial port as follows: 9600 bit/s for baud rate, 8 for data bits, 1 for stop bits, none for parity, and none for flow control.
2.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
16

NOTE
l After the connection, the terminal may not display anything. This is because the display function of the modem is disabled during the previous configuration. To enable the terminal to display the latest input and output information, run the AT&F command to restore the default settings and press Enter. l Due to the rate limitation of the modem, you can set the baud rate of the maintenance port of the UA5000 to 9600 bit/s or 19200 bit/s.
3.
Check whether the modem works in the normal state. In the HyperTerminal, run the AT&F command to restore the default settings of the modem. Check if an OK message is displayed on the screen. If an OK message is displayed, the modem works in the normal state.
4.
In the HyperTerminal, run the following commands:

ATS0=1 AT&D AT&K0 AT&R1 //Enable the auto replay function (ringing sound). //Ignore the DTR signals. //Disable the flow control function. //Ignore the RTS signals.
AT&S0 //Set DSR as high level. ATEQ1&W //Disable the modems response to the command when executing the command and saving the configurations.
NOTE
l After executing the previous command, run the AT command to disable the echo function of the terminal and prohibit it from displaying the execution results. l You can run the baudrate command to modify the baud rate of the maintenance serial port of the UA5000. To prevent an extremely high bit rate on the line between the two modems, you can set AT$MB=9600 (or another value) before running the ATEQ1&W command.
Step 2 Set the parameters of the calling modem. After power-on, the calling modem can function in the normal state without any configuration. If a non-standard cable is used to connect the maintenance terminal to the modem, shield the handshake signals and the flow control signals of the modem before the connection. For details on this operation, see the settings of the parameters on the called modem. Step 3 Set up the configuration environment. Figure 2-4 shows the configuration environment. 1. Connect the called modem. Insert the telephone line into the LINE port of the called modem. Connect the serial port of the called modem to the maintenance port COM of the PVM board by using the dedicated serial port cable for the UA5000. Power on the modem. 2. Connect the calling modem. In the case of an external modem, insert the telephone line into the LINE port of the calling modem. Connect the serial port of the calling modem to the serial port of the maintenance terminal by using the dedicated cable for the modem. Power on the modem. In the case of a built-in modem, you only need to plug the telephone line into the LINE port of the calling modem. Step 4 Start the HyperTerminal.
1.
Set up a connection. Choose Start > Programs > Accessories > Communication > HyperTerminal to display the Connection Description dialog box. Enter the connection name, and click OK.
2.
Configure the serial port. Select the standard character terminal or PC terminal serial port that is actually connected to the UA5000. Assume it to be serial COM2. Click OK.
Step 5 Set the parameters of the terminal. In the dialog box that is displayed, set the parameters as follows: l Baud rate: 9600 bit/s l Data bits: 8 l Parity: None l Stop bits: 1 l Flow control: None
NOTE
l When setting the baud rate, make sure that the baud rate of the HyperTerminal is the same as the baud rate of the serial port in the system. By default, the baud rate of the serial port is 9600 bit/s. l There may be illegible characters in the input information after you log in to the system. This is usually due to baud rate inconsistency between the HyperTerminal and the system. In this case, use a different baud rate to log in to the system. The system supports the baud rates of 9600 bit/s, 19200 bit/s, 38400 bit/s, 57600 bit/s, and 115200 bit/s.
Click OK to display the interface of the HyperTerminal. Step 6 Dial up on the HyperTerminal. l External modem: To set up a connection with an external modem, select a serial port, and not a modem, from the Connect Using drop-down list in the HyperTerminal. On the HyperTerminal interface, run the AT command for dial-up, for example, ATDTXXXXXXXX. Press Enter. XXXXXXXX represents the telephone number of the remote modem connected to the host. For details on the dial-up commands, see the AT command set. For example, ATDT0 W 020XXXXXXXX means to dial "0" for connection with the external line. Wait for the dialing tone from the exchange, and then dial the telephone number 020XXXXXXXX. l Built-in modem: Run the HyperTerminal. Set the called number on the Hyperterminal. Select the modem from the Connect Using drop-down list. Click Configure in the properties > connect to dialog box to display the modem properties setting interface. Select Bring up terminal window after dialing on the Options tab of the properties setting interface. Click OK to confirm the settings. You need not execute any ATDT commands for dialing. ----End
Result
After the dial-up, the "OH" and "RI" LEDs on the modem connected to the PC are on. The modem generates a sound, which indicates the progress of the connection. After the connection is set up, the "CD" LEDs (for carrier detection) on the two modems are on, and the
HyperTerminal interface displays "CONNECT9600 (or 19200)". This indicates that the intermodem connection is set up successfully. If "NO CARRIER" is displayed, the connection fails. Check the hardware connections and the telephone line. Press Enter, and the command line interface for login is displayed. After the operation on the remote terminal, run the hang-up command of the HyperTerminal to disrupt the connection.
2.4 Configuring the Outband Management Interface

After the outband management interface is configured successfully, you can use the PC to log in to the UA5000 through the outband management interface of the UA5000 for maintenance and management.
Networking LAN
Figure 2-6 shows the example network for outband management through the local area network (LAN) in the Telnet mode. Figure 2-6 Example network for the outband management through the LAN in the Telnet mode
ETH0 ETH1 COM LAN PVMB UA5000
PC
PC
PC
The UA5000 uses a straight through cable to connect to the LAN. Make sure that the IP address of the maintenance port on the UA5000 and the IP address of the maintenance terminal are in the same network segment.
NOTE
You can connect the network port of the maintenance terminal (refers to PC in this example) to the maintenance port on the control board of the UA5000 to perform the outband management of the device. In this case, you need to use a crossover cable.
Data Plan LAN

Table 2-2 provides the data plan for outband management through the LAN in the Telnet mode.
Table 2-2 Data plan for outband management through the LAN in the Telnet mode Item Maintenance port of the UA5000 Maintenance terminal Data IP address: 0.10.20.2/24 IP address: 10.10.20.1/24
Networking WAN
Figure 2-7 shows the example network for outband management through the wide area network (WAN) in the Telnet mode. Figure 2-7 Example network for outband management through the WAN in the Telnet mode
LAN
PC ETH0 ETH1 COM
Router PVMB PC PC
UA5000
Data Plan WAN

Table 2-3 provides the data plan for outband management through the WAN in the Telnet mode. Table 2-3 Data plan for outband management through WAN in the Telnet mode Item Maintenance port of the UA5000 Maintenance terminal Data IP address: 10.10.20.1/24 IP address: 10.10.21.1/24
Figure 2-8 shows the flowchart for configuring the device through the outband management interface.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
20
Figure 2-8 Flowchart for configuring the device through the outband management interface
Start Set up the configuration enviroment
Set the NMS working mode
Set the IP address of the maintenance network port
Run the Telnet program
End
Procedure
Step 1 Set up the configuration environment. Set up the configuration environment based on actual conditions, as shown in Figure 2-6 or Figure 2-7. Step 2 Set the NMS working mode to the outband mode.
huawei(config)#sysman mode outband
Step 3 Set the IP address (namely, the outband IP address) of the maintenance network port.
NOTE
The system supports only one outband IP address. If the outband IP address is already configured by running the display ip address command, you need to delete the original IP address before adding an IP address or run the ip modify command to change the outband IP address.
huawei(config)#interface outband huawei(interface-outband)#ip address 10.10.20.1 255.255.255.0 10.10.20.0 huawei(interface-outband)#display ip address OutBand: IPAddress............: 10.10.20.1 SubMask..............: 255.255.255.0 GateWay..............: 10.10.20.0 MacIndex.............: 1 MacAddress...........: 00-E0-FC-EE-DD-05 VlanID...............: --
Step 4 Run the Telnet program. Choose Start > Run on the maintenance terminal. Enter the command telnet followed by the IP address of the maintenance port on the UA5000 in the Open address bar. Click OK to run Telnet (consider the Windows XP OS as an example), as shown in Figure 2-9.
Figure 2-9 Running Telnet
Step 5 Log in to the system. Users can log in to the system. By default, the super user uses root and admin as the user name and password respectively. In this case, the system returns the following prompt:
Huawei UA5000 Multi-service Access Module. Copyright(C) 1998-2007 by Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. >>User name:root >>User password:
----End
Result
After logging in to the system, you can perform the related operations.
2.5 Configuring the Inband Management Interface

This topic describes how to log in to the UA5000 through the inband management interface of the UA5000 for maintenance and management. This example considers the PVMB control board as an example. The configuration of the PVMD control board is the same as the configuration of the PVMB control board. Therefore, the configuration of the PVMD control is not described here.
Networking LAN
Figure 2-10 shows the example network for inband management through the local area network (LAN) in the Telnet mode.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
22
Figure 2-10 Example network for inband management through the LAN in the Telnet mode
LAN
PC1
PC2 ETH0 ETH1 COM PVMB UA5000 PC3
Data PlanLAN
Table 2-4 provides the data plan for inband management through the LAN in the Telnet mode. Table 2-4 Data plan for inband management through the LAN in the Telnet mode Item Inband management interface of the UA5000 Maintenance terminal Data IP address: 10.10.20.1/24 IP address: 10.10.20.3/24
NetworkingWAN
Figure 2-11 shows the example network for inband management through the wide area network (WAN) in the Telnet mode. Figure 2-11 Example network for inband management through the WAN in the Telnet mode
Router
PC
ETH0 ETH1 COM
PVMB
UA5000
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
23
Data PlanWAN
Table 2-5 provides the data plan for inband management through the WAN in the Telnet mode. Table 2-5 Data plan for inband management through the WAN in the Telnet mode Item Inband management interface of the UA5000 Maintenance terminal Data IP address: 10.10.20.1/24 IP address: 10.10.10.2/24
Figure 2-12 shows the flowchart for configuring the device through the inband interface in the Telnet mode. Figure 2-12 Flowchart for configuring the device through the inband interface in the Telnet mode
Start
Set up the configuration environment
Run the Telnet program
End
Procedure
Step 1 Set up the configuration environment. Set up the configuration environment based on actual conditions, as shown in Figure 2-10 or Figure 2-11. Step 2 Run the Telnet program.
Choose Start > Run on the maintenance terminal. Enter the telnet command followed by the IP address of the maintenance network port on the UA5000 in the Open address bar. Click OK to run Telnet (consider the Windows XP OS as an example), as shown in Figure 2-13. Figure 2-13 Running Telnet
Step 3 Log in to the system. Log in to the system. By default, the super user uses root and admin as the user name and password. In this case, the system displays the following prompt:
>>User name:root >>User password:
----End
Result
After logging in to the system, you can perform the related operations.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
25
3 CLI Operation Basics
3
About This Chapter
CLI Operation Basics
This topic describes the basic operation on the UA5000 through CLI. 3.1 Introduction to the CLI Two maintenance modes of the UA5000 are the NMS and the CLI. 3.2 CLI Features This topic describes the features of the UA5000 CLI mode. 3.3 Basic Operation Through CLI This topic describes how to maintain and manage the UA5000 through CLI.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
26
3.1 Introduction to the CLI

Two maintenance modes of the UA5000 are the NMS and the CLI.
Service Description
The differences of the two maintenance modes of the UA5000 are as follows: l l The NMS provides a graphical user interface (GUI), and the command line interface (CLI) provides the maintenance interface for users. The networking for maintaining the UA5000 in the CLI mode is simple. You can run the HyperTerminal or the telnet program of the maintenance terminal to log in to the UA5000 to maintain it through the CLI.
3.2 CLI Features

This topic describes the features of the UA5000 CLI mode.
3.2.1 Introduction to the Command Mode

This topic describes the classification and features of the CLI, and the switching relation between the command modes.
Command Mode Classification

The UA5000 supports multiple command modes to implement the hierarchical protection and to prevent attacks from unauthorized users. The UA5000 supports the following command modes: l l l User mode Privilege mode Global config mode
Command Mode Features

l Downward compatibility All the commands that work in the user mode are available in the privilege mode. All the commands that work in the user mode and the privilege mode are all available in the global config mode. l Hierarchical protection This helps prevent attacks from unauthorized users. The users at different levels can enter different command modes. Even if users at different levels enter the same command mode, the executable commands vary.
Command Mode Switching

Figure 3-1 shows how to switch the command modes.
Figure 3-1 Command mode switching

interface pvm frame/slot quit narrow user quit
PVM mode huawei(config-if-pvm-0/5)# Narrow user mode huawei(config-narrow-user)#
interface h248 mgid quit interface emu emuid quit quit enable disable
config Global config mode
H248 mode huawei(config-if-h248-...)# EMU mode huawei(config-if-h302esc-0)#
User mode huawei>
Privilege mode huawei#
quit
huawei(config)#
test quit esl user quit
Test mode huawei(config-test)#
ESL user mode huawei(config-esl-user)#
narrow resource quit
Narrow resource mode huawei(config-narrowresource)#
r2 profile profileid quit return
R2 mode huawei(config-r2-0)#
3.2.2 Intelligent Matching

The intelligent matching means when you enter an incomplete keyword and press the space bar, the matching keyword is displayed.
Function
The UA5000 facilitates the operation by supporting the function, where the matching keyword is displayed when you input an incomplete keyword and press the space bar. For example, for the enable command, input en or ena (in the common user mode) and press the space bar.
Precaution
If the system does not return the commands after you press the space bar, it indicates the following: l An incorrect command is entered. In this case, check the command and enter the correct command. For example, when you enter display incorrectly in the privilege mode, you cannot enter a space.
huawei#dip
l
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
The input keyword conflicts with other keywords.

For example, when you enter dis in the privilege mode, the system cannot find a matching keyword for it. This is because there are two commands that start with dis: disable and display.
huawei#dis
3.2.3 Edit Characteristics

You can press the corresponding keys to enter the parameters of command lines and the keywords.
Function
The CLI provides basic command edit functions. It allows multi-line editing, with a maximum of 255 bytes for each command.
Specifications
Table 3-1 lists the edit functions. Table 3-1 Edit functions Key Common key BackSpace Function If the edit buffer is not full, press one of these keys to move the cursor to the right from its current position. When you press this key, the character before the cursor is deleted and the cursor moves to the left. The cursor stops when it reaches the beginning of the command. When you press the key(s), the cursor moves one character to the left. When you press the key(s), the cursor moves one character to the right. When you press one of the keys, the history commands are displayed. In the case of certain terminals that do not support the up/down arrow keys, you can press Ctrl+P to select the previous history command. When you press the keys, the characters before the current cursor are deleted and the cursor moves to the beginning of the line. When you press the keys, the characters after the current cursor are deleted and the cursor moves to the end of the line. When you press the keys, a string is searched. When you press the keys, the cursor moves to the end of the line. When you press this key twice, the current entered information is cancelled.
Left arrow key or Ctrl +A Right arrow key or Ctrl +D Up/Down arrow key
Ctrl+U Ctrl+K Ctrl+F Ctrl+B ESC
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
29

NOTE
Common keys refer to letter keys, number keys, and punctuation keys.
3.2.4 Interaction Characteristics

When you enter an incomplete command, namely, when you press Enter after the entered keyword or parameter, the CLI system prompts the subsequent keywords that can be entered and prompts the parameter type of the keyword.
Function
The UA5000 provides the interaction function of the CLI. In the interactive mode, if you enter an incomplete command and press Enter, the system prompts the subsequent keyword that can be input and the parameter type of the keyword. When you input ?, the system prompts the help information of the command.
Example
To use the CLI interaction mode to run the load program command, do as follows:
huawei#load program { xmodem<K>|tftp<K>|ftp<K>|sftp<K> }:
To run the load program command after the interaction mode is disabled, do as follows:
huawei#undo smart huawei#load program tftp ^ % Incomplete command, and error detected at '^'
After the interaction mode is disabled, enter the command and press Enter. The system directly runs the command. If the entered command is incomplete, the system prompts an error. To display the help information provided by the command, enter the keyword switch and press ?.
huawei#switch ? --------------------------------------------Command of user Mode: --------------------------------------------language-mode Set language parameter
3.2.5 Parameter Prompt

In the interactive mode, the system prompts the type of the parameter that is to be configured on the CLI.
Function
In interactive mode, the CLI characters such as <K> and are used to express the parameter type of a keyword.
Specifications
Table 3-2 lists the meaning of the CLI characters supported by the UA5000.
Table 3-2 Meaning of the CLI characters Character <K> <E> <L> <S> <M> <H> <D><yyyy-mm-dd> <T><hh:mm:ss> Meaning Keyword Enumeration. Items that follow this character are the available options. ULONG. Information that follows this character is the range of the value to be entered. LONG. Information that follows this character is the range of the value to be entered. Character string. Information that follows this character is the length of the character string to be entered. IP address MASK, such as the mask of an IP address. MAC address Hexadecimal number. The system supports the input of "0x". By default, the system supports decimal numbers. Date Time
NOTE
The CLI supports the input of hexadecimal numbers; however, if you do not enter "0x" when entering a hexadecimal number, the system considers the entered number as a decimal number.
3.2.6 Display Characteristics

The CLI system supports the function of pausing the displayed information when there is a lot of information to be displayed.
Function
When you query information, sometimes the CLI fails to display the information on one screen because there is a lot of information to be displayed. In this case, you can use the pause function to view the information displayed on multiple screens.
NOTE
l One screen here refers to one screen displayed by the HyperTerminal software of a PC. One screen contains 24 lines. l The system supports the function where the screen scrolls upward automatically, that is, the displayed information cannot be paused. Run the scroll command to enable the auto-scroll function, and run the undo scroll command to disable the auto-scroll function. By default, the auto-scroll function is disabled.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
31
Specifications
Table 3-3 lists three options for viewing the information when the display is paused. Table 3-3 Display characteristics Key Press Q or Ctrl+C when the display is paused. Press the space bar when the display is paused. Press Enter when the display is paused. Function Suspend the display and execution of the commands. Continue to display the information on the next screen. Continue to display the information on the next line.
3.2.7 Saving and Querying the History Commands

The CLI system automatically saves history commands that you enter. You can obtain history commands saved in the CLI at any time and execute them repeatedly.
Context
By default, a maximum of 10 history commands can be saved for every user in the CLI, and a maximum of 10 history commands can be queried. The queried history commands are valid only for the current user. After the user re-logs in, the history commands are cleared.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the history-command max-size command to set the number of history commands that can be saved in the command buffer. Step 2 Run the display history-command command to query history commands. ----End
Example
To set the number of history commands that can be saved in the command buffer to 12, do as follows:
huawei(config)#history-command max-size 12 huawei(config)#display history-command -------------------------------------------------No. Command -------------------------------------------------12 display history-command 11 history-command max-size 20 10 display traffic table from-index 0 9 traffic table atm srvcategory cbr tdtype noClpNoScr clp01Pcr 160 priority 6 priority-policy tag-In-Package 8 modify rate table row 128 160
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
32

7 display rate table row 6 config 5 quit 4 quit 3 display power environment info 2 emu 1 display power run info --------------------------------------------------
3.2.8 CLI Error Prompt

When you enter an incorrect command, which cannot be executed by the system, the system prompts an error.
Function
The system checks the syntax of each command that is entered, and executes the command if it passes the check. If the command fails to pass the check, the system prompts an error.
Specifications
Table 3-4 lists the common CLI error prompts. Table 3-4 Common CLI error prompts Error Prompt Unknown command Incomplete command Too many parameters Ambiguous command Parameter error Cause This command and keyword cannot be found. The parameter type is incorrect. The parameter value exceeds the threshold. The entered command is incomplete. There are too many entered parameters. The entered command is ambiguous. The parameter is wrong and the cursor location indicates where the error exists.
3.3 Basic Operation Through CLI

This topic describes how to maintain and manage the UA5000 through CLI.
3.3.1 Obtaining the Online Help Information

When you need to query the help information about the current command or commands in the current mode, you can enter "?" after the command prompt or command keyword. If the matching information is not found, it indicates that the help list is empty.
Context
The CLI provides the following methods to obtain online help: l
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
Full help
When you enter ? following the prompt, you can obtain help information about the current commands that are available. When you enter ? following a complete keyword, you can obtain help information about all the commands matching the keyword and the parameters used by the commands. l Partial help When you enter ? following an incomplete keyword, you can obtain help information about the commands matching the incomplete keyword.
Example
To display the help information about all the available commands in global config mode, do as follows:
huawei(config)#? --------------------------------------------Command of config Mode: --------------------------------------------ati Enter into ATI command mode aulaw Set A/u law board <Group> board command group cdi Enter into CDI command mode clock <Group> clock command group config System config dns Configure DNS dsl Enter the dsl mode dsp <Group> dsp command group dtmf DTMF parameter configure e2etrace End to end signalling trace emu Emu command group esl Enter ESL(Ethernet Subscriber Line) user command mode fax FAX parameter configure fe Config FE Parameter frame <Group> frame command group gtcstatistics <Group>gtcstatistics command group h248statistics H248 message statistic hwcport HWC port group info-center <Group> info-center command group ---- More ( Press 'Q' to break ) ----
To display the help information about the commands matching the keyword display, do as follows:
huawei(config)#display ? --------------------------------------------Command of privilege Mode: --------------------------------------------alarm Display alarm related information arp-detect ARP link detect auth Authentication parameters backup-server Display backup server configuration board Command Keyword: c-channel C-channel clock Display information about clock source config System config current-configuration Current configuration data Display data synchronization status detect-group Detect link group digitmap Digitmap configure digitmap-timer DMM T timer configure dns Display DNS information dsp <Group> dsp command group dtmf DTMF parameter configure e2etrace End to end signalling trace emu Display environment monitor unit(s) esl The online user information
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
34

ETH0-ETH1 Display ETH0-ETH1 port state ---- More ( Press 'Q' to break ) ----
To display the help information about the commands matching the keyword d, do as follows:
huawei(config)#d? --------------------------------------------Command of config Mode: --------------------------------------------dns Configure DNS dsl Enter the dsl mode dsp <Group> dsp command group dtmf DTMF parameter configure --------------------------------------------Command of privilege Mode: --------------------------------------------debugging Enable system debugging functions diagnose Change into diagnose mode disable Turn off privileged mode commands display Display information duplicate <Group> duplicate command group --------------------------------------------Command of user Mode: --------------------------------------------display Display information
Related Operation
Table 3-5 lists the related operation for obtaining online help information. Table 3-5 Related operation for obtaining online help information To... Obtain system help information Run the Command... help
3.3.2 Switching the Terminal Language

The UA5000 system supports two languages by default, which are the local language and general language. You can select a preferred language as the terminal display language.
Context
The UA5000 supports English and Chinese. English is the default language.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the switch language-mode command to switch from one language to another. ----End
Example
To run the switch language-mode command to switch from one language to another, do as follows:
huawei(config)#switch language-mode The current language has been switched to general language
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
35
Related Operation
Table 3-6 lists the related operation for switching the terminal language. Table 3-6 Related operation for switching the terminal language To... Display the terminal language Run the Command... display language Remarks This command is not available for common users.
3.3.3 Configuring the System Time

The system time of the device can be configured in the following format: hh:mm:ss yyyy-mmdd, namely, hour:minute:second year-month-date.
Context
l l The system time takes effect immediately after the configuration. When you configure the system time, the system checks the time for its validity strictly. Invalid settings are prohibited. Exercise caution when configuring the leap year and leap month.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the time command to configure the system time. Step 2 Run the display time command to query the system time. ----End
Example
To configure the current system time, do as follows:
huawei#time 09:00:00 2007-02-28 huawei#display time { <cr>|dst<K>|time-stamp<K> }: command: display time 2007-02-28 09:00:06+08:00
3.3.4 Setting the System Name

Set the system name to differentiate various UA5000s.
Context
l l
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
By default, the device name is UA5000. The new system name takes effect immediately after it is set.
After the system name is changed, the command line prompt changes to the new name accordingly.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the sysname command to set the system name. ----End
Example
To name the first UA5000 in the New York office in the USA, do as follows:
huawei(config)#sysname NY_UA5000_A NY_UA5000_A(config)#
3.3.5 Setting the Terminal Type

Different terminals feature different edit characteristics. The system divides terminals into two types, namely, standard terminals (ANSI) and VT series terminals so that it is compatible with most terminals.
Context
l l The default terminal type is ANSI. Certain terminal tools, such as HyperTerminal, telnet, and neterm, allow you to set the terminal types. You can use the associated menu to set the terminal emulation type so that the type of terminal tool is the same as the type of terminal in the system.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the terminal type command to set the terminal type. Step 2 Run the display terminal type command to query the terminal type that is set. ----End
Example
To set the terminal type as VT100, do as follows:
huawei#terminal type vt100 huawei#display terminal type The terminal type: VT100
3.3.6 Setting the Timeout Exit Time

Set the timeout exit time. During this time, if the information is not entered on the terminal, the system allows the terminal to exit the system automatically.
Context
By default, the system allows the terminal to exit the system if the information is not entered on the terminal for 5 minutes.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the idle-timeout command to set the timeout exit time. Step 2 Run the display idle-timeout command to query the preset timeout exit time. ----End
Example
To set the timeout exit time to 255 minutes, do as follows:
huawei>idle-timeout 255 huawei>display idle-timeout The timeout value is set to 255 minutes currently. If there is no input from terminal during this time, the user will be disconnected
Related Operation
Table 3-7 lists the related operation for setting the timeout exit time. Table 3-7 Related operation for setting the timeout exit time To... Set the timeout exit time to the default value, that is, 120 minutes Run the Command... undo idle-timeout
3.3.7 Locking the Terminal

Lock the terminal to prevent other users from accessing the terminal by using the name of the online user.
Context
After a terminal is locked, if you press any button on the terminal, the system prompts you to enter the password. After entering the correct password, you can operate the terminal.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the terminal hold command to lock the terminal. ----End
Example
To lock the current CLI terminal and then to unlock it, do as follows:
huawei(config)#terminal hold Hold Password(<=15 chars): Confirm Password(<=15 chars): The user terminal has been held Hold Password(<=15 chars)://Press any key and the system prompts you to enter the unlocking password.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
38

huawei(config)# terminal.

//Input the correct password and the system unlocks the
Related Operation
Table 3-8 lists the related operation for locking the terminal. Table 3-8 Related operation for locking the terminal To... Unlock the terminal Run the Command... undo terminal hold
3.3.8 Clearing the Terminal Screen

When you need to highlight certain input or output information, you can clear the current display on the terminal screen. Then, the prompt is displayed on the upper left corner of the screen.
Context
Running the cls command clears only the information that is displayed on the screen, and does not clear the information in the buffer.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the cls command to clear the terminal screen. ----End
Example
To clear the screen output, do as follows:
huawei>cls
3.3.9 Querying the Version Information

Query the information about the software version of the current system or board.
Context
By running the display version command, you can obtain the version of normal boards only. You cannot obtain the version of a faulty board by running this command.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the display version command to query the version information. ----End
Example
To query the system version, do as follows:

huawei(config)#display version UA5000PVMV100R017 RELEASE SOFTWARE Copyright (c) 1998-2007 by Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd Uptime is 0 day(s), 15 hour(s), 30 minute(s), 11 second(s)
3.3.10 Querying the CPU Usage of a Board

Query the CPU usage of a board to check whether it exceeds the threshold. When the CPU usage of the board exceeds the threshold, the system reports an alarm. Attach importance to the alarm.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the display cpu command to query the CPU usage of a board. ----End
Example
To query the CPU usage of the control board, do as follows:
huawei>display cpu 0/5 CPU occupancy: 17%
3.3.11 Testing the Network Status

Check the network connectivity and whether the host is reachable, how to test all the gateways through which the data packets sent from a host to the destination pass, and how to locate network faults.
Context
The commands used to test network status include ping and tracert. l l ping is used to check the network connectivity and whether the host is reachable. tracert is used to test the gateways through which data packets sent from a host to the destination pass. tracert can also be used to check the connectivity of a network and locate faults in the network. The process of running the tracert command is as follows: The host sends a packet with the time to live (TTL) of 1 to the destination. The gateway returns an Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP) packet to indicate the failure in sending the packet due to TTL timeout. The host sends a packet with the TTL of 2. The gateway also returns a packet indicating TTL timeout in the second hop. The process repeats until the packet reaches the destination. In this way, the system records the source address of each ICMP TTL timeout message, and provides a path along which an IP packet passes to the destination.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the ping command to test the network status. Step 2 Run the tracert command to test the network status. ----End
Example
To test the network status by running the ping command, do as follows:
huawei(config)#ping 10.11.52.240 PING 10.11.52.240: 56 data bytes, press CTRL_C to break Reply from 10.11.52.240: bytes=56 Sequence=0 ttl=64 time Reply from 10.11.52.240: bytes=56 Sequence=1 ttl=64 time Reply from 10.11.52.240: bytes=56 Sequence=2 ttl=64 time Reply from 10.11.52.240: bytes=56 Sequence=3 ttl=64 time Reply from 10.11.52.240: bytes=56 Sequence=4 ttl=64 time --- 10.11.52.240 Ping statistics --5 packets transmitted 5 packets received 0.00% packet loss round-trip min/avg/max = 10/10/13 ms
= = = = =
10 10 13 10 10
ms ms ms ms ms
To test the network status by running the tracert command, do as follows:

huawei#tracert 10.11.106.133 traceroute to 10.11.106.133 max hops 30 ,packet 40 bytes press CTRL_C to break 1 253 ms 476 ms 508 ms 10.11.120.62 2 * * * Request timed out. 3 * * * Request timed out. 4 4 ms 4 ms 5 ms 10.11.106.133
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
41
4
About This Chapter
Configuring the NMS
This topic describes the examples and related operations for configuring the N2000 BMS so that you can manage the UA5000 through the N2000 BMS. 4.1 Introduction to the NMS Introduction to the NMS includes the NMS protocols and NMS maintenance mode supported by the UA5000. 4.2 Configuration Example of an Outband NMS The UA5000 is connected to the iManager N2000 NMS workstation through outband maintenance network port ETH0 on the PVM board. Thus, you can maintain and manage the UA5000 on the iManager N2000 NMS workstation. 4.3 Configuration Example of an Inband NMS The UA5000 is connected to the iManager N2000 NMS workstation through inband maintenance network port ETH1 on the PVM board. Thus, you can maintain and manage the UA5000 on the iManager N2000 NMS workstation. 4.4 Configuring the SNMP Agent Configuring the SNMP agent means configuring the community name and read-write authority, enabling sending the trap packet, and configuring the IP address of the target host for the trap packet, administrator ID of the device, and location of device.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
42
4.1 Introduction to the NMS

Introduction to the NMS includes the NMS protocols and NMS maintenance mode supported by the UA5000.
Service Description
The UA5000 provides the NMS interface, and uses the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) to communicate with the NMS. The UA5000 supports the iManager N2000 Broadband Management System (N2000 BMS). The N2000 BMS manages the UA5000 through the NMS interface of the UA5000. The UA5000 provides the status information for the N2000 BMS by sending the trap packet, thus reporting certain emergency events.
The UA5000 supports two NMS modes: inband NMS mode and outband NMS mode. The UA5000 supports the following protocol: SNMPv1, SNMPv2c, SNMPv3.
4.2 Configuration Example of an Outband NMS

The UA5000 is connected to the iManager N2000 NMS workstation through outband maintenance network port ETH0 on the PVM board. Thus, you can maintain and manage the UA5000 on the iManager N2000 NMS workstation.
Networking
Figure 4-1 shows the example network for configuring the outband NMS. Figure 4-1 Example network for configuring the outband NMS
Router PVMB/PVMD ETH0 ETH1 NMS workstation IP address: 10.10.21.1/24 COM UA5000 IP address: 10.10.20.1/24
Data Plan
Table 4-1 provides the data plan for configuring the outband NMS.
Table 4-1 Data plan for configuring the outband NMS Item UA5000 maintenance network port (ETH0) NMS (network management system) Data IP address: 10.10.20.1/24 IP address: 10.10.21.1/24
Figure 4-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the outband NMS. Figure 4-2 Flowchart for configuring the outband NMS
Start Set the IP address of the maintenance network port Set the NMS working mode
Set the SNMP parameters
Enable trap sending
Set the IP address of the target host for traps Set the source address for trap sending Save the data End
Procedure
Step 1 Set the IP address of the maintenance network port.
huawei(config)#interface outband huawei(config-outband)#ip address 10.10.20.1 255.255.255.0 10.10.20.0 { <cr>|vlan_tag<K> }: Command: ip address 10.10.20.1 255.255.255.0 10.10.20.0 Considering the reliability of network, suggest to config vlan for outband IP . Continue?(y/n)[n]: y
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
44

huawei(config-outband)#quit huawei(config)#
Step 2 Set the NMS working mode to the outband mode.

huawei(config)#sysman mode outband
Step 3 Set the simple network management protocol (SNMP) parameters. l Set the community name.
huawei(config)#snmp-agent community read public huawei(config)#snmp-agent community write private
l Set the administrator ID and the contact method.

huawei(config)#snmp-agent sys-info contact HW-075528780808
l Set the device location.

huawei(config)#snmp-agent sys-info location Shenzhen
l Set the SNMP version.

huawei(config)#snmp-agent sys-info version v1
Step 4 Enable the transmission of trap packets.

huawei(config)#snmp-agent trap enable standard
Step 5 Set the IP address of the target host for trap packets.
huawei(config)#snmp-agent target-host trap address 10.10.21.1 securityname private

huawei(config)#save
NOTE
This topic describes the data plan only on the UA5000. To communicate with the network, configure the related data on the router.
----End
Result
After the configuration, you should be able to manage the UA5000 through the N2000 BMS.
4.3 Configuration Example of an Inband NMS

The UA5000 is connected to the iManager N2000 NMS workstation through inband maintenance network port ETH1 on the PVM board. Thus, you can maintain and manage the UA5000 on the iManager N2000 NMS workstation.
Networking
Figure 4-3 shows the example network for configuring the inband NMS. Figure 4-3 Example network for configuring the inband NMS
PVMB/PVMD Router Router ETH0 ETH1 NMS workstation IP address: 10.10.21.1/24 COM UA5000 IP address: 10.10.20.1/16
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
45
Data Plan
Table 4-2 provides the data plan for configuring the inband NMS. Table 4-2 Data plan for configuring the inband NMS Item UA5000 maintenance port (ETH1) Data IP address: 10.10.20.1/16 (directly use the primary service IP address) Default gateway: 10.10.1.1 NMS IP address: 10.10.21.1/24 Default gateway: 10.10.1.10
Figure 4-4 shows the flowchart for configuring the inband NMS. Figure 4-4 Flowchart for configuring the inband NMS
Start
Set the NMS working mode
Query the IP address of the NMS port Set the community name and the access authority Enable the transmission of Trap packets
Set the IP address of the target host for Trap packets
Save the data
End
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
46
Procedure
Step 1 Set the NMS working mode as inband.
huawei(config)#sysman mode inband
Step 2 Query the IP address of the NMS port.

huawei(config)#display ip address OutBand: IPAddress............: 10.144.78.92 SubMask..............: 255.255.254.0 GateWay..............: 10.144.78.1 MacIndex.............: 1 MacAddress...........: 00-E0-FC-8B-77-78 VlanID...............: -Eth: IPAddress............: 10.10.20.1//The first service IP address that is displayed is the primary service IP address. SubMask..............: 255.255.0.0 GateWay..............: 10.10.1.1 MacIndex.............: 0 MacAddress...........: 00-E0-FC-8B-77-77 VlanID...............: -IPAddress............: SubMask..............: GateWay..............: MacIndex.............: MacAddress...........: VlanID...............:
NOTE
10.10.10.2 255.255.255.0 10.10.10.1 0 00-E0-FC-8B-77-77 --
In inband NMS mode, the primary service IP address is used as the management IP address.
Step 3 Set the community name and the access authority.

huawei(config)#snmp-agent community read public huawei(config)#snmp-agent community write private
Step 4 Enable the transmission of trap packets.

huawei(config)#snmp-agent trap enable standard
Step 5 Set the IP address of the target host for trap packets.
huawei(config)#snmp-agent target-host trap address 10.10.21.1 securityname private

huawei(config)#save
NOTE
This topic describes the data plan only on the UA5000. To communicate with the network, configure the related data on the router.
----End
Result
After the configuration, you should be able to manage the UA5000 through the N2000 BMS.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
47
4.4 Configuring the SNMP Agent

Configuring the SNMP agent means configuring the community name and read-write authority, enabling sending the trap packet, and configuring the IP address of the target host for the trap packet, administrator ID of the device, and location of device.
4.4.1 Configuring the Community Name and Read-Write Authority

The SNMP community is a collection of one SNMP agent and a group of SNMP managers whose identities and access control are defined. Each community is identified by a community name consisting of a character string of eight characters, namely, the password. An SNMP agent generally provides two communities. One community is read-only, and is called the read community. The other community is readable and writable. This community can be created and deleted, which is called the write community.
Context
l l l In the N2000 BMS, the default name of the read-only community is public, and the default name of the write community is private. The UA5000 supports a maximum of 10 community names. The name of the write community in the host should be the same as the name of the write community in the BMS workstation.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the snmp-agent community command to configure the community name and read-write authority. Step 2 Run the display snmp-agent community command to query the information about the community name. ----End
Example
To add a community with the name of public, which is read-only, do as follows:
huawei(config)#snmp-agent community read public huawei(config)#display snmp-agent community read Community name:public Storage type: nonVolatile View name:ViewDefault Total number is 1
Related Operation
Table 4-3 lists the related operation for configuring the community name and read-write authority.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
48
Table 4-3 Related operation for configuring the community name and read-write authority To... Delete the existing community name Run the Command... undo snmp-agent community
4.4.2 Enabling Sending the Trap Packet

Enable sending the trap packet. When the device is faulty, or the important data of the device is modified by the user or other managers, the SNMP agent sends the trap packet to inform the SNMP manager.
Context
By default, sending the trap packet from the device to the BMS is disabled.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the snmp-agent trap enable standard command to enable sending the trap packet. Step 2 Run the display snmp-agent trap enable command to query whether sending the trap packet from the device is enabled. ----End
Example
To enable sending the trap packet from the device to the BMS, do as follows:
huawei(config)#snmp-agent trap enable standard huawei(config)#display snmp-agent trap enable Trap is enabled
Related Operation
Table 4-4 lists the related operation for enabling sending the trap packet. Table 4-4 Related operation for enabling sending the trap packet To... Disable sending the trap packet from the device Run the Command... undo snmp-agent trap enable standard
4.4.3 Configuring the IP Address of the Target Host for the Trap Packet
After enabling sending the trap packet, you must configure the IP address of the target host for the trap packet correctly. Thus, the BMS can receive the trap packet.
Context
You can configure a maximum of 20 target hosts for the system.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the snmp-agent target-host trap command to configure the IP address of the target host for the trap packet. Step 2 Run the display snmp-agent target-host command to query the target host of the trap packet. ----End
Example
To configure the IP address of the target host for the trap packet to 10.71.53.108, by using community name private, do as follows:
huawei(config)#snmp-agent target-host trap address 10.71.53.108 securityname private v3 authentication huawei(config)#display snmp-agent target-host Traphost list: Traphost address: 10.71.53.108 Traphost portnumber: 162 Traphost securityname: private Traphost trapversion: v3 Traphost securityLevel: authentication Total number is 1
Related Operation
Table 4-5 lists the related operation for configuring the IP address of the target host for the trap packet. Table 4-5 Related operation for configuring the IP address of the target host for the trap packet To... Delete the IP address of the target host for the trap packet Run the Command... undo snmp-agent target-host
4.4.4 Configuring the Administrator ID of the Device

This topic describes how to re-configure the administrator ID of the device according to the contact method of the actual device administrator.
Context
By default, the administrator ID is "R&D Shenzhen, Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.".
Procedure
Step 1 Run the snmp-agent sys-info contact command to configure the administrator ID of the device. Step 2 Run the display snmp-agent sys-info contact command to query the administrator ID of the device. ----End
Example
To configure the administrator ID of the device to HW-075528780808, do as follows:
huawei(config)#snmp-agent sys-info contact HW-075528780808 huawei(config)#display snmp-agent sys-info contact The contact person for this managed node: HW-075528780808
Related Operation
Table 4-6 lists the related operation for configuring the administrator ID of the device. Table 4-6 Related operation for configuring the administrator ID of the device To... Restore the default configuration of the administrator ID of the device Run the Command... undo snmp-agent sys-info contact
4.4.5 Configuring the Location of the Device

Re-configure the location of the device according to the city and region of the actual device. Thus, you can distinguish the devices of different locations in the BMS.
Context
By default, the location of the device is "Shenzhen China".
Procedure
Step 1 Run the snmp-agent sys-info location command to configure the location of the device. Step 2 Run the display snmp-agent sys-info location command to query the location of the device. ----End
Example
To configure the location of the device to Shanghai China, do as follows:
huawei(config)#snmp-agent sys-info location Shanghai China huawei(config)#display snmp-agent sys-info location The physical location of this node: Shanghai China
Related Operation
Table 4-7 lists the related operation for configuring the location of the device.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
51
Table 4-7 Related operation for configuring the location of the device To... Restore the default configuration of the location of the device Run the Command... undo snmp-agent sys-info location
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
52
5 User Management
5
About This Chapter
User Management
Managing the user includes the classification of users supported by the UA5000 and how to add, modify, disconnect, or delete a user. 5.1 Introduction to the Operation User The operation user is the user who can perform the configuration and maintenance operations on the device through the CLI terminal. The operation users at different levels obtain different authorities. 5.2 Adding a User After a user is added, the user can access the device and perform the configuration and management operations on the device. 5.3 Modifying the User Attributes You can modify the attributes of existing users, such as authority, password, times of re-logins, and appended information. 5.4 Disconnecting an Online User Disconnect an online user forcibly to prevent the user from logging in to the device. 5.5 Deleting a User Only the user at the super user level can delete users at lower levels. The deleted user is not permitted to log in to the device and implement configuration and management operations on the device.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
53
5 User Management
5.1 Introduction to the Operation User

The operation user is the user who can perform the configuration and maintenance operations on the device through the CLI terminal. The operation users at different levels obtain different authorities.
In terms of authority, UA5000 users are divided into four levels: common user, operator, administrator and super user. Users at all levels can add a user only at a level that is lower than theirs. Table 5-1 lists the authority for users at all levels. Table 5-1 Authority for users at all levels Level Common user Operator Administrator Authority Common users can perform basic system operations and simple query operations. Operators can configure the device and services. l Administrators can perform all operations. l Administrator can maintain the device, user accounts and user authority. l Multiple administrators can exist in the system. Super user l The super user can perform all operations. l The super user can maintain the device, user accounts and user authority. l The super user is of the highest level in the system. Only one super user exists in the system.
5.2 Adding a User

After a user is added, the user can access the device and perform the configuration and management operations on the device.
Context
l The super user and administrators can add a user at a level that is lower than their level. That is: The super user can add the administrators, operators, and common users. The administrators can add only the operators and common users. l l A user name must be unique. It cannot be all or online. Multiple users can be successively added. In one system, a maximum of 127 operating users can be added. That is, including user root, a total of 128 users can be added to one system.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
5 User Management
When adding a user, you need to configure the user attributes, including the user account, password, authority, number of re-logins and supplementary information. Table 5-2 lists the user attributes. Table 5-2 User attributes User Attributes Account Description It is also called user name. It consists of 115 printable characters. It must not be less than six characters in length. The account must be unique. No space is allowed in the user name. The user name is not case sensitive. It consists of 015 characters. It must not be less than eight characters in length. It must contain at least one letter and a number. The password is case sensitive. In terms of authority, users can be classified into common users, operators, and administrators. Whether a user can log in to the device from multiple terminals depends on the number of re-logins of the user. The range of the number of relogins is 04. In normal case, it is set to 1. It is a kind of optional and supplementary information. It is a string of characters. It can be null. It can contain a maximum of 30 characters. It can be the telephone number or address of the user.
Password
Authority Times of re-logins
Supplementary information
Procedure
Step 1 Run the terminal user name command to add a user. Step 2 Run the display terminal user command to query user information. ----End
Example
Assume the following: l l l l l The user name is huawei. The password is huawei123. The level is common user. The number of re-logins is 3. The supplementary information is "user".
To add the user, do as follows:

huawei(config)#terminal user name User profile name(<=15 chars)[root]: User Name(<=15 chars):huawei User Password(<=15 chars):huawei123//This is not displayed. Confirm Password(<=15 chars):huawei123//This is not displayed. User profile name(<=15 chars)[root]: User's Level:
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
55
5 User Management
1. Common User 2. Operator 3. Administrator:3 Permitted Reenter Number(0--4):3 User's Appended Info(<=30 chars):user Adding user succeeds Repeat this operation? (y/n)[n]:n huawei(config)#display terminal user all ---------------------------------------------------------------------------Name Level Status Reenter Profile Append Num Info ---------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei1 Admin Online 4 root ----huawei User Offline 3 root user ---------------------------------------------------------------------------Total record(s) number: 2
Related Operation
Table 5-3 lists the related operation for adding a user. Table 5-3 Related operation for adding a user To... Delete a user Run the Command... undo terminal user name Remarks l Only the super user and administrators can delete the users who have lower authority. l Users cannot delete themselves. l User root cannot be deleted. l An online user cannot be deleted. To delete the online user, you need to disconnect the user first. l Multiple users can be deleted at a time.
5.3 Modifying the User Attributes

You can modify the attributes of existing users, such as authority, password, times of re-logins, and appended information.
5.3.1 Changing a User Level

Only the super user and the administrator have the right to change the level of a user at a lower level. In addition, the super user and the administrator can only change the user level to a level lower than their own levels.
Context
l l
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
The super user can change the level of a user to the level of a common user, an operator, or an administrator. Administrators can change the level of a user to the level of a common user or an operator.
5 User Management
Procedure
Step 1 Run the terminal user level command to change a user level. Step 2 Run the display terminal user command to query a user level. ----End
Example
To change a common user huawei to an operator, do as follows:
huawei(config)#terminal user level User Name(<=15 chars):huawei 1. Common User 2. Operator 3.Administrator:2 User's Level:2 Confirm Level: 2 Information will take effect when this user logs on next time Repeat this operation? (y/n)[n]:n huawei(config)#display terminal user all --------------------------------------------------------------------------Name Level Status ReenterNum AppendInfo --------------------------------------------------------------------------root Super Online 1 none huawei Operator Offline 3 user --------------------------------------------------------------------------Total record(s) number: 2
Related Operation
Table 5-4 lists the related operations for changing a user level. Table 5-4 Related operations for changing a user level To... Change the user password Modify the number of re-logins Modify appended information Run the Command... terminal user password terminal user reenter terminal user apdinfo
5.3.2 Changing the User Password

Change the user password regularly to ensure the device security. Only user root has the right to change the passwords of other users.
Context
l The super user and administrators can change the passwords of users at lower levels (including themselves). When changing the passwords of users at lower levels, the super user and administrators need not enter the old passwords.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
5 User Management
The common users and operators can change only their own passwords, and need to enter the old passwords.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the terminal user password command to change a user password. Step 2 Log in to the device with the old user name and new password. ----End
Example
To change the password of common user huawei, do as follows:
huawei(config)#terminal user password User name (<=15 chars):huawei New password(<=15 chars):huawei123 //This is not displayed. Confirm Password(<=15 chars):huawei123 //This is not displayed. Information takes effect Repeat this operation? (y/n)[n]:n
Related Operation
Table 5-5 lists the related operations for changing a user password. Table 5-5 Related operations for changing a user password To... Modify a user level Modify the number of re-logins Modify appended information Run the Command... terminal user level terminal user reenter terminal user apdinfo
5.3.3 Changing the Number of Re-logins

Change the number of re-logins from multiple terminals of a user to ensure the user authority of re-logging in to the device.
Context
l l The super user and administrators can modify the permitted number of re-logins of users at lower levels. It is not allowed to modify the permitted number of re-logins of the super user.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the terminal user reenter command to modify the permitted number of re-logins of a user. Step 2 Run the display terminal user command to query the permitted number of re-logins of a user. ----End
5 User Management
Example
To change the permitted number of re-logins of common user huawei to 4, do as follows:
huawei(config)#terminal user reenter User Name(<=15 chars):huawei Permitted Reenter Number(0--4):4 Confirm Reenter Number(0--4):4 Information will take effect when this user logs on next time Repeat this operation? (y/n)[n]:n huawei(config)#display terminal user all ---------------------------------------------------------------------------Name Level Status Reenter Profile Append Num Info ---------------------------------------------------------------------------root Super Online 1 root ----huawei Operator Online 4 root user ---------------------------------------------------------------------------Total record(s) number: 2
Related Operation
Table 5-6 lists the related operations for modifying the permitted number of re-logins of a user. Table 5-6 Related operations for modifying the permitted number of re-logins of a user To... Modify a user level Modify a user password Modify appended information Run the Command... terminal user level terminal user password terminal user apdinfo
5.3.4 Modifying the Supplementary Information About a User

Modify the supplementary information about a user regularly to update the user information in time.
Context
l l The super user and administrators can modify their own supplementary information and the supplementary information of users at lower levels. Common users and operators can modify their own supplementary information.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the terminal user apdinfo command to modify the supplementary information about a user. Step 2 Run the display terminal user command to query the supplementary information about a user. ----End
Example
To modify the supplementary information of common user huawei, do as follows:
5 User Management
huawei(config)#terminal user apdinfo User name (<=15 chars):huawei User's Appended Info(<=30 chars):[email protected] Information takes effect Repeat this operation? (y/n)[n]:n huawei(config)#display terminal user all ---------------------------------------------------------------------------Name Level Status Reenter Profile Append Num Info ---------------------------------------------------------------------------root Super Online 1 root ----huawei Operator Online 4 root [email protected] ---------------------------------------------------------------------------Total record(s) number: 2
Related Operation
Table 5-7 lists the related operations for modifying the supplementary information about a user. Table 5-7 Related operations for modifying the supplementary information about a user To... Modify a user level Modify a user password Modify the number of re-logins Run the Command... terminal user level terminal user password terminal user reenter
5.4 Disconnecting an Online User

Disconnect an online user forcibly to prevent the user from logging in to the device.
Context
Only the super user and administrators can disconnect an online user at lower levels.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the client kickoff command to disconnect a user.
NOTE
Run the display client command to query the clientid.
Step 2 Run the display terminal user command to query the current users who have logged in. ----End
Example
To disconnect user 3, and confirm that the user is not in the list of the online users, do as follows:
huawei(config)#display terminal user online --------------------------------------------------------------------------Name Level Status Reenter Profile Append Num Info --------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei Admin Online 4 root -----
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
60
5 User Management
ww User Online 4 root user ---------------------------------------------------------------------------Total record(s) number: 2 huawei(config)#display client ----------------------------------------------------------------------------ID Client name Domain name IP Address Login Time ----------------------------------------------------------------------------2 huawei -10.144.68.158 2007-10-22 11:17:5 3 ww -10.144.68.158 2007-10-22 11:18:1 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config)#client kickoff 3 Are you sure to kick the user off?(y/n)[n]:y The user has been kicked off successfully huawei(config)#display terminal user online --------------------------------------------------------------------------Name Level Status Reenter Profile Append Num Info --------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei Admin Online 4 root -------------------------------------------------------------------------------Total record(s) number: 1
Related Operation
Table 5-8 lists the related operation for disconnecting an online user. Table 5-8 Related operation for disconnecting an online user To Delete a user Run the Command... undo terminal user name
5.5 Deleting a User

Only the user at the super user level can delete users at lower levels. The deleted user is not permitted to log in to the device and implement configuration and management operations on the device.
Context
l l l l Users cannot delete themselves. User root cannot be deleted. An online user cannot be deleted. To delete an online user, you need to disconnect the user first. Multiple users can be deleted at a time.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the undo terminal user name command to delete a user. Step 2 Run the display terminal user command to verify that a user is deleted successfully. ----End
5 User Management
Example
To delete user huawei, do as follows:
huawei(config)#undo terminal user name User Name(<=15 chars):huawei Are you sure to delete the user?(y/n)[n]:y Deleting user succeeds Repeat this operation? (y/n)[n]:n huawei(config)#display terminal user all ---------------------------------------------------------------------------Name Level Status Reenter Profile Append Num Info ---------------------------------------------------------------------------root Super Online 1 root -------------------------------------------------------------------------------Total record(s) number: 1
Related Operation
Table 5-9 lists the related operations for deleting a user. Table 5-9 Related operations for deleting a user To... Disconnect an online user Add a user Run the Command... client kickoff terminal user name
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
62
6 Device Management
6
About This Chapter
Device Management
This topic describes how to manage the UA5000. Device management includes shelf management and board management. 6.1 Introduction to the Device Introduction to the device includes the management of the device and the types and status of the control board and service board supported by UA5000. 6.2 Adding the Connection Between the Shelves The connection between shelves need not be added when only the master shelf exists. When the master shelf and slave shelf are required, you must add a slave shelf and a connection between the master shelf and slave shelf. 6.3 Setting the Description of a Shelf Set and change regularly the number of a test group or the description of a shelf to update the shelf information in time. 6.4 Resetting a Control Board Reset a control board to run the newly loaded program and database. If there is no standby control board, the resetting operation causes the resetting of all the service boards. Exercise caution when performing this operation. 6.5 Adding a Service Board Adding a service board is to provide you the data configuration when the service board is offline, namely, an operation when the actual service board is not inserted. The system checks the configured data in details. After the service board is added successfully and the service board is inserted, it runs according to the configuration. 6.6 Deleting a Service Board When the service board in a certain slot is faulty or not required because of the system capacity reduction, you can delete the service board. When the service board is deleted successfully, you can add a new service board in the idle slot. 6.7 Resetting a Service Board You can reset a service board when the service board does not work properly. The system generates a fault alarm after the reset operation. The system generates a recovery alarm after the board recovers.
6 Device Management
6.8 Prohibiting a Service Board When a service board does not work normally, or a certain port on a service board is faulty, you must prohibit the service board first. When you prohibit a service board, you prohibit not only the normal services on the board but also any other operation till the service board is unprohibited (enabled).
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
64
6 Device Management
6.1 Introduction to the Device

Introduction to the device includes the management of the device and the types and status of the control board and service board supported by UA5000.
Service Description
l Shelf management includes the following: adding a shelf, adding a link between two shelves, deleting a shelf, deleting a link between two shelves, configuring the attributes of a shelf, querying shelf information, and querying a link between two shelves. Control board management includes the following: resetting a control board and querying control board information. Service board management includes the following: adding a service board offline, confirming a service board, deleting a service board, resetting a service board, prohibiting a service board, unprohibiting a service board, and querying the service board information.
l l
You can use the HABD or HABL shelf as the master shelf and use the HABF as the slave shelf for the UA5000. Thus, the connection between shelves is supported. When you use the HABM shelf as the master shelf for the UA5000 MiniMSAN, the connection between shelves is not supported.
Introduction to Board Types

Table 6-1 lists the boards supported by the UA5000. Table 6-1 Boards supported by the UA5000 Board Type Control board Service board Interface board Monitoring board Secondary power supply board Rear access transfer board Front access transfer board Board Name PVMB, PVMD, and PVME A32, CSR, CSM, CDI, DSL, DSLE, DSLD, EDTB, SDL, SDLE, ATI, RSP, RSU, and HSL EP1A, GP1A ESC, FCBB/FCBA, PWMA, and FCBD PWX E1TB, EFTB, HWCB, HWTB, RATB, and SAPB E1TF, EFTF, HLAF, HLEF, HWCF, HWTF, PSTF, RATF, SLTF, SAPF, and WATF
Introduction to Board Status

Table 6-2 lists the service board status.
6 Device Management
Table 6-2 Service board status Status Normal Failed Config Auto_find Prohibited Remarks It indicates that the board is running in the normal state. It indicates that the board is faulty. It indicates that the board is being configured. It indicates that the board is inserted, but not confirmed. It indicates that the board is prohibited.
6.2 Adding the Connection Between the Shelves

The connection between shelves need not be added when only the master shelf exists. When the master shelf and slave shelf are required, you must add a slave shelf and a connection between the master shelf and slave shelf.
Context
l l The master shelf and the PVM control board are in the normal state after the master shelf is added. The slave shelf is in the faulty state after it is added. The slave shelf is normal after the connection is added between shelves.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the frame add command to add a shelf. Step 2 Run the frame connect command to add a connection between shelves. Step 3 Run the display frame info command to query the connection between shelves. ----End
Example
To add a connection between the master and slave shelves, do as follows:
huawei(config)#frame add 0 FrameType: 0 : MAIN_HABM_30(HABA) 2 : MAIN_HAFM_6(HABL) 4 : MAIN_H601HABC(HABC) 6 : MAIN_H601HABM(HABM) 8 : SLAVE_HABS_32(HABB) 10 : SLAVE_HAFS_30(HABD) 12 : SLAVE_H602HABE(HABE) 14 : RSU_HABS_30(HABA) 16 : RSU_HAFS_6(HABL) 18 : RSUG_ONU04A 20 : RSP_19(HCB) 22 : RSP_14(HIB) 24 : RSP_10(HGB) 26 : RSP_6B(HLB) 28 : UAS_R (HUBS)
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29
: : : : : : : : : : : : : : :
MAIN_HAFM_30(HABD) MAIN_H602HABD(HABD) MAIN_H601HABO(HABO) SLAVE_HAFS_32(HABE) SLAVE_HABS_30(HABA) SLAVE_H602HABD(HABD) RSU_HAFS_30(HABD) RSU_HAFS_12(HABC) RSUG_ONU60A(HUBO) RSUG_ONU08A RSP_15(HDB) RSP_12(HFB) RSP_6A(HMB) UAM_R (HUBM) UAFM_R(HUBE)
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
66
6 Device Management
30 : UAFS_R(HUBF) 31 : UAMB_R(HUBB) 32 : ONU60A_R(HUBO) 33 : ONUF01D100_R(HUBL) 34 : VRSP_12(HABA) 35 : VRSP_18(HABA) 36 : HWTA(HIB_1) 37 : HWTA(HIB_2) 38 : HWTA(HIB_3) Please select frame type (0 ~ 38):1 Frame add successfully huawei(config)#frame connect { upframeid<0,97> }:0 { downframeid<0,97> }:1 Command: frame connect 0 1 Add the frame connection successfully huawei(config)#display frame connect --------------------------------------------Record Upper-frame Lower-frame --------------------------------------------0 0 1 ---------------------------------------------
Related Operation
Table 6-3 lists the related operation for configuring the connection between shelves. Table 6-3 Related operation for configuring the connection between shelves To... Delete the connection between shelves Run the Command... undo frame connect
6.3 Setting the Description of a Shelf

Set and change regularly the number of a test group or the description of a shelf to update the shelf information in time.
Precaution
l l Set the information of the test group of a shelf before setting the number of the test group. The number of the test group and the description of the shelf cannot be modified at the same time.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the frame set command to set the description of a shelf. Step 2 Run the display frame info command to query the description of a shelf. ----End
Example
To set the description of shelf 0 to huawei, do as follows:
huawei(config)#frame set 0 desc huawei huawei(config)#display frame info 0 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------Type : MAIN_F(H612HABD)
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
67
6 Device Management
State: Normal Desc : huawei TestGroup: 0 EMU 0 ID: 5 Subnode:12 State:Communications failed EMU 1 ID: 4 Subnode:15 State:Communications failed EMU 2 ID: 2 Subnode:1 State:Communications normal EMU 3 ID: 1 Subnode:2 State:Communications failed ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.4 Resetting a Control Board

Reset a control board to run the newly loaded program and database. If there is no standby control board, the resetting operation causes the resetting of all the service boards. Exercise caution when performing this operation.
Context
The control boards include active control board and standby control board. Resetting an active control board results in the following: l l In the case of an active/standby configuration, the resetting operation does not affect the ongoing services. If there is no standby control board, the resetting operation causes the resetting of all the service boards. In other words, this operation causes the resetting of the system.
Precaution
l l The resetting of a control board may discard unsaved data. Therefore, before the operation, run the save command to save the system data. The board reset command cannot be used to reset a control board.
NOTE
Reset the system only when required. Otherwise, the services may be affected. In general, the system is reset after a new application or database is loaded.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the reboot command to reset the control board. ----End
Example
To reset the active control board, do as follows:
huawei#reboot active Please check whether data has saved, the unsaved data may lose if reboot active board, are you sure to reboot active board? (y/n)[n]:y Reboot active will cause system forced switchover, are you sure to rebootactive board? (y/n)[n]:y
To reset the standby control board, do as follows:

huawei#reboot standby Please check whether data has saved, are you sure to reboot standby board? (y/n) [n]:y
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
68
6 Device Management
6.5 Adding a Service Board

Adding a service board is to provide you the data configuration when the service board is offline, namely, an operation when the actual service board is not inserted. The system checks the configured data in details. After the service board is added successfully and the service board is inserted, it runs according to the configuration.
Precaution
l After a service board is added offline, the status of the service board is faulty. The status changes to normal only when the slot is inserted with a service board of the same type. If a service board of different type is inserted, the service board cannot be started because the slot and the service board do not match. You can add a service board only in an idle slot.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the board add command to add a service board offline. Step 2 Insert the service board of the same type manually into the service shelf Step 3 Run the board confirm command to confirm a service board. Step 4 Run the display board command to query the status of a service board. ----End
Example
To insert an A32 board in slot 0/10, do as follows:
huawei(config)#board add 0/10 a32 huawei(config)#board confirm 0/10 huawei(config)#display board 0/10 -------------------------------------------------------Board Name : A32 Board state : Normal Online state : Board has ports : 32 0 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 1 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 2 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 3 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 4 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 5 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 6 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 7 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 8 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 9 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 10 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 11 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 12 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 13 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 14 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 15 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 16 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 17 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 18 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 19 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 20 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
69

21 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 22 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 23 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 24 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 25 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 26 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 27 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 28 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 29 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 30 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 31 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed A/u Law : A law Port Impedance : Bureau machine in China(200+680|| 100nf) Port Current : 25mA steady current Work Environment : Work Mode : Ring Voltage : --------------------------------------------------------
6 Device Management
Related Operation
Table 6-4 lists the related operation for adding a service board. Table 6-4 Related operation for adding a service board To... Delete a service board Run the Command... board delete Remarks Before deleting a service board, delete the data on it first. Otherwise, deleting the service board fails.
6.6 Deleting a Service Board

When the service board in a certain slot is faulty or not required because of the system capacity reduction, you can delete the service board. When the service board is deleted successfully, you can add a new service board in the idle slot.
Precaution
l l Before deleting a service board, delete the data on it first. Otherwise, deleting the service board fails. A control board in the auto-find state cannot be deleted; however, the faulty standby PVM board can be deleted.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the board delete command to delete a service board. Step 2 Run the display board command to query the status of a board. ----End
Example
To delete the faulty service board in slot 0/12, do as follows:

huawei(config)#board delete 0/12 Are you sure to delete this board? (y/n)[n]: y 0 frame 12 slot board delete successfully huawei(config)#display board 0/12 Failure: Board does not exist
6 Device Management
Related Operation
Table 6-5 lists the related operation for deleting a service board. Table 6-5 Related operation for deleting a service board To... Add a service board Run the Command... board add
6.7 Resetting a Service Board

You can reset a service board when the service board does not work properly. The system generates a fault alarm after the reset operation. The system generates a recovery alarm after the board recovers.
Precaution
l When the service board starts successfully after resetting, it reports the registration information to the control board. The control board configures the data of the service board to restore the services. Do not reset the power board.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the board reset command to reset a service board. ----End
Example
To reset the service board in slot 0/12, do as follows:
huawei(config)#board reset 0/12 Are you sure to reset board? (y/n)[n]:y 0 frame 2 slot reset board message sent successfully...
6.8 Prohibiting a Service Board

When a service board does not work normally, or a certain port on a service board is faulty, you must prohibit the service board first. When you prohibit a service board, you prohibit not only the normal services on the board but also any other operation till the service board is unprohibited (enabled).
Context
You need to prohibit service boards in the following cases:
6 Device Management
l l
The services of a board are suspended but not deleted. The dynamic resources are released.
Precaution
l l l l The control board cannot be prohibited. The service board that is in the auto-find state and is unconfirmed cannot be prohibited. Prohibiting a service board interrupts the services of the board. It is not allowed to prohibit the power board.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the board prohibit command to prohibit a service board. Step 2 Run the display board command to query the status of a service board. ----End
Example
To prohibit the service board in slot 0/12, do as follows:
huawei(config)#board prohibit 0/12 Prohibiting board will interrupt all services on this board, are you sure to prohibit board? (y/n)[n]:y Prohibit board successfully huawei(config)#display board 0/12 -------------------------------------------------------Board Name : A32 Board state : Prohibited Online state : Unmanageable Board has ports : 32 0 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 1 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 2 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 3 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 4 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 5 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 6 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 7 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 8 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 9 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 10 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 11 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 12 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 13 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 14 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 15 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 16 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 17 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 18 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 19 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 20 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 21 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 22 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 23 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 24 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 25 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 26 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 27 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 28 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 29 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed 30 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
72

31 port type : PSTN_PORT Licensed A/u Law : A law Port Impedance : Bureau machine in China(200+680|| 100nf) Port Current : 25mA steady current Work Environment : EMSAN Work Mode : COMBO Ring Voltage : --------------------------------------------------------
6 Device Management
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
73
7 Configuring the System DSP Channels
Configuring the System DSP Channels
About This Chapter

The number of digital signal processor (DSP) channels specifies the processing capability of a DSP chip. Configuring the system DSP channels includes configuring the attributes of the DSP channels and configuring the number of DSP channels for subscribers with different priorities. 7.1 Introduction to the System DSP Channels Through the DSP channels, the analog signals accessed by the UA5000 can be digitized. Thus, the voice service can be transmitted over the IP network. 7.2 Configuring the Attributes of the DSP Channel The attributes of the DSP channel include the parameters such as the maximum rate of the fax training, fax training mode, input gain of the DSP chip, output gain of the DSP chip, and default interval for the DSP to packetize RTP packets. By configuring the parameters of the attributes of the DSP channel, you can ensure the voice quality during the analog-digit and digit-analog conversion. 7.3 Configuring the Number of the Globally Shared DSP Channels The number of the globally shared DSP channels refer to the number of the system DSP channels minus the number of the channels reserved for the VAG. By configuring the number of the globally shared DSP channels, you can allocate different numbers of the DSP channels for subscribers with different priorities. 7.4 Configuring the Number of DSP Channels in the DSP Resources Reserved for the VAG The number of DSP channels reserved for the VAG refers to the number of private DSP channels reserved for the specified VAG. Subscribers in the VAG can use only the reserved DSP channels. Through the reservation of DSP channels for the VAG, subscribers of different priorities in the VAG can be allocated with different numbers of DSP channels. 7.5 Prohibiting the DSP Channel When one or more DSP channels on a subboard are faulty, you can prohibit the faulty DSP channel so that the service is not affected.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
74
7.1 Introduction to the System DSP Channels

Through the DSP channels, the analog signals accessed by the UA5000 can be digitized. Thus, the voice service can be transmitted over the IP network.
Service Description
DSP is a type of chip used to process the digital signals. The PVM board uses DSP to packetize the PCM signals to the voice packets, and then sends the voice packets into the IP network. In this way, the VoIP function is realized. DSP channel: The processing capability of the DSP chip is further quantified and can be reflected by the number of channels.
Each DSP channel processes the information in one 64 K PCM voice channel. Only after you insert a DSP subboard in the PVM control board, the PVM control board supports the DSP channels. The number of total DSP channels varies according to different subboard.
7.2 Configuring the Attributes of the DSP Channel

The attributes of the DSP channel include the parameters such as the maximum rate of the fax training, fax training mode, input gain of the DSP chip, output gain of the DSP chip, and default interval for the DSP to packetize RTP packets. By configuring the parameters of the attributes of the DSP channel, you can ensure the voice quality during the analog-digit and digit-analog conversion.
Context
l l The UA5000 supports two fax training modes: end-to-end training and local training. The network transmission delay, the device processing delay, and the serial link delay exist in the VoIP service. The occurrence of the delay causes the voice jitter and decreases the call quality. JitterBuffer is used to eliminate the delay, and improve the voice quality with the lost-packet compensation function. For details of the attributes of the DSP channel, see the parameter description of the dsp attribute command.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the dsp attribute command to configure the attributes of the DSP channel. Step 2 Run the display dsp attribute command to query the DSP parameters. ----End
Example
Assume the following:
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
The maximum rate of the fax training is V29. The fax training mode is local training. The initial adaptive JitterBuffer of the DSP channel is 50. The maximum adaptive JitterBuffer of the DSP channel is 100. The maximum fixed JitterBuffer of the DSP channel is 90. The minimum adaptive JitterBuffer of the DSP channel is 20. The minimum fixed JitterBuffer of the DSP channel is 40. The initial fixed JitterBuffer of the DSP channel is 60. The input gain of the DSP chip is 2 dB. The output gain of the DSP chip is 2 dB. The default coding mode of the DSP channel is G.729. The interval of transmitting the RTCP packet of the DSP channel is 500 ms. The default value of severe packet loss second threshold is 500. The VQM function is enabled. The default RTP packetization interval of the DSP channel is 30 ms. The default echo suppression function of the DSP channel is enabled. The default silence compression function of the DSP channel is enabled. The PLC algorithm function of the DSP channel is enabled. The value of the clearmode payload of the DSP channel is 100.
To configure the DSP attributes, do as follows:

huawei(config)#dsp attribute train-rate 1 train-mode 1 init-adapt-jb 50 max-adaptjb 100 max-fixed-jb 90 min-adapt-jb 20 min-fixed-jb 40 nominal-fixed-jb 60 inputgain 2 output-gain 2 code 3 rtcp-interval 500 sev-degradethreshold 500 bvqm 1 rtpinterval 30 echoflag 1 huawei(config)#dsp attribute clearmode-payload 100 silenceflag 1 statisticsflag 1 plc 1 huawei(config)#display dsp attribute ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Fax Max Train Rate :V29 Fax Train Mode :Local Train DSP chip maximum adaptive JitterBuffer(ms) :100 DSP chip minimum adaptive JitterBuffer(ms) :20 DSP chip initial adaptive JitterBuffer(ms) :50 DSP chip maximum fixed JitterBuffer(ms) :90 DSP chip minimum fixed JitterBuffer(ms) :40 DSP chip nominal fixed JitterBuffer(ms) :60 DSP input gain(PCM->IP)(db) :-8 DSP output gain(IP->PCM)(db) :-8 DSP code type :G.729 RTCP package send interval time(ms) :500 Severe Degrade Threshold(periods) :500 Support VQM :Enable DSP Rtp Packet Interval(ms) :30 DSP echo check :Open DSP silence reduce :Open DSP need statistics or not :Yes DSP Packet Lose Compensate :Open DSP clearmode payload value :100 Support RTCP XR :Disable T30 redundancy parameter value of T38 Fax :3 T4 redundancy parameter value of T38 Fax :3 Fax V8 Negotiate :Enable DSP VBD payload value :102 DSP G.726-16k payload value :103
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
76
DSP G.726-24k payload value :104 DSP G.726-32k payload value :101 DSP G.726-40k payload value :105 DSP 2198 payload value :96 DSP 2833 payload value :97 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Related Operation
Table 7-1 lists the related operations for configuring the attributes of the DSP channel. Table 7-1 Related operation for configuring the attributes of the DSP channel To... Prohibit the DSP channel Unprohibit the DSP channel Run the Command... dsp prohibit undo dsp prohibit Remarks Prohibit the DSP channel that cannot be used any more. When the DSP channel recovers, unprohibit the DSP channel to reuse it. Query the configuration and the usage of the DSP resources on a specified VAG.
Query the status of the DSP channel Query the DSP status of the VAG
display dsp state display dsp statistic
7.3 Configuring the Number of the Globally Shared DSP Channels

The number of the globally shared DSP channels refer to the number of the system DSP channels minus the number of the channels reserved for the VAG. By configuring the number of the globally shared DSP channels, you can allocate different numbers of the DSP channels for subscribers with different priorities.
Context
l The subscribers are classified into the following three categories: Cat1: category 1 government subscribers Cat2: category 2 government subscribers Cat3: common subscribers. The priorities of three-category subscribers are as follows: cat1 > cat2 > cat3. l The DSP resources are configured for subscribers according to the following principles: For category 1 government subscribers, the resources reserved for them are configured first. When the resources are insufficient, the resources reserved for category 2 government subscribers are configured. When the resources are insufficient again, the resources reserved for common subscribers are configured.
For category 2 government subscribers, the resources reserved for them are configured first. When the resources are insufficient, the resource reserved for common subscribers are configured. For common subscribers, the remaining globally shared DSP resources are configured.
Precaution
The reserved DSP channels must be configured for subscribers according to the number of subscribers with the priorities of cat1 and cat2.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the dsp reserve share command to configure the number of DSP channels in globally shared DSP resources. Step 2 Run the display dsp statistic share command to query the allocation and the usage of globally shared DSP resources. ----End
Example
To reserve 150 DSP channels for category 1 government subscribers and 200 DSP channels for category 2 government subscribers in globally shared DSP resources, do as follows:
huawei(config)#dsp reserve share cat1 150 cat2 200 huawei(config)#display dsp statistic share ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Config Used Cat1 DSP Channels: 150 0 Cat2 DSP Channels: 200 0 Common DSP Channels: 226 0 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Global Share DSP Channels Total: 576 DSP Channels Used: 0 Cat1 User Used: 0 Cat2 User Used: 0 Common User Used: 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Related Operation
Table 7-2 lists the related operations for configuring the number of DSP channels in globally shared DSP resources. Table 7-2 Related operations for configuring the number of DSP channels in globally shared DSP resources To... Configure the attributes of the DSP channel Configure the number of DSP channels in the DSP resources reserved for the VAG
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
Run the command... dsp attribute dsp reserve
Remarks -
78
To... Query the attributes of the DSP channel Query the DSP channel status of the VAG
Run the command... display dsp attribute display dsp statistic
Remarks Query the DSP resource configuration and the usage of a specified VAG.
7.4 Configuring the Number of DSP Channels in the DSP Resources Reserved for the VAG
The number of DSP channels reserved for the VAG refers to the number of private DSP channels reserved for the specified VAG. Subscribers in the VAG can use only the reserved DSP channels. Through the reservation of DSP channels for the VAG, subscribers of different priorities in the VAG can be allocated with different numbers of DSP channels.
Context
l l Subscribers in the VAG can only use DSP channels in the reserved DSP resources. Subscribers are classified into the following three categories: Cat1: category 1 government subscribers Cat2: category 2 government subscribers Cat3: common subscribers. The priorities of three category subscribers are as follows: cat1 > cat2 > cat3. l The DSP resources are configured for subscribers according to the following principles: For category 1 government subscribers, the resources reserved for them are configured first. When the resources are insufficient, the resources reserved for category 2 government subscribers are configured. When the resources are insufficient again, the resources reserved for common subscribers are configured. For category 2 government subscribers, the resources reserved for them are configured first. When the resources are insufficient, the resource reserved for common subscribers are configured. For common subscribers, the remaining DSP resources are configured. l For the related information about the VAG, see "11 Configuring the VAG Service."
Precaution
The reserved DSP channels must be configured for subscribers according to the number of subscribers with the priorities of cat1 and cat2.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the interface h248 or interface mgcp command to enter the MG interface mode to be configured.
Step 2 Run the dsp reserve command to configure the number of DSP channels in the DSP resources reserved for the VAG. Step 3 Run the display dsp statistic command to query the allocation and the usage of DSP resources in a specified VAG. ----End
Example
To configure 100 DSP channels for VAG 0, 25 DSP channels for category 1 government subscribers, and 25 DSP channels for category 2 government subscribers, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface h248 0 huawei(config-if-h248-0)#dsp reserve total 100 cat1 25 cat2 25 huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display dsp statistic ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Config Used DSP Channels Total: 100 0 Cat1 DSP Channels: 25 0 Cat2 DSP Channels: 25 0 Common DSP Channels: 50 0 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Cat1 User Used: 0 Cat2 User Used: 0 Common User Used: 0 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Related Operation
Table 7-3 lists the related operations for configuring the number of DSP channels in the reserved DSP resources for the VAG. Table 7-3 Related operations for configuring the number of DSP channels in the reserved DSP resources for the VAG To... Configure the attributes of the DSP channel Configuring the number of DSP channels in globally shared DSP resources Query the attributes of the DSP channel Query the status of globally shared DSP channels Run the command... dsp attribute dsp reserve share Remarks -
display dsp attribute display dsp statistic share
Query the configuration and the usage of the globally shared DSP resources.
7.5 Prohibiting the DSP Channel

When one or more DSP channels on a subboard are faulty, you can prohibit the faulty DSP channel so that the service is not affected.
Precaution
A DSP channel that is processing the voice service cannot be prohibited.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the dsp prohibit command to prohibit the DSP channel. Step 2 Run the display dsp state command to query the status of the DSP channel. ----End
Example
To prohibit two consecutive DSP channels on subboard 0/5/0, with the start DSP channel number 3, do as follows:
huawei(config-narrow-resource)#display dsp state 0/5/0 3 2 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Channel NO. DSP Channel State 0-idle $-G.711 busy A-All busy W-Wastage X-fault @-IP loopback *-PCM loopback #-prohibited -----------------------------------------------------------------------------0000-0049 ---00 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Total: 2 DSP channel 2 idle, 0 G.711 Busy, 0 All Busy, 0 Wastage, 0 Fault, 0 IP loopback, 0 PCM loopback, 0 prohibited -----------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-narrow-resource)#dsp prohibit 0/5/0 3 2 huawei(config-narrow-resource)#display dsp state 0/5/0 3 2 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Channel NO. DSP Channel State 0-idle $-G.711 busy A-All busy W-Wastage X-fault @-IP loopback *-PCM loopback #-prohibited -----------------------------------------------------------------------------0000-0049 ---## -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Total: 2 DSP channel 0 idle, 0 G.711 Busy, 0 All Busy, 0 Wastage, 0 Fault, 0 IP loopback, 0 PCM loopback, 2 prohibited ------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Related Operation
Table 7-4 lists the related operations for prohibiting the DSP channel. Table 7-4 Related operations for prohibiting the DSP channel To... Configure the attributes of the DSP channel Query the attributes of the DSP channel Unprohibit the DSP channel Run the Command... dsp attribute display dsp attribute undo dsp prohibit Remarks When the DSP channel recovers, unprohibit the DSP channel to use it again.
81
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
To... Query the DSP channel status of the VAG
Run the Command... display dsp statistic
Remarks Query the configuration and the usage of the DSP resources on a specified VAG.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
82
8 Configuring the Clock
8
About This Chapter
Configuring the Clock
In the digital network consisting of the UA5000 and other devices, the primary problem to be solved is clock synchronization. The UA5000 adopts the master-slave mode to synchronize the clock with the clocks of the devices in the network. 8.1 Introduction to the Clock The purpose of clock synchronization is to restrict the clock frequency and the phase of each node in a network within the predefined tolerance scope. This prevents the transmission performance degradation due to poor timings at the transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx) ends. 8.2 Configuration Example of a Clock Source This topic describes how to implement the clock synchronization of the UA5000 by extracting the clock signals from ports 0/4/0 and 0/5/0 on the UA5000. 8.3 Configuring the Reference Clock Source Configure the reference clock source for the port on the PVM board to synchronize the clock of the UA5000 with the clock of the upper-layer device. 8.4 Setting the Clock Source Priority Set the clock source priority for each clock source on the PVM board. The UA5000 uses the clock source with the highest priority for the clock synchronization. When the link of the clock source with the highest priority is faulty, the UA5000 uses the clock source with the second highest priority for the clock synchronization. This rule applies to the rest clock sources.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
83
8.1 Introduction to the Clock

The purpose of clock synchronization is to restrict the clock frequency and the phase of each node in a network within the predefined tolerance scope. This prevents the transmission performance degradation due to poor timings at the transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx) ends.
Service Description
There are two methods of achieving clock synchronization in a digital network: pseudo synchronization and master-slave synchronization. Table 8-1 shows the details of the two clock synchronization modes. Table 8-1 Clock synchronization description Synchronization Mode Pseudo synchronization Description In a digital network using pseudo synchronization, all digital exchanges are independent in terms of the clock. The clock of each digital exchange is of high precision and stability. Usually, the cesium clock is used. Because these clocks are independent from each other, their frequencies and phases are not totally synchronized, but the difference can be ignored because these clocks are precise. Hence, this clock synchronization is called pseudo synchronization. It is applied in international digital networks. Master-slave synchronization In a network that uses the master-slave synchronization, there is a master exchange with a high-precision clock. The other exchanges in the network are controlled by the master exchange, that is, the clocks of other exchanges in the network are synchronized with the clock of this master exchange. The clock of the lower layer exchange is synchronized with the clock of the upper layer exchange until the clock of the end exchange is synchronized.
The reference clock source of the system includes Bits clock, E1 line clock, and GPON line clock. A maximum of 10 clock sources can be configured when you run the clock source command to add the reference clock.
Service Implementation
The UA5000 often uses the master-slave synchronization mode. The working procedure is as follows: 1. The UA5000 extracts the clock signals sent from the upper-layer device at the line side as the clock source of the system. The clock source, with the highest priority and in the normal state, is used as the system clock. The UA5000 sends the clock signals to all the service boards through the backplane.
2.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
3.
The service boards send the clock signals to a lower-layer network element.
NOTE
The control boards can also send the clock signals to a lower-layer network element.
8.2 Configuration Example of a Clock Source

This topic describes how to implement the clock synchronization of the UA5000 by extracting the clock signals from ports 0/4/0 and 0/5/0 on the UA5000.
Prerequisite
The UA5000 must be connected properly according to the networking.
Precaution
l l l l You can configure a maximum of 10 clock sources. The added clock module must be set with a priority before use. After the priority of the clock module is set, it takes effect immediately. This operation may result in clock switch. When running the undo clock source command to delete the clock source that is being used by the system, it can result in clock switch.
Networking
Figure 8-1 shows the networking of the clock configuration. Figure 8-1 Networking of the clock configuration
E1/V5 SDH E1/V5
P P V V M M
A A 3 3 2 2 UA5000
Data Plan
l By running the clock source command, you can configure a maximum of 10 clock sources. The following section uses the configuration of two clock sources as an example.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
By running the clock priority command, you can configure a maximum of 10 priority levels. The following section uses the configuration of the priority level of the two clock sources as an example.
Table 8-2 provides the data plan for configuring the UA5000 clock. Table 8-2 Data plan for configuring the clock Item srcindex Data System reference clock source 0: 0 System reference clock source 1: 1 Port number System reference clock source 0: 0/4/0 System reference clock source 1: 0/4/1 priority System reference clock source 0: High System reference clock source 1: Low
Figure 8-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the clock. Figure 8-2 Flowchart for configuring the clock
Start
Configure the system reference clock source Set the priority of the system clock source Query the clock source status End
Procedure
Step 1 Configure the reference clock source. l Clock source 0 extracts clock signals from port 0/4/0. l Clock source 1 extracts clock signals from port 0/4/1.
huawei(config)#clock source 0 E1 0/4/0 huawei(config)#clock source 1 E1 0/4/1
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
86
Step 2 Set the priority of the clock source. l Set the clock source 0 with the highest priority. l Set the clock source 1 with the second highest priority.
huawei(config)#clock priority 0/1
Step 3 Query the status of the clock source.

huawei(config)#display clock source -------------------------------------------------------Index Config Source Priority State Output -------------------------------------------------------0 E1 0/4/0 0 OK Yes 1 E1 0/4/1 1 OK No --------------------------------------------------------
----End
Result
The UA5000 selects clock source 0 as the system clock and delivers the clock signals to each service board.
8.3 Configuring the Reference Clock Source

Configure the reference clock source for the port on the PVM board to synchronize the clock of the UA5000 with the clock of the upper-layer device.
Context
The system supports a maximum of 10 reference clock sources.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the clock source command to add the reference clock source. Step 2 Run the display clock source command to query the reference clock source. ----End
Example
To add an E1 clock source with index 0 to port 0/4/0, do as follows:
huawei(config)#clock source 0 e1 0/4/0 Clock source set succeeded huawei(config)#display clock source -------------------------------------------------------Index Config Source Priority State Output -------------------------------------------------------0 E1 0/4/0 0 OK Yes --------------------------------------------------------
To delete the clock source with index 0, do as follows:

huawei(config)#undo clock source 0 Clock source deletion succeeded huawei(config)#display clock source
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
87

The current system clock source is local Failure: User not config any clock source
Related Operation
Table 8-3 lists the related operation for configuring the reference clock source of the system. Table 8-3 Related operation for configuring the reference clock source of the system To... Set the clock priority Run the Command... clock priority Remarks After the priority of the clock module is set, it takes effect immediately. This operation may result in clock switch.
8.4 Setting the Clock Source Priority

Set the clock source priority for each clock source on the PVM board. The UA5000 uses the clock source with the highest priority for the clock synchronization. When the link of the clock source with the highest priority is faulty, the UA5000 uses the clock source with the second highest priority for the clock synchronization. This rule applies to the rest clock sources.
Precaution
After the priority is set, the priority of the clock module takes effect immediately. This operation may result in clock switch.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the clock priority command to set the clock priority of the reference clock source. Step 2 Run the display clock source command to query the reference clock source. ----End
Example
To set the priority level of the clock source with index 1 as high, and the priority level of clock source with index 0 as low, do as follows:
huawei(config)#clock { priority<K>|source<K> }:priority { p0/p1/p2/p3/p4/p5/p6/p7/p8/p9<S><1,19> }:1/0 Command: clock priority 1/0 Clock source priority set succeeded huawei(config)#display clock source -------------------------------------------------------Index Config Source Priority State Output -------------------------------------------------------0 E1 0/4/0 1 OK Yes 1 E1 0/5/0 0 OK No --------------------------------------------------------
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
88
Related Operation
Table 8-4 lists the related operations for setting the clock source priority. Table 8-4 Related operations for setting the clock source priority To... Set the reference clock source Run the Command... clock source Remarks The added clock source must be set with a priority before being used. -
Query the reference clock source
display clock source
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
89
9 Configuring the MG Interface
9
About This Chapter
Configuring the MG Interface
When configuring the IP services such as voice over IP (VoIP) and integrated services digital network (ISDN), configure the media gateway (MG) first. One MG corresponds to a unique MG IP address and MG port number, which are the only ways for the UA5000 to communicate with the MGC. 9.1 Introduction to the MG Interface In the application of the next generation network (NGN), the UA5000 communicates with the upper-layer MGC through the MG interface (the MG IP address and MG port number of the MG interface). Each MG interface corresponds to one virtual access gateway (VAG). 9.2 Configuration Example of the MG Interface (the H.248 Protocol) Configuring the MG interface means configuring the attributes of the MG interface, software parameters, ringing mode, and digitmap. After configuring the MG interface, you can configure the IP services such as VoIP and ISDN through the MG interface. 9.3 Configuration Example of the MG Interface (the MGCP Protocol) Configuring the MG interface means configuring the attributes of the MG interface, software parameters, ringing mode, and digitmap. After configuring the MG interface, you can configure the IP services such as VoIP and ISDN through the MG interface. 9.4 Adding an MG Interface Add an MG interface to the UA5000 so that the UA5000 and the MGC can communicate with each other through the MG interface. 9.5 Configuring the IP Address Pool The IP address can be used for configuring the service only after the IP address is added to the IP address pool successfully. By configuring the IP address pool, you can add the planned IP address to the IP address pool. 9.6 Configuring the Attributes of the MG Interface (the H.248 Protocol) The attributes of the MG interface include the IP address, domain name, and port number required for setting up the communication between the MG interface and the MGC, and also include the 2833 encryption and heartbeat duration. The MG interface and the MGC can communicate with each other normally only when the parameters of the MG interface attributes are the same as the parameters of the MG interface attributes configured on the MGC.
9.7 Configuring the Attributes of the MG Interface (the MGCP Protocol) The attributes of the MG interface include the IP address, domain name, and port number required for setting up the communication between the MG interface and the MGC, and also include the 2833 encryption and heartbeat duration. The MG interface and the MGC can communicate with each other normally only when the parameters of the MG interface attributes are the same as the parameters of the MG interface attributes configured on the MGC. 9.8 Configuring the Software Parameters of an MG Interface (the H.248 Protocol) The software parameters of an MG interface include parameters such as whether the MG interface supports authentication during registration and whether the MG interface supports standalone. After the configuration, the software parameters of the MG interface take effect on the subscriber service processes on the MG interface. 9.9 Configuring the Software Parameters of an MG Interface (the MGCP Protocol) The software parameters of an MG interface include parameters such as whether to maintain the ongoing call if the MG interface and the MGC are disconnected and whether the MG interface supports the dual-homing function. After the configuration, the software parameters of the MG interface take effect on the subscriber service processes on the MG interface. 9.10 Configuring the Ringing Mode of an MG Interface Configuring the ringing mode includes configuring the cadence ringing type and initial ringing type. Configure the ringing mode of the MG interface to meet different requirements for the ringing of different subscribers. 9.11 Configuring Digitmaps of the MG Interface (the H.248 Protocol) The format of a digitmap is strictly defined by the H.248 protocol. A digitmap consists of strings of characters with certain meanings. Configuring the digitmaps of the MG interface includes configuring the inner telephone digitmap, emergency channel digitmap, automatic re-dial digitmap, and overload emergency call digitmap of the MG interface. 9.12 Configuring Digitmaps of the MG Interface (the MGCP Protocol) The format of a digitmap is strictly defined by MGCP. A digitmap consists of strings of characters with certain meanings. Configuring the digitmaps of the MG interface includes configuring the automatic re-dial digitmap and overload emergency call digitmap of the MG interface. 9.13 Configuring the Overload Control of the MGC The MGC processes the calls reported by multiple AGs that the MGC controls. If the traffic volumes of multiple AGs increase, the MGC may be overloaded. When the MGC is overloaded, the UA5000 can control the calls to ensure that the calls of subscribers with priority or emergency are processed. Thus, the stability and the availability of the system are improved. 9.14 Configuring the Overload Control of the MG If the traffic volume of the MG increases suddenly, the MG may be overloaded. When the MG is overloaded, the UA5000 can control the calls to ensure that the calls of subscribers with priority or emergency are processed. Thus, the stability and the availability of the system are improved. 9.15 Enabling an MG Interface Enable an MG interface so that the MG interface negotiates with the MGC through the specified media gateway control protocol and implements the registration on the MGC. Resetting the interface enables the MG interface to register again on the MGC.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
91
9.1 Introduction to the MG Interface

In the application of the next generation network (NGN), the UA5000 communicates with the upper-layer MGC through the MG interface (the MG IP address and MG port number of the MG interface). Each MG interface corresponds to one virtual access gateway (VAG).
Service Description
In the next generation network (NGN), the MG and media gateway controller (MGC) are completely separated from each other. The MG converts the media format provided in one type of network to the media format required in another type of network. The MGC controls the status of a call related to the connection control for media channels in an MG. In the NGN solutions of Huawei, the UA5000 functions as an MG and the softswitch functions as an MGC. The MG interface data describes the interface and connection information between the UA5000 and the MGC.
l l You can configure a maximum of eight MG interfaces, namely, eight virtual access gateways (VAGs), on one UA5000. The UA5000 supports the H.248 protocol and the media gateway control protocol (MGCP). One UA5000 can use only one of the two protocols at the same time.
9.2 Configuration Example of the MG Interface (the H.248 Protocol)

Configuring the MG interface means configuring the attributes of the MG interface, software parameters, ringing mode, and digitmap. After configuring the MG interface, you can configure the IP services such as VoIP and ISDN through the MG interface.
Prerequisite
l l l The UA5000 must use the H.248 protocol. The IP address to be used in the example must already be configured in the IP address pool through the ip address command. The data on the MGC side (corresponding to the data on the MG side) must be configured correctly.
Precaution
l l You can add a maximum of eight MG interfaces for one UA5000. If the UA5000 has eight MG interfaces, adding the MG interface fails, and an error prompt is displayed. The UA5000 supports either the H.248 protocol or the MGCP protocol. If one UA5000 uses one protocol, all the MG interfaces on the UA5000 must also use this protocol. The default protocol is H.248.
Data Plan
Table 9-1 provides the data plan for configuring the MG interface.
Table 9-1 Data plan for configuring the MG interface Data Type MG interface data Item mgid code transfer protocol port Data 0 text udp H.248 MG: 2944 MGC: 2944 domainname Standalone digitmap Emergency channel digitmap IP addresses Media IP address of MG interface 0 on the UA5000 Signaling IP address of MG interface 0 on the UA5000 The IP address of the MGC UA5000.com 1234xxxx 110|119|999 10.10.10.2/24 10.10.10.4/24 10.10.20.1/24
Figure 9-1 shows the flowchart for configuring the MG interface. Figure 9-1 Flowchart for configuring the MG interface
Start
Add an MG interface
Configure the MG interface attributes
(Optiona) Configure the ring mode of the MG interface
(Optiona) Configure digitmaps of the MG interface
Enable the MG interface
End
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
93
Procedure
Step 1 Add an MG interface.
huawei(config)#interface h248 0 Are you sure to add MG interface? (y/n)[n]:y
Step 2 Configure the MG interface attributes.

huawei(config-if-h248-0)#if-h248 attribute mgip 10.10.10.2 mgport 2944 code text transfer udp domainName UA5000.com mgcip_1 10.10.20.1 mgcport_1 2944 mg-media-ip 10.10.10.4 huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display if-h248 attribute --------------------------------------------------------------------MGID 0 MG Description MG DomainName UA5000.com Protocol H248 H248version Negotiated Originally 1 Profile Negotiation Para disable Profile 0:NoProfile("") 2833Encrypt Codetype Transmode HeartBeatTimer(s) HeartBeatRetransTimes HeartBeatRetransTimer(s) MG signalling IP MG signalling Port MG media IP MIDType DeviceName Text UDP 60 3 60 10.10.10.2 2944 10.10.10.4 IP4_ADDR -
Active MGC MGC Port :2944 MGC IP:10.10.20.1 Active MGC MGC Domain Name:Standby MGC MGC Port :MGC IP:Standby MGC MGC Domain Name:---------------------------------------------------------------------
Step 3 Configure the MG interface digitmap.

huawei(config-if-h248-0)#digitmap set inner 1234xxxx emergency 110|119|999
Step 4 Reset MG interface.

huawei(config-if-h248-0)#reset coldstart Are you sure to reset MG interface?(y/n)[n]:y huawei(config-if-h248-0)# Reset MG interface 0 success!
Step 5 Query the status of MG interface.

huawei(config-if-h248-0)#quit huawei(config)#display if-h248 all ------------------------------------------------------------------------MGID TransMode State MgPort MGIP/DomainName MgcPort MGCIP/DomainName ------------------------------------------------------------------------0 UDP Normal 2944 10.10.10. 2 2944 10.10.20.1 -------------------------------------------------------------------------
----End
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
94
Result
After the MG interface is configured successfully, it should be able to communicate with MGC in the normal state.
9.3 Configuration Example of the MG Interface (the MGCP Protocol)

Configuring the MG interface means configuring the attributes of the MG interface, software parameters, ringing mode, and digitmap. After configuring the MG interface, you can configure the IP services such as VoIP and ISDN through the MG interface.
Prerequisite
l l l The UA5000 must use the MGCP protocol. The IP addresses must be configured in the IP address pool. The data on the MGC side must be configured correctly.
Data Plan
Table 9-2 provides the data plan for configuring the MG interface. Table 9-2 Data plan for configuring the MG interface Data Type MG interface data Item mgid protocol port Data 0 MGCP MG: 2427 MGC: 2727 domainname IP addresses The IP address of MG interface 0 on the UA5000 The IP address of the MGC UA5000.com 10.10.10.2/24 10.10.20.1/24
Context
The different between the H.248-based MG interface and the MGCP-based MG interface is that the MGCP-based MG interface does not support the isolation of the media stream and signaling stream. Hence, the IP address of the media stream must be the same as the IP address of the signaling stream (the same as the IP address of the MG interface), and the IP address of the signaling stream must be added to the IP address pool in the system.
Figure 9-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the MG interface.
Figure 9-2 Flowchart for configuring the MG interface

Start
Add an MG interface
Configure the MG interface attributes
(Optiona) Configure the ring mode of the MG interface
(Optiona) Configure digitmaps of the MG interface
Enable the MG interface
End
Procedure
Step 1 Add an MG interface.
huawei(config)#interface mgcp 0 Are you sure to add MG interface? (y/n)[n]:y
Step 2 Configure the attributes of the MG interface.

huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#if-mgcp attribute mgip 10.10.10.2 mgport 2427 domainName UA5000.com mgcip_1 10.10.20.1 mgcport_1 2727
Step 3 Query the attributes of the MG interface.

huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#display if-mgcp attribute --------------------------------------------------------------------MGID 0 MG DomainName Protocol 2833Encrypt Codetype Transmode IP Port HeartBeat Timer(s) UA5000.com MGCP Text UDP 10.10.10.2 2427 60
MGC[1] MGC PORT :2727 MGC IP:10.10.20. 1 MGC[1] MGC Domain Name: MGC[2] MGC PORT :MGC IP:MGC[2] MGC Domain Name:MGC[3] MGC PORT :MGC IP:MGC[3] MGC Domain Name:---------------------------------------------------------------------
Step 4 Reset the MG interface.


huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#reset Are you sure to reset MG interface?(y/n)[n]:y
Step 5 Query the status of the MG interface.

huawei(config)#display if-mgcp all -------------------------------------------------------------------------MGID State MGPort MGIP MGCPort MGCIP/DomainName -------------------------------------------------------------------------0 Normal 2427 10.10.10.2 2727 10.10.20.1 --------------------------------------------------------------------------
----End
Result
After the MG interface is configured successfully, it should be able to communicate with the MGC in the normal state.
9.4 Adding an MG Interface

Add an MG interface to the UA5000 so that the UA5000 and the MGC can communicate with each other through the MG interface.
Precaution
l l You can add a maximum of eight MG interfaces for one UA5000. If the UA5000 has eight MG interfaces, adding the MG interface fails, and an error prompt is displayed. The UA5000 supports either the H.248 protocol or the MGCP protocol. If one UA5000 uses one protocol, all the MG interfaces on the UA5000 must also use this protocol. The default protocol is H.248. If the MG interface that supports the current system protocol exists, you cannot modify the protocol. You can modify the protocol only after deleting the MG interface.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the display protocol support command to query the protocol used by the system. Step 2 Configure the system protocol. l If the protocol is different from the planned protocol, do as follows: 1. 2. Run the undo interface h248 or undo interface mgcp command to delete the original MG interface. Run the protocol support command to set the protocol for the system.
l If the protocol is the same as the planned protocol, go to step 4. Step 3 Run the reboot command to reboot the system and validate the protocol settings. Step 4 Add an MG interface. l When the H.248 protocol is used, run the interface h248 command to add an MG interface. l When the MGCP protocol is used, run the interface mgcp command to add an MG interface. ----End
Example
To add an MG interface with MG ID 0 when the H.248 protocol is used, do as follows:
huawei(config)#display protocol support System support H248 protocol huawei(config)#interface h248 0 Are you sure to add MG interface? (y/n)[n]:y huawei(config-if-h248-0)#
To add an MG interface with MG ID 0 when the MGCP protocol is used, do as follows:

huawei(config)#display protocol support System support H248 protocol huawei(config)#undo interface h248 0 huawei(config)#protocol support mgcp Configure Protocol need save the data, then reboot the system. Are you sure to change the protocol? (y/n)[n]:y huawei(config)#save huawei(config)#reboot system Data is not saved, the unsaved data will lose if reboot system, are you sure to reboot system? (y/n)[n]:y huawei(config)#interface mgcp 0 Are you sure to add MG interface? (y/n)[n]:y huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#
Related Operation
Table 9-3 lists the related operations for adding an MG interface. Table 9-3 Related operations for adding an MG interface To... Shut down an MG interface Run the Command... shutdown Remarks The shutdown type can be graceful or force. l graceful: If the active calls exist on the MG interface, the calls are held. When the active calls end or occur after the set time, the MGC and the MG are disconnected. l The option force indicates that all the calls are released after the MGC and the MG are disconnected. Restart an MG interface shutdown Run this command to restart an MG interface that is shut down.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
98
To... Start an MG interface
Run the Command... reset
Remarks When an MG interface is normal, run this command to reset it. After modifying the MG interface parameters, reset the MG interface so that it registers again with the MGC. You cannot delete an MG interface that is configured with the subscriber data, or an MG interface that functions normally. That is, you can delete only an MG interface that is in the close state or in the not start state. Run this command to query the configurations and the current states of all the MG interfaces in the global config mode. Run this command to query the configuration of an MG interface in the MG interface mode. Run this command to query the current status of an MG interface in the MG interface mode.
Delete an MG interface
undo interface h248 undo interface mgcp
Query the information about all the MG interfaces
display if-h248 all display if-mgcp all
Query the MG interface attributes
display if-h248 attribute display if-mgcp attribute
Query the status of an MG interface
display if-h248 state display if-mgcp state
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
99
To... Add a ring mapping entry
Run the Command... mg-ringmode add
Remarks When the MGC interacts with the UA5000, the ring mode is negotiated. The ring mapping involves mapping the ring mode parameters provided by the MGC and the ring tones provided by the UA5000. The data packet sent to the UA5000 by the MGC contains the parameters of the ring mode, which has the same value as the value of mgcpara. The UA5000 searches the ring mapping table for the matching mgcpara to obtain the cadence and initial ring tones.
Modify a ring mapping entry Delete a ring mapping entry
mg-ringmode modify mg-ringmode delete
As the system supports only 16 ring mapping entries, you can delete unnecessary entries if required. -
Query a ring mapping entry
display mg-ringmode attribute
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
100
To... Configure digitmap timers
Run the Command... digitmap-timer
Remarks The H.248 protocol defines three digitmap timers: long timer (L), short timer (S), and initial timer (T). Run the digitmap-timer command to set the timers to comply with the standards in your country or area. l Long timer (L): If the MG confirms that at least one more digit needs to be received to match a dialing scheme in the digitmap, the timer between the digits is set as the long timer. l Short timer (S): If the number string matches with one dialing scheme in the digitmap, but more numbers may be received and they match with other dialing schemes, the matching status should not be reported immediately. The MG must use the short timer to wait for receiving more numbers. l Initial timer (T): It is used before any dialed number. It is the duration before the first digit is received after offhook. If the initial timer is set to 0 (namely, T = 0), the timer fails. In this case, the MG waits for other digits.
Switch the MGC forcibly
mgc switch
Use this command to forcibly register the MG interface with the new MGC. Before the switchover, make sure that the IP address and port number of the secondary MGC are configured in the MG interface data.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
101
9.5 Configuring the IP Address Pool

The IP address can be used for configuring the service only after the IP address is added to the IP address pool successfully. By configuring the IP address pool, you can add the planned IP address to the IP address pool.
Context
It is recommended that you plan the NMS configuration mode of the device before configuring the IP address pool. Otherwise, changing the NMS configuration mode of the device subsequently may interrupt the service.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the ip address command to add the IP address to the IP address pool. Step 2 Run the display ip address command to query the information about the IP address pool in the system. ----End
Example
To add the IP address 10.144.68.158 with the subnet mask of 255.255.255.0 and the gateway IP address of 10.144.68.1 to the IP address pool, do as follows:
huawei(interface-eth)#ip address 10.144.68.158 255.255.255.0 10.144.68.1 huawei(interface-eth)#display ip address Eth: IPAddress............: 10.11.11.20 SubMask..............: 255.255.0.0 GateWay..............: 10.11.1.1 MacIndex.............: 0 MacAddress...........: 00-E0-FC-8B-77-77 VlanID...............: -IPAddress............: SubMask..............: GateWay..............: MacIndex.............: MacAddress...........: VlanID...............: IPAddress............: SubMask..............: GateWay..............: MacIndex.............: MacAddress...........: VlanID...............: 10.10.10.10 255.255.255.0 10.10.10.1 0 00-E0-FC-8B-77-77 -10.144.68.158 255.255.255.0 10.144.68.1 0 00-E0-FC-8B-77-77 --
Related Operation
Table 9-4 lists the related operation for configuring the IP address pool.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
102
Table 9-4 Related operation for configuring the IP address pool To... Delete the IP address Run the Command... undo ip address Remarks -
9.6 Configuring the Attributes of the MG Interface (the H. 248 Protocol)

The attributes of the MG interface include the IP address, domain name, and port number required for setting up the communication between the MG interface and the MGC, and also include the 2833 encryption and heartbeat duration. The MG interface and the MGC can communicate with each other normally only when the parameters of the MG interface attributes are the same as the parameters of the MG interface attributes configured on the MGC.
Prerequisite
l l l The UA5000 must use the H.248 protocol. An MG interface must be added successfully. For details on how to configure an MG interface, see "9.4 Adding an MG Interface." The required IP addresses must be configured in the IP address pool. For details on how to configure an IP address, see "9.5 Configuring the IP Address Pool."
Context
l l l One UA5000 can be configured with a maximum of eight MG interfaces. The MG interface attributes configured on the UA5000 must be the same as the MG interface attributes configured on the MGC. You can configure the following MG interface attributes as required: 2833 encryption key Coding mode MG interface description MG device name MG domain name Heartbeat duration Heartbeat retransmission interval Heartbeat retransmission times Media IP address Active and standby MGC domain name Active and standby MGC IP address Active and standby MGC port number Signaling IP address Signaling port number H.248 profile
Profile negotiation identifier Transmission type Negotiation function of H.248 profile
Procedure
Step 1 In the global config mode, run the interface h248 command to enter the MG interface mode. Step 2 Run the if-h248 attribute command to configure the MG interface attributes. Step 3 Run the display if-h248 attribute command to query the MG interface attributes.
NOTE
The MG interface parameters are valid only for a specified MG interface.
----End
Example
The following example shows how to configure an MG interface. Table 9-5 provides the data plan for configuring the MG interface attributes. Table 9-5 Data plan for configuring the MG interface attributes Parameter mgid mgport transfer mgcip_1 mgcip_2 mg-media-ip H248 profile Value 0 2944 UDP 10.10.20.1 10.11.10.1 10.10.10.4 Name: voice Index: 1 Parameter mgip code domainName mgcport_1 mgcport_2 protocol Profile negotiation parameters Value 10.10.10.2 text UA5000.com 2944 2944 H.248 disable
huawei(config)#load profile tftp 10.11.117.55 voice.fes Whether to start loading? (y/n)[n]:y Load(backup,duplicate,...) begins, please wait and notice the rate of progress Any operation such as reboot or switchover will cause failure and unpredictable result ! EVENT MAJOR 2007-11-25 12:33:18 ALARM NAME :Load start PARAMETERS :FrameID: 0, SlotID: 5, Load type: Profile file huawei(config)# ! EVENT MAJOR 2007-11-25 12:33:24 ALARM NAME :Load complete PARAMETERS :FrameID: 0, SlotID: 5, Load type: Profile file huawei(config)#interface h248 0 huawei(config-if-h248-0)#if-h248 attribute mgip 10.10.10.2 mgport 2944 code text transfer udp domainName UA5000.com mgcip_1 10.10.20.1 mgcport_1 2944 mgcip_2 10.11.10.1 mgcport_2 2944 mg-media-ip 10.10.10.4 profile-index 1 profile-negotiation disable
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
104
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display if-h248 attribute --------------------------------------------------------------------MGID 0 MG Description MG DomainName UA5000.com Protocol H248 H248version Negotiated Originally 1 Profile Negotiation Para disable Profile 1:Resv1("") 2833Encrypt Codetype Transmode HeartBeatTimer(s) HeartBeatRetransTimes HeartBeatRetransTimer(s) MG signalling IP MG signalling Port MG media IP MIDType DeviceName Text UDP 60 3 60 10.10.10.2 2944 10.10.10.4 IP4_ADDR -
Active MGC MGC Port :2944 MGC IP:10.10.20.1 Active MGC MGC Domain Name:Standby MGC MGC Port :2944 MGC IP:10.11.10.1 Standby MGC MGC Domain Name:--------------------------------------------------------------------NOTE
l The coding mode can be text or binary. H.248 supports only the text coding mode. l The transmission mode supports only the user datagram protocol (UDP). The transmission control protocol (TCP) is not supported. l The MGC information includes the MGC IP address, port number at the transport layer on the MGC side, and MGC domain name. In the case of the MGC IP address and the MGC domain name, you must specify one of them. To implement the MGC domain name resolution, you must run the dns command in the global config mode to start a domain name system (DNS) client on the UA5000.
Related Operation
Table 9-6 lists the related operations for configuring the MG interface attributes.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
105
Table 9-6 Related operations for configuring MG interface attributes To... Shut down an MG interface Run the Command... shutdown Remarks The shutdown type can be graceful or force. l The option graceful indicates that the active calls are held after the MGC and the MG are disconnected. After the set time, the MG and the MGC are disconnected. l The option force indicates that all the calls are released after the MGC and the MG are disconnected. Enable an MG interface reset When an MG interface is normal, run this command to reset it. After modifying the MG interface parameters, reset the MG interface so that it registers again with the MGC. You cannot delete an MG interface that is configured with subscriber data or an MG interface that is in use. Run this command to query the configurations and the current states of all the MG interfaces in the global config mode. Run this command to query the configuration of an MG interface in the MG interface mode. Run this command to query the current status of an MG interface in the MG interface mode.
undo interface h248
display if-h248 all
Query the attributes of an MG interface
display if-h248 attribute
display if-h248 state
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
106
Remarks When the MGC interacts with the UA5000, the ring mode is negotiated. The ring mapping involves mapping the ring mode parameters provided by the MGC and the ring tones provided by the UA5000. The data packet sent to the UA5000 by the MGC contains a ring mode, which has the same value as the value of mgcpara. The UA5000 searches the ring mapping table for the matching mgcpara to obtain the cadence and initial ring tones.
As the system supports only 16 ring mapping entries, you can delete unnecessary entries if required. -
Query a ring mapping entry
display mg-ringmode attribute
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
107
Remarks The H.248 protocol defines three digitmap timers: long timer (L), short timer (S) and initial timer (T). Run the digitmap-timer command to set the timers to comply with the standards in your country or area. l Long timer (L): If the MG confirms that at least one digit is to be received to match a dialing scheme in the digitmap, the MG waits for the digits with the long timer. l Short timer (S): If the number string matches with one dialing scheme in the digitmap, but more numbers may be received and they match with other dialing schemes, the matching status should not be reported immediately. The MG must use the short timer to wait for receiving more numbers. l Initial timer (T): It is used before any dialed number. It is the duration before the first digit is received after offhook. If the initial timer is set as 0 (namely, T = 0), the timer fails. In this case, the MG waits for other digits indefinitely.
Switch the MGC forcibly
mgc switch
Run this command to force the MG interface to register with the new MGC. Before the switchover, make sure that the IP address and port number of the secondary MGC are configured in the MG interface data.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
108
9.7 Configuring the Attributes of the MG Interface (the MGCP Protocol)

The attributes of the MG interface include the IP address, domain name, and port number required for setting up the communication between the MG interface and the MGC, and also include the 2833 encryption and heartbeat duration. The MG interface and the MGC can communicate with each other normally only when the parameters of the MG interface attributes are the same as the parameters of the MG interface attributes configured on the MGC.
Prerequisite
l l l The system must use the MGCP protocol. An MG interface must be added successfully. For details on how to configure an MG interface, see "9.4 Adding an MG Interface." The IP addresses must be configured in the IP address pool. For details on how to configure an IP address, see "9.5 Configuring the IP Address Pool."
Context
l l l One UA5000 can be configured with a maximum of eight MG interfaces. The MG interface attributes configured on the UA5000 must be the same as the MG interface attributes configured on the MGC. You can configure the following MG interface attributes as required: 2833 encryption key MG domain name Heartbeat interval MG interface name MGC IP address MGC domain name MGC port number IP address of the MG interface Port number of the MG interface
Procedure
Step 1 In the global config mode, run the interface mgcp command to enter the MG interface mode. Step 2 Run the if-mgcp attribute command to configure the MG interface attributes. Step 3 Run the display if-mgcp attribute command to query the MG interface attributes.
NOTE
The MG interface parameters are valid only for the current MG interface.
----End
Example
The following example shows how to configure an MG interface. Table 9-7 provides the data plan for configuring an MG interface. Table 9-7 Data plan for configuring an MG interface Parameter mgid mgport mgcip_1 mgcip_2 protocol Value 0 2944 10.10.20.1 10.11.10.1 MGCP Parameter mgip domainName mgcport_1 mgcport_2 description Value 10.10.10.2 UA5000.com 2727 2727 aaln
huawei(config)#interface mgcp 0 huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#if-mgcp attribute mgip 10.10.10.2 mgport 2427 domainName UA5000.com desc aaln mgcip_1 10.10.20.1 mgcport_1 2727 mgcip_2 10.11.10.1 mgcport_2 2727 huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#display if-mgcp attribute -----------------------------------------------------------MGID 0 MG description aaln MG DomainName UA5000.com Protocol MGCP 2833Encrypt Codetype Text Transmode UDP IP 10.10.10.2 Port 2427 HeartBeat Timer(s) 60 MGC[1] MGC PORT :2727 MGC IP:10.10.20.1 MGC[1] MGC Domain Name:MGC[2] MGC PORT :2727 MGC IP:10.11.10.1 MGC[2] MGC Domain Name:MGC[3] MGC PORT :MGC IP:MGC[3] MGC Domain Name:------------------------------------------------------------
Related Operation
Table 9-8 lists the related operations for configuring the MG interface attributes.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
110
Table 9-8 Related operations for configuring MG interface attributes To... Shut down an MG interface Run the Command... shutdown Remarks The shutdown type can be graceful or force. l The option graceful indicates that the active calls are held after the MGC and the MG are disconnected. After the set time, the MG and the MGC are disconnected. l The option force indicates that all the calls are released after the MGC and the MG are disconnected. Enable an MG interface reset When an MG interface is normal, run this command to reset it. After modifying the MG interface parameters, reset the MG interface so that it registers again with the MGC. You cannot delete an MG interface that is configured with the subscriber data or an MG interface that is in use. Run this command to query the configurations and the current states of all the MG interfaces in the global config mode. Run this command to query the configuration of an MG interface in the MG interface mode. Run this command to query the current status of an MG interface in MG interface mode.
undo interface mgcp
display if-mgcp all
Query the MG interface attributes
display if-mgcp attribute
display if-mgcp state
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
111
Remarks When the MGC interacts with the UA5000, the ring mode is negotiated. The ring mapping involves mapping the ring mode parameters provided by the MGC and the ring tones provided by the UA5000. The data packet sent to the UA5000 by the MGC contains a ring mode, which has the same value as the value of mgcpara. The UA5000 searches the ring mapping table for the matching mgcpara to obtain the cadence and initial ring tones.
As the system supports only 16 ring mapping entries, you can delete unnecessary entries if required. The T timer is used to match a timer expiry. Run this command to force the MG interface to register with the new MGC. Before the switchover, make sure that the IP address and port number of the secondary MGC are configured in the MG interface data.
Query a ring mapping entry Configure digitmap timers Switch the MGC forcibly
display mg-ringmode attribute digitmap-timer mgc switch
9.8 Configuring the Software Parameters of an MG Interface (the H.248 Protocol)

The software parameters of an MG interface include parameters such as whether the MG interface supports authentication during registration and whether the MG interface supports standalone. After the configuration, the software parameters of the MG interface take effect on the subscriber service processes on the MG interface.
Prerequisite
l l The system must use the H.248 protocol. The MG interface must be added successfully.
Context
With different software parameters of the MG interface, you can select whether to perform the following operations: l l l l l l l l l l Configure the MG interface to support the dual homing. Configure the MG interface to register with the MGC with a wildcard. Configure the MG interface to support authentication. Configure the MG interface to support the authentication header. Configure the MG interface to support the standalone service. Configure the filter switch of the media stream source port. Configure the filter timer length of the media stream source port. Configure the parameter for reporting the P2P fault. Configure the parameter for reporting the P2MP fault. Configure the type of the prompt tone after the MG and the MGC are disconnected.
Procedure
Step 1 In the global config mode, run the interface h248 command to enter the MG interface mode. Step 2 Run the mg-software parameter command to configure the software parameters of the MG interface. Step 3 Run the display mg-software parameter command to query the software parameters of the MG interface.
NOTE
The software parameters are valid only for the current MG interface.
----End
Example
To configure the software parameters of the MG interface so that the MG interface supports the dual homing and does not support the standalone service, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface h248 0 huawei(config-if-h248-0)#mg-software parameter 2 1 huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display mg-software parameter 2 --------------------------------------------------------------------Interface Id:1 para index:2 value:1 --------------------------------------------------------------------APPENDIX: --------------------------------------------------------------------Interface software parameter name: 2: The selections of the MG interface dual-homing 0: Do not support the dual-homing 1: Support the dual-homing, but do not support the auto switchover 2: Support the dual-homing and auto switchover
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
113
9.9 Configuring the Software Parameters of an MG Interface (the MGCP Protocol)

The software parameters of an MG interface include parameters such as whether to maintain the ongoing call if the MG interface and the MGC are disconnected and whether the MG interface supports the dual-homing function. After the configuration, the software parameters of the MG interface take effect on the subscriber service processes on the MG interface.
Prerequisite
l l The system must use the MGCP protocol. The MG interface must be added successfully.
Context
With different software parameters of the MG interface, you can select whether to perform the following operations: l l l l l l l l l Configure the MG to hold the active calls when the MG is disconnected from the MGC. Configure the MG interface to support the dual homing. Configure the MG interface to shut down the heartbeat. Configure the MG interface to register with the MGC with a wildcard. Configure the MGC type for the MG interface. Configure the heartbeat-no-reply threshold. Configure the MG interface to report heartbeat notification with the MG as the endpoint name. Configure the parameter for reporting the P2P fault Configure the parameter for reporting the P2MP fault
Procedure
Step 1 In the global config mode, run the interface mgcp command to enter the MG interface mode. Step 2 Run the mg-software parameter command to configure the software parameters of the MG interface. Step 3 Run the display mg-software parameter command to query the software parameters of the MG interface.
NOTE
The software parameters are valid only for the current MG interface.
----End
Example
To configure the software parameters of an MG interface so that the active calls are held after the MGC and MG are disconnected, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface mgcp 0 huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#mg-software parameter 1 1
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
114
huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#display mg-software parameter 1 ------------------------------------------------Interface Id:0 para index:1 value:1 ------------------------------------------------APPENDIX: ------------------------------------------------Interface soft parameter name: 1: Whether MG hold the existent call when connection between MGC and MG is broken 0 : Hold the existent call 1 : Disconnect all call and release resource
9.10 Configuring the Ringing Mode of an MG Interface

Configuring the ringing mode includes configuring the cadence ringing type and initial ringing type. Configure the ringing mode of the MG interface to meet different requirements for the ringing of different subscribers.
Prerequisite
The MG interface must be added successfully.
Context
l l If the system defined ring modes can meet the subscriber requirements, you can select the required ring modes and configure the ring mapping. If the system defined ring modes cannot meet the subscriber requirements, you can customize ring modes and configure the ring mapping.
Precaution
The mgcpara parameter on the MG must be the same as the mgcpara parameter configured on the MGC.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the system parameters command to configure the stop initial ringing flag.
NOTE
l If the initial ringing and the cadence ringing are in different cadence ratios, perform step 1. If they are in the same cadence ratio, skip step 1. l To use user defined ring modes, perform steps 2-3. To use system defined ring modes, perform step 4.
Step 2 Run the user defined-ring modify command to configure a user defined ring. Step 3 Run the display user defined-ring command to display the user defined ring modes. Step 4 Enter the MG interface mode. 1. 2. When the H.248 protocol is used, run the interface h248 command to enter the MG interface mode. When the MGCP protocol is used, run the interface mgcp command to enter the MG interface mode.
Step 5 Run the mg-ringmode add command to add a ring mapping entry.
Step 6 Run the display mg-ringmode attribute command to query a ring mapping entry. ----End
Example
To configure the ring for an MG interface, do as follows: Assume the following: l l l l MG ID: 0 MGC peer parameter ID: 0 Cadence ring: 1:4 Initial ring: 1:2
huawei(config)#system parameters 3 1 huawei(config)#interface h248 0 huawei(config-if-h248-0)#mg-ringmode add 0 0 17 huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display mg-ringmode attribute ------------------------------------------------------MGID PeerParameter CadenceRinging InitialRinging ------------------------------------------------------0 0 0 17 -------------------------------------------------------
To configure a ring mode for an MG interface, do as follows: Assume the following: l l l l l MG ID: 0 Peer parameter ID: 0 User-defined ring 0: 0.4s On, 0.2s Off, 0.4s On, 2.0s Off Initial ring: user-defined ring 0 Cadence ring: user-defined ring 0
huawei(config)#system parameters 3 1 huawei(config)#user defined-ring modify 0 para1 400 para2 200 para3 400 para4 2000 huawei(config)#display user defined-ring -------------------------------------------------RingType Para1 Para2 Para3 Para4 Para5 Para6 -------------------------------------------------0 400 200 400 2000 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 6 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 0 0 0 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 9 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 11 0 0 0 0 0 0 12 0 0 0 0 0 0 13 0 0 0 0 0 0 14 0 0 0 0 0 0 15 0 0 0 0 0 0 -------------------------------------------------huawei(config)#interface h248 0 huawei(config-if-h248-0)#mg-ringmode add 1 128 144 huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display mg-ringmode attribute ------------------------------------------------------MGID PeerParameter CadenceRinging InitialRinging
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
116

------------------------------------------------------0 1 128 144 ------------------------------------------------------NOTE
The user defined ring mode 015 corresponds with cadence ring modes 128143 and initial ring modes 144159. For example, to use the user defined ring mode 0 as the cadence ring mode, select 128. To use the user defined ring mode 0 as the initial ring mode, select 144.
9.11 Configuring Digitmaps of the MG Interface (the H.248 Protocol)

The format of a digitmap is strictly defined by the H.248 protocol. A digitmap consists of strings of characters with certain meanings. Configuring the digitmaps of the MG interface includes configuring the inner telephone digitmap, emergency channel digitmap, automatic re-dial digitmap, and overload emergency call digitmap of the MG interface.
Prerequisite
Specifications
Table 9-9 shows the valid characters in the strings and their meanings in the H.248 protocol. Table 9-9 Description of the characters in H.248 digitmap Character 0-9 A-D E F X T S Meaning It stands for * in the DTMF mode. It stands for # in the DTMF mode. It stands for a wildcard, indicating any digit from 0 to 9. It stands for a start timer used before any dialed number. Short timer. If the dialed number string matches with one dialing scheme in the digitmap, but more numbers may be received and they match with other dialing schemes, the matching status should not be reported immediately. The MG must use the short timer to wait for receiving more numbers. Long timer. If the MG ensures that at least one more number is required to match with any dialing scheme in the digitmap, the timer value between the numerals should be set as long timer. Duration modifier. It indicates a dialing event of a long duration. It precedes the event character with a fixed location. When the event duration exceeds the threshold, the dialing event fills the location. It indicates that there can be zero or many characters before it.
.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
Character | []
Meaning It is used to divide a string into several strings, and each string is a dialing scheme. It indicates that one digit or string can be selected among the options.
NOTE
l When you configure the re-dial digitmap for the card service when the MG interface uses the H.248 protocol, E stands for * and F stands for #. For example, to set the re-dial digitmap for the card service to ##, you need to set the dualdialdigitmap to FF. l The time length of the start timer on the UA5000 must be consistent with the configuration on the SoftSwitch.
Procedure
Step 1 In the global config mode, run the interface h248 command to enter the MG interface mode. Step 2 Run the digitmap set command to configure digitmaps for the services. Step 3 Run the display digitmap command to query the settings of the digitmaps. ----End
Example
To configure the digitmap for internal calls as 1234xxxx, and the digitmap for emergency channel as 110|119|999, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface h248 0 huawei(config-if-h248-0)#digitmap set inner 1234xxxx emergency 110|119|999 huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display digitmap ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Inner digitmap : 1234xxxx Emergency digitmap : 110|119|999 Urgent digitmap (for overload or bandwidth restrict) : Dualdial digitmap for card service : -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Related Operation
Table 9-10 lists the related operations for configuring the digitmaps. Table 9-10 Related operations for configuring the digitmaps (based on H.248) To... Clear a digitmap Run the Command... digitmap clear Remarks -
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
118
Remarks The H.248 protocol defines three digitmap timers: long timer (L), short timer (S) and initial timer (T). Run the digitmap-timer command to set the timers to comply with the standards in your country or area. l Long timer (L): If the MG confirms that at least one digit is to be received to match with a dialing scheme in the digitmap, the MG waits for the digits with the long timer. l Short timer (S): If the number string matches with one dialing scheme in the digitmap, but more numbers may be received and they match with other dialing schemes, the matching status should not be reported immediately. The MG must use the short timer to wait for receiving more numbers. l Initial timer (T): It is used before any dialed number. It is the duration before the first digit is received after offhook. If the initial timer is set as 0 (T = 0), the timer fails. In this case, the MG waits for other digits indefinitely.
9.12 Configuring Digitmaps of the MG Interface (the MGCP Protocol)

The format of a digitmap is strictly defined by MGCP. A digitmap consists of strings of characters with certain meanings. Configuring the digitmaps of the MG interface includes configuring the automatic re-dial digitmap and overload emergency call digitmap of the MG interface.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
119
Prerequisite
An MG interface must be added successfully.
Specifications
Table 9-11 shows the valid characters in the strings and their meanings in the MGCP protocol. Table 9-11 Description of the characters in MGCP digitmaps Character 0-9 A-D X T Meaning It stands for a wildcard, indicating any digit from 0 to 9. It indicates that the timer timeout is detected. That is, if there is still a number after the dialing scheme is matched with, the system reports the number digit by digit. It stands for * in DTMF mode. It stands for # in DTMF mode. It indicates that there can be zero or many characters before it. It is used to divide a string into several strings, and each string is a dialing scheme. It indicates that one digit or string can be selected among the options.
* # . | []
NOTE
The time length of the start timer on the UA5000 must be consistent with the configuration on the SoftSwitch.
Procedure
Step 1 In the global config mode, run the interface mgcp command to enter the MG interface mode. Step 2 Run the digitmap set command to configure digitmaps for services. Step 3 Run the display digitmap command to query the settings of the digitmap. ----End
Example
To configure the automatic re-dial digitmap for the card service to ##, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface mgcp 0 huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#digitmap set dualdial ## huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#display digitmap ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Dualdial digitmap for card service : ##
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
120
System urgent digitmap (for overload or bandwidth restrict) : -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Related Operation
Table 9-12 lists the related operations for configuring the digitmap. Table 9-12 Related operations for configuring the digitmap (based on MGCP) To... Clear a digitmap Configure digitmap timers Run the Command... digitmap clear digitmap-timer Remarks The T timer is used to match with a timer expiry.
9.13 Configuring the Overload Control of the MGC

The MGC processes the calls reported by multiple AGs that the MGC controls. If the traffic volumes of multiple AGs increase, the MGC may be overloaded. When the MGC is overloaded, the UA5000 can control the calls to ensure that the calls of subscribers with priority or emergency are processed. Thus, the stability and the availability of the system are improved.
Prerequisite
l l The data on the MGC side must be configured successfully. An MG interface must be added successfully.
Context
The MGC overload means that when the MGC has a large number of tasks to process, the CPU usage of the MGC increases, and the MGC cannot ensure normal calls. In this case, to solve this problem, the UA5000 limits the calls through different levels of priorities. In a network, the MGC or the MG may be overloaded. That is, either the MGC or the MG is overloaded, or both are overloaded. When either device is overloaded, the remote device should support and work with the other device. The user levels corresponding to the parameters for controlling the MGC overload are as follows: l l l t3: The customized user at the highest level, that is, the user of urgent calls t2: The customized user at the second highest level, that is, the user of cat1 and cat2 calls t1: The customized user at the common level, that is, the user of cat3 calls
NOTE
Cat1, cat2, and cat3 are the priority levels of the user terminal. Cat1 has the highest priority, and cat3 has the lowest priority.
Precaution
The MGC overload control cannot be disabled.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the mgc-overload-control parameters set command to configure the maximum call throughput of the calls at different levels for the MG interface. Step 2 Run the display mgc-overload-control parameters command to query the maximum call throughput of the calls at different levels for the MG interface. ----End
Example
To configure the parameters for the MGC overload control to meet the following requirements, l l l l l The user-defined call throughput threshold at the highest level is 20 offhook/s. The user-defined call throughput threshold at the second highest level is 15 offhook/s. The user-defined call throughput threshold at the common level is 10 offhook/s. The leaky bucket throughput is 25 offhook/s. The network busy tone after the call is intercepted by the bucket is an announcement.
do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface h248 0 huawei(config-if-h248-0)#mgc-overload-control parameters set t3 20 t2 15 t1 10 maxAdmitRate 25 throttlingCallTreat 2 huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display mgc-overload-control parameters ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Threshold for the calling channel at the highest level :20 Threshold for the calling channel at the less-higher level:15 Threshold for the calling channel at the ordinary level :10 The maximum pass rate of the leaky bucket :25.00 When the calling is rejected by the leaky bucket, the system prompts busy tone of the user network: 2 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------APPENDIX: ----------------------------------------------------------------------------When the calling is rejected by the leaky bucket, the system prompts busy tone of the user network: 1:EET 2:Announcement -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.14 Configuring the Overload Control of the MG

If the traffic volume of the MG increases suddenly, the MG may be overloaded. When the MG is overloaded, the UA5000 can control the calls to ensure that the calls of subscribers with priority or emergency are processed. Thus, the stability and the availability of the system are improved.
Prerequisite
An MG interface must be added successfully.
Context
The MG overload means that when the MG has a large number of tasks to process, the CPU usage of the MG increases, and the MG cannot ensure normal calls. In this case, to solve this problem, the UA5000 limits calls to control the traffic when the CPU of the MG is overloaded.
In a network, the MGC or the MG may be overloaded. When either is overloaded, or both are overloaded, the cooperation and the support of the remote device are required.
Precaution
l The MG overload control takes effect only for PSTN subscribers and ISDN subscribers (including ISDN PRA subscribers, ISDN BRA subscribers, DPNSS subscribers, and DASS2 subscribers). The UA5000 does not implement the overload processing for the onhook of ISDN subscribers.
Procedure
Step 1 Configure the MG overload control parameters. l Run the mg-overload-control originating-call command to set the offhook overload control parameters for the system. l Run the mg-overload-control call-clear command to set the onhook overload control parameters for the system. l Run the mg-overload-control terminating-call command to set the callee overload control parameters for the system.
NOTE
In general, use the system defaults to set the MG overload control parameters.
Step 2 Run the display mg-overload-control command to query the MG overload control parameters. Step 3 Run the mg-overload-control set command to enable the function of offhook overload control and callee overload control, and configure the corresponding minimum CPU usage for the restriction level overload.
NOTE
Use the default value 70 to set the corresponding minimum CPU usage for the restriction level overload. Run the power-dialer-control set command to set the detection, detection cycle, number of detection events in each cycle and the recovery time for malicious subscribers.
----End
Example
Table 9-13 provides the data plan for configuring the MG overload control parameters. The values of other parameters are the system default values. Table 9-13 Data plan for configuring the MG overload control parameters Type originating-call Pararemeter threshold1 threshold2 initleakrate call-clear
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
Value 25 30 6 30
123
threshold
Type
Pararemeter initleakrate
Value 10 30 10
terminating-call
threshold initleakrate
huawei(config)#mg-overload-control originating-call threshold1 25 threshold2 30 initleakrate 6 huawei(config)#mg-overload-control call-clear threshold 30 initleakrate 10 huawei(config)#mg-overload-control terminating-call threshold 30 initleakrate 10 huawei(config)#display mg-overload-control all -----------------------------------------------------------Originating Call threshold1 25 Originating Call threshold2 30 Originating Call initleakrate 6 Originating Call adjustfactor 20 Originating Call resume time length 30(s) -----------------------------------------------------------Terminating Call threshold 30 Terminating Call initleakrate 10 Terminating Call adjustfactor 20 Terminating Call resume time length 30(s) -----------------------------------------------------------Mass Call Clear threshold 30 Mass Call Clear initleakrate 10 Mass Call Clear adjustfactor 20 Mass Call Clear resume time length 30(s) -----------------------------------------------------------huawei(config)#mg-overload-control set originating-call-switch enable call-clear-switch enable
9.15 Enabling an MG Interface

Enable an MG interface so that the MG interface negotiates with the MGC through the specified media gateway control protocol and implements the registration on the MGC. Resetting the interface enables the MG interface to register again on the MGC.
Prerequisite
l l An MG interface must be added successfully. The data on the MG and the data on the MGC must be configured properly.
Precaution
l l After adding an MG interface or modifying the MG interface parameters, you need to reset the MG interface to validate the parameter configuration. Enabling an MG interface interrupts the ongoing services on the interface. Therefore, exercise caution when enabling an MG interface.
Procedure
Step 1 Enter the MG interface mode
1. 2.
When the H.248 protocol is used, run the interface h248 command to enter the MG interface mode. When the MGCP protocol is used, run the interface mgcp command to enter the MG interface mode.
Step 2 Run the reset command to reset the MG interface to enable it. ----End
Example
To reset the MG interface with MG ID 0 when the UA5000 uses the H.248 protocol, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface h248 0 huawei(config-if-h248-0)#reset coldstart Are you sure to reset MG interface?(y/n)[n]:y huawei(config-if-h248-0)# Reset MG interface 0 success!
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
125
10 Configuring the VoIP Service
10
About This Chapter
Configuring the VoIP Service
Configuring the VoIP service includes the application of the VoIP technology and the related process for configuring the VoIP service of the UA5000. 10.1 Introduction to the VoIP Service The voice over IP (VoIP) service uses the voice compression technology and transmits the voice service over the IP network. 10.2 Configuration Example of the VoIP Service This topic describes how to configure the VoIP service by accessing the voice service through the A32 service board and accessing the IP network through the PVMB control board. 10.3 Configuration Example of the VoIP Service (in Integrated Upstream Mode) This topic describes how to configure the VoIP service by accessing the voice service through the A32 service board and accessing the IP network through the IPM control board. 10.4 Configuring the Standalone Service Configure the standalone service of the UA5000. Thus, when the UA5000 is disconnected from the MGC, the subscribers connected to a same VAG can still communicate with each other. 10.5 Configuring the System Parameters Configure the parameters such as the sending howler tone flag, overseas flag, and consistency test flag of the UA5000 by configuring the global system parameters. Thus, the use of the subscriber terminal complies with the local standard. 10.6 Configuring the POTS Subscriber Data and Port Attributes After configuring the MG interface successful, you can add POTS subscribers on the MG interface by configuring the POTS subscriber data and port attributes. Thus, the function of the communication between POTS subscribers can be implemented. 10.7 Configuring the QoS IP Precedence Configuring the QoS IP precedence means configuring the different QoS IP precedences for the signaling, media, and maintenance packets to meet different requirements for the delay and jitter of different services. 10.8 Configuring the QoS VLAN Priority
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
126
Configuring the QoS VLAN priorities means configuring the different QoS VLAN priorities for the signaling, media, and maintenance packets. Thus, the QoS priorities of the service traffic streams can be controlled according to the VLAN priorities. 10.9 Separating the Signaling IP Address from the Media IP Address Separating the signaling IP address from the media IP address means configuring two different IP addresses as the media IP address and signaling IP address. Thus, the media stream and signaling stream are transmitted through different paths in the network. 10.10 Enabling the Voice Quality Enhanced Function Enabling the voice quality enhanced function includes enabling the automatic gain adjustment and background noise suppression functions so that the voice service is of better quality when there is noise.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
127
10.1 Introduction to the VoIP Service

The voice over IP (VoIP) service uses the voice compression technology and transmits the voice service over the IP network.
Service Description
The VoIP service uses the IP packet switched network for transmission after the analog voice signals are specially processed, such as compressed and packetized. In this manner, the voice signals can be transmitted through the connectionless User Datagram Protocol (UDP). Currently, the VoIP has the following three types: l l l PC to PC: The subscribers are mainly teenagers. PC to phone: The subscribers are mainly young people (such as oversea students). These subscribers are sensitive to the communication price. Phone to phone: The subscribers use the traditional telephones. The carrier provides the voice service over the NGN softswitch network.
The UA5000 provides the voice service through the voice service boards. Table 10-1 shows the number of ports provided by each type of service boards. Table 10-1 Number of ports provided by each type of service boards Board Type ASL A32 Number of Ports 16 32 Remarks 16-port POTS service board 32-port POTS service board
10.2 Configuration Example of the VoIP Service

This topic describes how to configure the VoIP service by accessing the voice service through the A32 service board and accessing the IP network through the PVMB control board.
Prerequisite
l l The master shelf must be added successfully. In this example, the H601HABD functions as the master shelf. The network management port must be configured properly, and you can telnet to the PVMB control board. For the procedure for configuring the network management port, see "4 Configuring the NMS." The IP addresses used in this example must be configured in the IP address pool. The media IP address and the signaling IP address are different. The data on the MGC (namely, the data corresponding to the data configured on the MG) must be configured properly.
l l
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
The data on the MG interface must be configured properly. For detailed operations, see "9 Configuring the MG Interface."
Networking
Figure 10-1 shows the example network of the VoIP service.
NOTE
This example considers the PVMB control board as an example. The configuration of the PVMD control board is the same as the configuration of the PVMB control board. Therefore, the configuration of the PVMD control is not described here.
Figure 10-1 Example network of the VoIP service
MGC 10.10.20.1/24 Router 10.10.10.1/24 H.248 0/11 UA5000 10.10.10.2/24 P P V V M M B B A 3 2
Phone1
Phone32
Data Plan
Table 10-2 provides the data plan for configuring the VoIP service on the PVMB control board. Table 10-2 Data plan for configuring the VoIP service on the PVMB control board Data Type MG interface data Item mgid code protocol
Issue 08 (2011-11-15) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Data 0 text H.248

129
Data Type
Item tranfer port
Data UDP MG: 2944 MGC: 2944
domainname start-negotiate-version
UA5000.com 2
NOTE The parameter value must be the same as the H.248 version on the MGC.
IP addresses
Signaling IP address of MG interface 0 on the UA5000 Media IP address of MG interface 0 on the UA5000 Default gateway of MG interface 0 on the UA5000 IP address of the MGC
10.10.10.2/24 10.10.10.4/24 10.10.10.1/24 10.10.20.1/24 Shelf ID/Slot ID: 0/11 Telephone numbers: 12340001-12340032
Telephone numbers
Phone 1-phone 32
terminal id
0-31, where terminals 0-31 correspond to telephone numbers 12340001-12340032. System default value Supported
ToS (type of service) strategy Voice enhancing function
IP priority and ToS priority The automatic gain control (AGC) function of the PSTN port The AGC level of the PSTN port The spectral noise suppression (SNS) function of the PSTN port The SNS level of the PSTN port
15 (-24 dBm0) Supported
20 (20 dB)
Context
l l
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
The MG interface parameters must be the same as the parameters configured on the MGC. Use the cadence ring tone and initial ring tone defined in the local standard.
Figure 10-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the VoIP service. Figure 10-2 Flowchart for configuring the VoIP service
Start Add shelves Add boards Configure hardware data
Confirm boards Configure IP addresses Add MG interfaces Configure an MG interface Configure IP addresses
Configure MG interface data
Enable the MG interface Configure protocol data Configure software parameters
Configure POTS subsciber data
(Optional) Configure MGCP protocol parameters
(Optional) Configure H.248 protocol parameters
(Optional) Configure SPCs
Configure POTS subscriber data
(Optional) Configure common attributes of the PORT subscribers
(Optional) Configure software parameters of the MG interface
(Optional) Configure system parameters
End
Procedure
l Procedure (for IPMB)
NOTE
In this example, the system uses the independent upstream mode. The A32 service board provides the interface for accessing the voice service. The voice signals are transmitted directly to the upperlayer network after being processed by the PVMB control board. Therefore, you need not configure the IPMB board.
Procedure (for PVMB) 1. Configure the IP address of the service network port.
huawei(config)#interface eth huawei(interface-eth)#ip modify 10.10.10.10 ip_address 10.10.10.2 gateway 10.10.10.1 submask 255.255.255.0 vlan_tag 1001 /When the device is configured with the IP address of the service network port, whereas the IP address, subnet mask, gateway, or vlantag of the current service network port on the device is inconsistent with the requirement of the actual data plan, run this command to modify the parameters./ /If no IP address is added to the current IP address pool of the device, run the ip address command to add the media IP address and signaling IP address to the IP address pool./ huawei(interface-eth)#ip address 10.10.10.2 255.255.255.0 10.10.10.1
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
131

vlan_tag 1001 huawei(interface-eth)#ip address 10.10.10.4 255.255.255.0 10.10.10.1 huawei(interface-eth)#display ip address Eth: IPAddress ..........: 10.10.10.2 SubMask.............: 255.255.255.0 GateWay.............: 10.10.10.1 MacIndex............: 0 MacAddress..........: 00-E0-FC-44-16-57 VlanID .............: 1001 IPAddress ..........: SubMask.............: GateWay.............: MacIndex............: MacAddress..........: VlanID .............: 10.10.10.4 255.255.255.0 10.10.10.1 0 00-E0-FC-44-16-57 --
2.
Configure the QoS (quality of service) IP strategy.

huawei(interface-eth)#quit huawei(config)#qos ip 10.10.10.2 strategy none
3.
Configure the working mode of the PVMB board as alone. In this networking mode, the PVM control board provides services independently, and the voice service is transmitted upstream through the ETH port on the PVM board.
huawei(config)#working mode alone
4.
Add A32 service board to the shelf and confirm the board.
huawei(config)#board add 0/11 a32 huawei(config)#board confirm 0/11 huawei(config)#display board 0 ------------------------------------------------------------------------SlotID BoardName Status Sub0 Sub1 Online/Offline ------------------------------------------------------------------------0 PWX2 Normal 1 PWX2 Normal 2 3 4 H601PVMB Standby_normal H602ETCA 5 H601PVMB Active_normal H602ETCA H602ETCM ...... 11 A32 Normal ...... 35 -------------------------------------------------------------------------
5.
Configure the MG interface attributes.

huawei(config)#interface h248 0 Are you sure to add MG interface? (y/n)[n]:y huawei(config-if-h248-0)#if-h248 attribute mgip 10.10.10.2 mgport 2944 code text transfer udp domainName UA5000.com mgcip_1 10.10.20.1 mgcport_1 2944 mg-media-ip 10.10.10.4 start-negotiate-version 2 huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display if-h248 attribute --------------------------------------------------------------------MGID 0 MG Description MG DomainName UA5000.com Protocol H248 H248version Negotiated Originally 2 Profile Negotiation Para enable Profile 1:Resv1("") 2833Encrypt Codetype Transmode Text UDP
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
132

HeartBeatTimer(s) HeartBeatRetransTimes HeartBeatRetransTimer(s) MG signalling IP MG signalling Port MG media IP MIDType DeviceName

60 3 60 10.10.10.2 2944 10.10.10.4 IP4_ADDR -
6.
Configure H.248 protocol parameters (enable the three-way handshake signal switch of the H.248 protocol stack.)
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#h248stack tr responseackctrl true huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display h248stack tr --------------------------------------------------------------------three way handshake : true longtimer(units: ms) : 30000 provtimer(units: ms) : 8000 retransfailoption : max retransfer times maxretranstimes : 7 retransmode : auto maxretranstimerval(units: ms) : 4000 minretranstimerval(units: ms) : 1000 ---------------------------------------------------------------------
7.
Enable the MG interface again.

8.
Query whether the state of the MG interface is normal.

huawei(config-if-h248-0)#quit huawei(config)#display if-h248 all ------------------------------------------------------------------------MGID TransMode State MgPort MGIP/DomainName MgcPort MGCIP/DomainName ------------------------------------------------------------------------0 UDP Normal 2944 10.10.10.2 2944 10.10.20.1 -------------------------------------------------------------------------
9.
Configure the telephone numbers of the subscribers.

huawei(config)#esl user huawei(config-esl-user)#mgpstnuser batadd 0/11/0 0/11/31 0 terminalid 0 telno 12340001 huawei(config-esl-user)#display mgpstnuser 0/11 -------------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port MGID TelNo Priority TID -------------------------------------------------------0 / 11 / 0 0 12340001 Cat3 A0 0 / 11 / 1 0 12340002 Cat3 A1 0 / 11 / 2 0 12340003 Cat3 A2 0 / 11 / 3 0 12340004 Cat3 A3 0 / 11 / 4 0 12340005 Cat3 A4 0 / 11 / 5 0 12340006 Cat3 A5 0 / 11 / 6 0 12340007 Cat3 A6 0 / 11 / 7 0 12340008 Cat3 A7 0 / 11 / 8 0 12340009 Cat3 A8 0 / 11 / 9 0 12340010 Cat3 A9 0 / 11 / 10 0 12340011 Cat3 A10 0 / 11 / 11 0 12340012 Cat3 A11 0 / 11 / 12 0 12340013 Cat3 A12 0 / 11 / 13 0 12340014 Cat3 A13 0 / 11 / 14 0 12340015 Cat3 A14 0 / 11 / 15 0 12340016 Cat3 A15
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
133

0 / 11 / 16 0 12340017 Cat3 A16 0 / 11 / 17 0 12340018 Cat3 A17 0 / 11 / 18 0 12340019 Cat3 A18 0 / 11 / 19 0 12340020 Cat3 A19 0 / 11 / 20 0 12340021 Cat3 A20 0 / 11 / 21 0 12340022 Cat3 A21 0 / 11 / 22 0 12340023 Cat3 A22 0 / 11 / 23 0 12340024 Cat3 A23 0 / 11 / 24 0 12340025 Cat3 A24 0 / 11 / 25 0 12340026 Cat3 A25 0 / 11 / 26 0 12340027 Cat3 A26 0 / 11 / 27 0 12340028 Cat3 A27 0 / 11 / 28 0 12340029 Cat3 A28 0 / 11 / 29 0 12340030 Cat3 A29 0 / 11 / 30 0 12340031 Cat3 A30 0 / 11 / 31 0 12340032 Cat3 A31 -------------------------------------------------------Command processing completed. 32 port(s) are configured MG PSTN user data
10. Enable the voice enhancing function.

huawei(config-esl-user)#pstnport vqe batset 0/11/0 0/11/31 agc enable Level 15 sns enable sns-Level 20 Command processing completed. 32 user data modified successfully huawei(config-esl-user)#display pstnport vqe 0/11 agc-
------------------------------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port AGC enable AGC value (dbm0) SNS enable SNS value(db) ------------------------------------------------------------------------0 / 11 / 0 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 11 / 1 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 11 / 2 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 11 / 3 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 11 / 4 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 11 / 5 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 11 / 6 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 11 / 7 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 11 / 8 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 11 / 9 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 11 / 10 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 11 / 11 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 11 / 12 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 11 / 13 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 11 / 14 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 11 / 15 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 11 / 16 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 11 / 17 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 11 / 18 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 11 / 19 enable -24 enable 20 ---- More ( Press 'Q' to break ) ----
11. Save the data.

huawei(config-esl-user)#quit huawei(config)#save
----End
Result
After the configuration is complete, phone 1 to phone 32 can communicate with each other.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
134
10.3 Configuration Example of the VoIP Service (in Integrated Upstream Mode)
This topic describes how to configure the VoIP service by accessing the voice service through the A32 service board and accessing the IP network through the IPM control board.
Prerequisite
l l The master shelf must be added successfully. In this example, the H601HABD functions as the master shelf. The network management port must be configured properly, and you can telnet to the PVMB control board. For the procedure for configuring the network management port, see "4 Configuring the NMS." The IP addresses used in this example must be configured in the IP address pool. The media IP address and the signaling IP address are different. The data on the MGC (namely, the data corresponding to the data configured on the MG) must be configured properly. The data on the MG interface must be configured properly. For detailed operations, see "9 Configuring the MG Interface."
l l l
Networking
Figure 10-3 shows the example network for configuring the VoIP service. Figure 10-3 Example network for configuring the VoIP service
Router 10.10.10.1/24 H.248
MGC 10.10.20.1/24
0/11 UA5000 10.10.10.2/24 I P M B I P M B P V M B P V M B A 3 2
Phone1
Phone32
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
135
Data Plan
l l Table 10-3 provides the data plan for configuring the VoIP service on the IPMB control board. The PVMB control board uses its FE ports Inner_FE0 and Inner_FE1 to communicate with FE ports 6 and 7 on the IPMB control board. In this case, the PVMB control board uses the IPMB control board for upstream. Table 10-4 provides the data plan for configuring the VoIP service on the PVMB control board.
Table 10-3 Data plan for configuring the VoIP service (on the IPMB control board) Shelf ID/Slot ID/Port ID 0/2/0 0/2/6 0/2/7 Corresponding VLAN 1001 Remarks The PVMB control board uses port 0 on the IPMB control board for uplink. The PVMB control board uses its FE ports Inner_FE0 and Inner_FE1 to communicate with FE ports 6 and 7 on the IPMB control board. Group FE ports 0, 6, and 7 on the IPMB control board into a VLAN.
Table 10-4 Data plan for configuring the VoIP service (on the PVMB control board) Type MG interface data Item mgid code protocol tranfer port Data 0 text H.248 UDP MG: 2944 MGC: 2944 domainname start-negotiate-version UA5000.com 2
NOTE The parameter must be consistent with the H.248 version of the MGC.
IP address
Signaling IP address of MG interface 0 on the UA5000
10.10.10.2/24
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
136
Type
Item Media IP address of MG interface 0 on the UA5000 Default gateway of MG interface 0 on the UA5000 IP address of the MGC
Data 10.10.10.4/24 10.10.10.1/24 10.10.20.1/24 Shelf ID/slot ID: 0/11 Telephone number: 12340001-12340032
Telephone number allocation
phone 1-phone 32
terminal id TOS strategy Voice enhanced function IP priority and TOS priority Automatic gain control (AGC) of the PSTN port Parameter value of the AGC of the PSTN port Spectral noise suppression (SNS) of the PSTN port Parameter value of the SNS of the PSTN port
0-31. Terminals 0-31 correspond to numbers 12340001-12340032. System default value Support 15 (-24 dBm0) Support 20 (20 dB)
Context
l l The parameters configured on the MG interface and on the MGC interface must be consistent. The cadence ringing tone and initial ringing tone must use the local standards.
Figure 10-4 shows the flowchart for configuring the VoIP service.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
137
Figure 10-4 Flowchart for configuring the VoIP service

Start Add shelves Add boards Configure hardware data
Confirm boards Configure IP addresses Add MG interfaces Configure an MG interface Configure IP addresses
Configure MG interface data
Enable the MG interface Configure protocol data Configure software parameters
Configure POTS subsciber data
(Optional) Configure MGCP protocol parameters
(Optional) Configure H.248 protocol parameters
(Optional) Configure SPCs
Configure POTS subscriber data
(Optional) Configure common attributes of the PORT subscribers
(Optional) Configure software parameters of the MG interface
(Optional) Configure system parameters
End
Procedure
l Configuration steps (for the IPMB control board) 1. Add a common VLAN and group FE ports 6 and 7 and IP uplink port 0 into the common VLAN.
huawei(config)#vlan huawei(config)#port huawei(config)#port huawei(config)#port 1001 vlan vlan vlan standard 1001 0/2 0 1001 0/2 6 1001 0/2 7
2.
Specify the IP address for the VLAN interface.

huawei(config)#interface vlanif 1001 huawei(config-if-vlanif1001)#ip address 10.10.10.1 255.255.255.0
3.
Add a common VLAN and group FE ports 6 and 7 and IP uplink port 0 into the common VLAN as the uplink channel of the NMS packets.
4.
Specify the IP address for the VLAN interface

huawei(config)#interface vlanif 1002 huawei(config-if-vlanif1002)#ip address 10.10.20.1 255.255.255.0
5. l
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
Save the data.

huawei(config)#save
Configuration steps (for the PVMB control board)

1.
Configure the IP address of the service network port.

huawei(config)#interface eth huawei(interface-eth)#ip modify 10.10.10.10 ip_address 10.10.10.2 gateway 10.10.10.1 submask 255.255.255.0 vlan_tag 1002 /When the device is configured with the IP address of the service network port, run this command to change the configuration if the IP address, subnet mask, gateway, or the vlantag does not meet the data plan requirements./ /If no IP address is added to the current IP address pool, run the ip address command to add the media IP address and signaling IP address to the IP address pool.// huawei(interface-eth)#ip address 10.10.10.2 255.255.255.0 10.10.10.1 vlan_tag 1001 huawei(interface-eth)#ip address 10.10.10.4 255.255.255.0 10.10.10.1 huawei(interface-eth)#display ip address Eth: IPAddress ..........: 10.10.10.2 SubMask.............: 255.255.255.0 GateWay.............: 10.10.10.1 MacIndex............: 0 MacAddress..........: 00-E0-FC-44-16-57 VlanID .............: 1001 IPAddress ..........: SubMask.............: GateWay.............: MacIndex............: MacAddress..........: VlanID .............: 10.10.10.4 255.255.255.0 10.10.10.1 0 00-E0-FC-44-16-57 --
2.
Configure the QoS IP strategy.

huawei(interface-eth)#quit huawei(config)#qos ip 10.10.10.2 strategy none huawei(config)#qos ip 10.10.10.2 strategy tos
3.
Configure the working mode of the PVMB control board to the independent networking mode. In this networking mode, the voice service is transmitted upstream through the ETH port on the IPM board.
huawei(config)#working mode integrated If switch working mode from alone to integrated,ETH0 will be service port and ETH1 will be outband port,Are you sure?(y/n)[n]:y
4.
Add the A32 service board and confirm the board.

huawei(config)#board add 0/11 a32 huawei(config)#board confirm 0/11 huawei(config)#display board 0 ------------------------------------------------------------------------SlotID BoardName Status Sub0 Sub1 Online/Offline ------------------------------------------------------------------------0 PWX2 Normal 1 PWX2 Normal 2 3 4 H601PVMB Standby_normal H602ETCA 5 H601PVMB Active_normal H602ETCA H602ETCM ...... 11 A32 Normal ...... 35 -------------------------------------------------------------------------
5.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
Configure the attributes of the MG interface.


huawei(config)#interface h248 0 Are you sure to add MG interface? (y/n)[n]:y huawei(config-if-h248-0)#if-h248 attribute mgip 10.10.10.2 mgport 2944 code text transfer udp domainName UA5000.com mgcip_1 10.10.20.1 mgcport_1 2944 mg-media-ip 10.10.10.4 start-negotiate-version 2 huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display if-h248 attribute --------------------------------------------------------------------MGID 0 MG Description frf_add MG DomainName UA5000.com Protocol H248 H248version Negotiated Originally 2 Profile Negotiation Para disable Profile 0:NoProfile("") 2833Encrypt Codetype Transmode HeartBeatTimer(s) HeartBeatRetransTimes HeartBeatRetransTimer(s) MG signalling IP MG signalling Port MG media IP MIDType DeviceName Text UDP 60 3 60 10.10.10.2 2944 10.10.10.4 IP4_ADDR -
6.
Configure the parameters of the H.248 protocol (enable the three-way handshake signal function of the H.248 protocol stack).
7.
Restart the MG interface.

8.
Query whether the MG interface is in the normal state.

9.
Configure the user telephone number.

huawei(config)#esl user huawei(config-esl-user)#mgpstnuser batadd 0/11/0 0/11/31 0 terminalid 0 telno 12340001 huawei(config-esl-user)#display mgpstnuser 0/11 --------------------------------------------------------
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
140

Frame/Slot/Port MGID TelNo Priority TID -------------------------------------------------------0 / 11 / 0 0 12340001 Cat3 A0 0 / 11 / 1 0 12340002 Cat3 A1 0 / 11 / 2 0 12340003 Cat3 A2 0 / 11 / 3 0 12340004 Cat3 A3 0 / 11 / 4 0 12340005 Cat3 A4 0 / 11 / 5 0 12340006 Cat3 A5 0 / 11 / 6 0 12340007 Cat3 A6 0 / 11 / 7 0 12340008 Cat3 A7 0 / 11 / 8 0 12340009 Cat3 A8 0 / 11 / 9 0 12340010 Cat3 A9 0 / 11 / 10 0 12340011 Cat3 A10 0 / 11 / 11 0 12340012 Cat3 A11 0 / 11 / 12 0 12340013 Cat3 A12 0 / 11 / 13 0 12340014 Cat3 A13 0 / 11 / 14 0 12340015 Cat3 A14 0 / 11 / 15 0 12340016 Cat3 A15 0 / 11 / 16 0 12340017 Cat3 A16 0 / 11 / 17 0 12340018 Cat3 A17 0 / 11 / 18 0 12340019 Cat3 A18 0 / 11 / 19 0 12340020 Cat3 A19 0 / 11 / 20 0 12340021 Cat3 A20 0 / 11 / 21 0 12340022 Cat3 A21 0 / 11 / 22 0 12340023 Cat3 A22 0 / 11 / 23 0 12340024 Cat3 A23 0 / 11 / 24 0 12340025 Cat3 A24 0 / 11 / 25 0 12340026 Cat3 A25 0 / 11 / 26 0 12340027 Cat3 A26 0 / 11 / 27 0 12340028 Cat3 A27 0 / 11 / 28 0 12340029 Cat3 A28 0 / 11 / 29 0 12340030 Cat3 A29 0 / 11 / 30 0 12340031 Cat3 A30 0 / 11 / 31 0 12340032 Cat3 A31 -------------------------------------------------------Command processing completed. 32 port(s) are configured MG PSTN user data
10. Enable the voice enhanced function.

huawei(config-esl-user)#pstnport vqe batset 0/11/0 0/11/31 agc enable agc-Level 15 sns enable sns-Level 20 Command processing completed. 32 user data modified successfully huawei(config-esl-user)#display pstnport vqe 0/11 ------------------------------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port AGC enable AGC value (dbm0) SNS enable SNS value(db) ------------------------------------------------------------------------0 / 11 / 0 enable 15 enable 20 0 / 11 / 1 enable 15 enable 20 0 / 11 / 2 enable 15 enable 20 0 / 11 / 3 enable 15 enable 20 0 / 11 / 4 enable 15 enable 20 0 / 11 / 5 enable 15 enable 20 0 / 11 / 6 enable 15 enable 20 0 / 11 / 7 enable 15 enable 20 0 / 11 / 8 enable 15 enable 20 0 / 11 / 9 enable 15 enable 20 0 / 11 / 10 enable 15 enable 20 0 / 11 / 11 enable 15 enable 20 0 / 11 / 12 enable 15 enable 20 0 / 11 / 13 enable 15 enable 20 0 / 11 / 14 enable 15 enable 20 0 / 11 / 15 enable 15 enable 20 0 / 11 / 16 enable 15 enable 20 0 / 11 / 17 enable 15 enable 20 0 / 11 / 18 enable 15 enable 20 0 / 11 / 19 enable 15 enable 20 ---- More ( Press 'Q' to break ) ----
11. Save the data.


----End
Result
After the configuration is complete, phone 1 to phone 32 can communicate with each other.
10.4 Configuring the Standalone Service

Configure the standalone service of the UA5000. Thus, when the UA5000 is disconnected from the MGC, the subscribers connected to a same VAG can still communicate with each other.
Prerequisite
l l l The UA5000 must use the H.248 protocol. The subscribers of the voice services must be configured on the MG interface. The subscribers must be able to call each other.
For the procedure for configuring the subscribers, see "10.2 Configuration Example of the VoIP Service."
Context
l Internal call standalone: When the UA5000 is disconnected from the MGC, the subscribers on the same MG interface can call each other. The MG interface is supported by the UA5000 instead of the MGC. Emergency channel: When the UA5000 is disconnected from the MGC, the subscribers of the UA5000 can dial the external phone numbers that are in the digitmap for emergency calls. For example, when the UA5000 is disconnected from the MGC, in the case of a fire, you can dial the fire emergency call.
Precaution
The UA5000 cannot detect repeated telephone numbers. When configuring telephone numbers for the standalone service, ensure that the telephone numbers are unique. Otherwise, the standalone service fails.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the mg-software parameter command to configure the service type of the VAG standalone service. Step 2 Run the display mg-software parameter command to query the service type of the VAG standalone service. Step 3 Run the standalone parameters command to configure the parameters of the VAG standalone timers. Step 4 Run the display standalone parameters command to query the parameters of the VAG standalone timers. Step 5 Run the digitmap set command to configure the digitmap for internal calls.
Step 6 Run the display digitmap command to query the digitmap for internal calls. ----End
Example
The following example shows how to configure the 32 POTS subscribers on the board in slot 12 of shelf 0, and configure the VAG to support the standalone service. Table 10-5 provides the data plan for configuring the standalone service. Table 10-5 Data plan for configuring the standalone service Data Type MG interface Standalone parameters Item mgid para index Data 1 11: The device supports internal calls between the subscribers connected to the device and the emergency channels. 15 60 50 1234xxxx 110|119|999
dialtoneval ringval busytoneval Phone digitmap Emergency call digitmap
huawei(config)#interface h248 1 huawei(config-if-h248-1)#mg-software parameter 11 3 huawei(config-if-h248-1)#display mg-software parameter 11 ------------------------------------------------Interface Id:1 para index:11 value:3 ------------------------------------------------APPENDIX: ------------------------------------------------Interface soft parameter name: 11: Stand alone support 0 : None 1 : Inner 2 : Emergency 3 : Both huawei(config-if-h248-1)#standalone parameters dialtone 15 ring 60 busytone 50 huawei(config-if-h248-1)#display standalone parameters -------------------------------------------------------------------------System stand alone para of timer for dial tone :15 (s) System stand alone para of timer for busy tone :50 (s) System stand alone para of timer for ring :60 (s) -------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-if-h248-1)#digitmap set inner 1234xxxx emergency 110|119|999 huawei(config-if-h248-1)#display digitmap --------------------------------------------------------------------------Inner digitmap : 1234xxxx Emergency digitmap : 110|119|999 Urgent digitmap (for overload or bandwidth restrict) : Dualdial digitmap for card service : ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
143
10.5 Configuring the System Parameters

Configure the parameters such as the sending howler tone flag, overseas flag, and consistency test flag of the UA5000 by configuring the global system parameters. Thus, the use of the subscriber terminal complies with the local standard.
Prerequisite
l l The UA5000 must work in the normal state. The user must log in to the UA5000 through the maintenance terminal and must maintain the UA5000 in the normal state.
Context
The system parameters can be used to configure the following: l l l l l l l l l l l l l l Sending howler tone flag Overseas version flag Consistency test flag Stop initial ringing flag System self check flag CPU over load call restriction flag Call-waiting tone flag Voicemail mode RTP 2833 Payload Type Inconsistency of the numbers of the peer UDP transmit and receive ports Transfer mode of media stream in a device Howler tone source TEI check cycle POTS GTC performance statistics function
Procedure
Step 1 Run the system parameters command to configure the system parameters. Step 2 Run the display system parameters command to query the system parameters. ----End
Example
To set the overseas version flag as ETSI, do as follows:
huawei(config)#system parameters 1 8 huawei(config)#display system parameters 1 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Parameter name index: 1 Parameter value: 8 Mean: Overseas version flag, 0:China, 1:HongKong, 2:Brazil, 3:Egypt, 4:Singapore, 5:Thailand, 6:France, 7:Britain MSFUK, 8:Britain ETSI, 9:Bulgaria,
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
144
10:Aleutian -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
10.6 Configuring the POTS Subscriber Data and Port Attributes

After configuring the MG interface successful, you can add POTS subscribers on the MG interface by configuring the POTS subscriber data and port attributes. Thus, the function of the communication between POTS subscribers can be implemented.
Prerequisite
l l The UA5000 must communicate properly with the MGC. The subscriber data on the MGC must be configured properly.
Context
l Perform this operation to configure POTS subscriber data, such as the following: Terminal priority Telephone number Terminal ID l Perform this operation to configure the attributes of a POTS port, such as the following: Subscriber attributes Attributes of the calling number format Impedance and attributes of the current 16KC/12KC attributes Polarity reversed pulse attributes Power-off duration attributes
Procedure
Step 1 In the global config mode, run the esl user command to enter the ESL mode. Step 2 Run the mgpstnuser add or mgpstnuser batadd command to add POTS subscribers. Step 3 Run the display mgpstnuser command to query the information about the POTS subscribers. Step 4 Run the pstnport attribute set or pstnport attribute batset command to set the attributes of the PSTN port. Step 5 Run the display pstnport attribute command to query the attributes of the PSTN port. ----End
Example
The following example shows how to add 32 POTS subscribers to shelf 0/slot 11. In this example, the mgid is 0, and all the subscribers support polarity reversed charging.
huawei(config)#esl user huawei(config-esl-user)#mgpstnuser batadd 0/11/0 0/11/31 0 step 1 terminalid 100
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
145
This operation will take several minutes, please wait... huawei(config-esl-user)# Command processing completed. 32 user data added successfully huawei(config-esl-user)#display mgpstnuser 0/11/0 0/11/31 -------------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port MGID TelNo Priority TID -------------------------------------------------------0 / 11 / 0 0 Cat3 A100 0 / 11 / 1 0 Cat3 A101 0 / 11 / 2 0 Cat3 A102 0 / 11 / 3 0 Cat3 A103 0 / 11 / 4 0 Cat3 A104 0 / 11 / 5 0 Cat3 A105 0 / 11 / 6 0 Cat3 A106 0 / 11 / 7 0 Cat3 A107 0 / 11 / 8 0 Cat3 A108 0 / 11 / 9 0 Cat3 A109 0 / 11 / 10 0 Cat3 A110 0 / 11 / 11 0 Cat3 A111 0 / 11 / 12 0 Cat3 A112 0 / 11 / 13 0 Cat3 A113 0 / 11 / 14 0 Cat3 A114 0 / 11 / 15 0 Cat3 A115 0 / 11 / 16 0 Cat3 A116 0 / 11 / 17 0 Cat3 A117 0 / 11 / 18 0 Cat3 A118 0 / 11 / 19 0 Cat3 A119 0 / 11 / 20 0 Cat3 A120 0 / 11 / 21 0 Cat3 A121 0 / 11 / 22 0 Cat3 A122 0 / 11 / 23 0 Cat3 A123 0 / 11 / 24 0 Cat3 A124 0 / 11 / 25 0 Cat3 A125 0 / 11 / 26 0 Cat3 A126 0 / 11 / 27 0 Cat3 A127 0 / 11 / 28 0 Cat3 A128 0 / 11 / 29 0 Cat3 A129 0 / 11 / 30 0 Cat3 A130 0 / 11 / 31 0 Cat3 A131 -------------------------------------------------------Command processing completed. 32 port(s) are configured MG PSTN user data huawei(config-esl-user)#pstnport attribute batset 0/11/0 0/11/31 polarity-reverse support huawei(config-esl-user)#display pstnport attribute 0/11 ------------------------------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port Gain(db) Dial-Mode Polarity-Reverse User-Type ------------------------------------------------------------------------0 / 11 / 0 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 1 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 2 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 3 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 4 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 5 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 6 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 7 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 8 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 9 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 10 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 11 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 12 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 13 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 14 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 15 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 16 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 17 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 18 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 19 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 20 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 21 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
146
0 / 11 / 22 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 23 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 24 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 25 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 26 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 27 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 28 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 29 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 30 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL 0 / 11 / 31 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL ------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-esl-user)#quit huawei(config)#board reset 0/11 Are you sure to reset board? (y/n)[n]:y
NOTE
At the start and end of a call, the UA5000 shows the start time and the end time based on the polarity reversal of the subscriber line. The billing terminal that has the polarity reversal charging function, such as a charging telephone set, implements the polarity reversal charging function according to the start time and the end time of the call.
Related Operation
Table 10-6 lists the related operations for configuring the POTS subscriber data. Table 10-6 Related operations for configuring the POTS subscriber data To... Delete a POTS subscriber or delete POTS subscribers in batches Modify POTS subscriber data Query the information about a POTS port to which the subscriber is connected Run the Command... mgpstnuser del/mgpstnuser batdel mgpstnuser modify display mgpstnuser Remarks -
Query information, such as port ID, MG ID, terminal ID, and telephone number corresponding to the subscriber. Query information, such as the type, status, and service type of the port. Terminating/Resetting the POTS port service affects the ongoing call. Run this command with caution. Terminating the POTS port service may fail when the system is busy.
Query the type and status of a POTS port and the service types on it Terminate/Reset the POTS port service
display port state
endservice/undo endservice
Configure the attributes of a POTS port or configure the attributes of POTS service ports in batches
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
pstnport attribute set/ pstnport attribute batset
147
To... Query the attributes of a POTS port Configure the caller number format on a POTS service port or configure the caller number format on the POTS service ports in batches Display the caller number format on a POTS service port Configure the impedance and the attributes of the current on a POTS service port or configure the impedance and the attributes of the current on POTS service ports in batches Query the impedance and the attributes of the current on a POTS service port Configure the KC attributes of a POTS port or configure the KC attributes of POTS ports in batches Query the KC attributes of a POTS service port Configure the polarity reversal attributes for a POTS port or configure the polarity reversal attributes for POTS ports in batches Query the polarity reversal attributes of POTS ports Configure the power-off duration of a POTS subscriber or configure the power-off duration of POTS subscribers in batches Query the power-off duration of a POTS subscriber
Run the Command... display pstnport attribute pstnport clip set/pstnport clip batset
Remarks -
display pstnport clip
pstnport electric set/ pstnport electric batset
display pstnport electric
pstnport kc set/pstnport kc batset
After configuring the KC attributes, reset the board to validate the settings. After configuring the polarity reversal attributes, reset the board to validate the settings. -
display pstnport kc pstnport reversepole_pulse set/pstnport reversepole_pulse batset
display pstnport reversepole_pulse pstnport timer set/pstnport timer batset
display pstnport timer
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
148
10.7 Configuring the QoS IP Precedence

Configuring the QoS IP precedence means configuring the different QoS IP precedences for the signaling, media, and maintenance packets to meet different requirements for the delay and jitter of different services.
Prerequisite
l l The ToS/DSCP strategy on the UA5000 must be the same as the ToS/DSCP strategy configured on the router at the upper layer. The IP addresses must be configured in the IP address pool.
Related Concept
l l Precedence tagging: It is a strategy to re-tag the precedence of a packet that matches the access control list. The tagged precedence is located in the related precedence fields. ToS (type of service) precedence: It is the ToS sub-field (bits 4 to 7 of the ToS field) carried by the ToS field in the IP header.
Figure 10-5 shows the ToS field in the IP header. The fields are described as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Precedence: 3 bits. It indicates the IP precedence. Delay (D): 1 bit. It indicates the minimum delay. When the ToS value is set to 8 (in decimal notation) or 1000 (in binary notation), the delay is the minimum. Throughput (T): 1 bit. It indicates the maximum throughput. When the ToS value is set to 4 (in decimal notation) or 0100 (in binary notation), the throughput is the maximum. Reliability (R): 1 bit. It indicates the maximum reliability. When the ToS value is set to 2 (in decimal notation) or 0010 (in binary notation), the reliability is the maximum. Cost (C): 1 bit. It indicates the minimum cost, that is, the router of the lower cost should be selected. When the ToS value is set to 1 (in decimal notation) or 0001 (in binary notation), the cost is the minimum.
Figure 10-5 ToS field of the IP header

0 1 2 3 4 T 5 R 6 C 7 Precedence D Not used
bit 0 Version
4 IHL
8 ToS
16 Total length
31
NOTE
If the ToS value of an IP packet is set to 0 (in decimal notation) or 0000 (in binary notation), the packet is for common service.
Differentiated services code point (DSCP) precedence: It is defined by the differentiated services (DS) field of the IP header. The DS field uses the ToS octet in the IP header. Six
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
bits of the ToS octet is used and the other two bits are reserved and must be set as 0. Figure 10-6 shows the DS field of the IP header. Figure 10-6 DS field of the IP header
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Not used
DSCP
bit 0 Version
4 IHL
8 DS
16 Total length
31
Context
l The traditional IP network uses the best effort (BE) mode in the transmission of the packets carrying various services. The BE mode can meet the requirements of the non-realtime services such as file transfer, web page browsing and e-mail transfer. The realtime services, however, demand low delay and jitter. The BE mode cannot meet the increasing demand of the subscribers. To solve the problem, you must distinguish the priorities for signaling, media, and maintenance packets, and set different QoS IP priorities for the signaling, media, and maintenance packets. Before changing the QoS IP strategy, run the qos ip command to set the ToS or DSCP value as none. Otherwise, changing the QoS IP strategy is not allowed, and the system displays an error prompt. To modify a QoS IP strategy, the interface corresponding to the IP address must be in the closed or not-started state. After configuring the IP addresses, you can configure the ToS/DSCP tag. If the MG interface is configured, you must disable the MG interface to configure the ToS/DSCP tag. Otherwise, configuring the ToS/DSCP tag is not allowed, and the system displays an error prompt.
l l
Procedure
l Procedure (TOS) 1. 2. 3. l 1. 2. 3. ----End
Run the qos ip ip_address strategy tos command to set the QoS IP strategy to TOS. Run the qos ip ip_address tos command to configure the ToS precedence for different service types. Run the display qos ip command to query the QoS IP strategy. Run the qos ip ip_address strategy dscp command to set the QoS IP strategy to DSCP. Run the qos ip ip_address dscp command to configure the DSCP precedence for different service types. Run the display qos ip command to query the QoS IP strategy.
Procedure (DSCP)
Example
The following example shows how to configure the QoS IP strategy as tos for the UA5000. Table 10-7 provides the data plan for configuring the QoS IP strategy. Table 10-7 Data plan for configuring the QoS IP strategy-1 Parameter ip_address media_precedence signalling_precedence maintain_precedence Value 10.10.10.2 2 3 2 Parameter strategy media_tos signalling_tos maintain_tos Value tos 3 5 5
huawei(config)#display qos ip { <cr>|ip_address<X.X.X.X> }: Command: display qos ip Eth: IPAddress............: 10.10.10.2 QOSIP Strategy.......: NONE huawei(config)#qos ip 10.10.10.2 strategy tos huawei(config)#display qos ip { <cr>|ip_address<X.X.X.X> }: Command: display qos ip Eth: IPAddress............: 10.10.10.2 QOSIP Strategy.......: ToS Media Precedence.....: 6 Media ToS............: 8 Signaling Precedence.: 7 Signaling ToS........: 2 Maintain Precedence..: 7 Maintain ToS.........: 2 huawei(config)#qos ip 10.10.10.2 tos media 2 3 signaling 3 5 maintain 2 5 huawei(config)#display qos ip { <cr>|ip_address<X.X.X.X> }: Command: display qos ip Eth: IPAddress............: QOSIP Strategy.......: Media Precedence.....: Media ToS............: Signaling Precedence.: Signaling ToS........: Maintain Precedence..: Maintain ToS.........: 10.10.10.2 ToS 2 3 3 5 2 5
The following example shows how to configure the QoS IP strategy as dscp for the UA5000. Table 10-8 provides the data plan for configuring the QoS IP strategy.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
151
Table 10-8 Data plan for configuring the QoS IP strategy-2 Parameter ip_address media_dscp maintain_dscp Value 10.10.10.2 34 56 Parameter strategy signalling_dscp Value dscp 56 -
huawei(config)#display qos ip { <cr>|ip_address<X.X.X.X> }: Command: display qos ip Eth: IPAddress............: 10.10.10.2 QOSIP Strategy.......: ToS Media Precedence.....: 2 Media ToS............: 3 Signaling Precedence.: 3 Signaling ToS........: 5 Maintain Precedence..: 2 Maintain ToS.........: 5 huawei(config)#qos ip 10.10.10.2 strategy none huawei(config)#qos ip 10.10.10.2 strategy dscp huawei(config)#display qos ip { <cr>|ip_address<X.X.X.X> }: Command: display qos ip IPAddress............: 10.10.10.2 QOSIP Strategy.......: DSCP Media DSCP...........: 46 Signaling DSCP.......: 26 Maintain DSCP........: 26 huawei(config)#qos ip 10.10.10.2 dscp media 34 signaling 56 maintain 56 huawei(config)#display qos ip { <cr>|ip_address<X.X.X.X> }: Command: display qos ip IPAddress............: QOSIP Strategy.......: Media DSCP...........: Signaling DSCP.......: Maintain DSCP........: 10.10.10.2 DSCP 34 56 56
10.8 Configuring the QoS VLAN Priority

Configuring the QoS VLAN priorities means configuring the different QoS VLAN priorities for the signaling, media, and maintenance packets. Thus, the QoS priorities of the service traffic streams can be controlled according to the VLAN priorities.
Prerequisite
The IP addresses must be configured in the IP address pool.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
152
Context
You can configure different VLAN priorities for signaling, media, and maintenance packets when configuring an IP address.
NOTE
An IP address is bound only with the VLAN ID instead of the VLAN priority. That is, different types of packets from one IP address can have different VLAN priorities.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the qos vlan ip_address priority command to set VLAN priorities for different service types. Step 2 Run the display qos vlan command to query the QOS VLAN settings. ----End
Example
To set the QoS VLAN priority of the IP address 10.10.10.4 to the default value, do as follows:
huawei(config)#qos vlan 10.10.10.4 priority default huawei(config)#display qos vlan 10.10.10.4 IPAddress............: 10.10.10.4 VlanID...............: 1001 Media Priority.......: 6 Signaling Priority...: 3 Maintain Priority....: 5
10.9 Separating the Signaling IP Address from the Media IP Address

Separating the signaling IP address from the media IP address means configuring two different IP addresses as the media IP address and signaling IP address. Thus, the media stream and signaling stream are transmitted through different paths in the network.
Prerequisite
The IP addresses must be configured in the IP address pool.
Context
You need to configure different IP addresses for signaling stream and media stream to distinguish the paths for signaling stream and media stream. This helps to use different QoS strategy.
Precaution
l l The signaling IP address and media IP address can be separated only when the UA5000 uses the H.248 protocol. After modifying the configuration of MG interface, reset the MG interface to validate the modification.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
Procedure
Step 1 In the global config mode, run the interface h248 command to enter the MG interface mode. Step 2 Run the if-h248 attribute mg-media-ip command to add a media IP address for the MG interface. Step 3 Run the display if-h248 attribute command to query the attributes of the MG interface. Then, check whether the media IP address is correct. ----End
Example
To set the media IP address of MG interface 0 as 10.10.10.4, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface h248 0 huawei(config-if-h248-0)#if-h248 attribute mg-media-ip 10.10.10.4 huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display if-h248 attribute --------------------------------------------------------------------MGID 0 MG Description MG DomainName Protocol H248 H248version Negotiated Originally 1 Profile Negotiation Para enable Profile 1:Resv1("") 2833Encrypt Codetype Transmode HeartBeatTimer(s) HeartBeatRetransTimes HeartBeatRetransTimer(s) MG signalling IP MG signalling Port MG media IP MIDType DeviceName Text UDP 60 3 60 10.10.10.2 2944 10.10.10.4 IP4_ADDR -
10.10 Enabling the Voice Quality Enhanced Function

Enabling the voice quality enhanced function includes enabling the automatic gain adjustment and background noise suppression functions so that the voice service is of better quality when there is noise.
Prerequisite
l l The UA5000 must work in the normal state. The maintenance terminal must be logged in to the UA5000 successfully and the UA5000 must be maintained normally.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
154
Context
The voice quality enhancements (VQE) include two functions: automatic gain adjustment and background noise suppression. l Automatic gain adjustment: During the VoIP call, this function helps to prevent the call quality from be affected by the sudden change of the noise energy. When the noise energy changes suddenly, the gain is adjusted automatically so that noise energy is adjusted smoothly. This prevents the discomfort of the listener caused by the sudden change of the noise energy. Background noise suppression: During the VoIP call, the noise energy can be reduced to improve the comfort and the clarity of the call.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the pstnport vqe set command or the pstnport vqe batset command to configure the VQE attributes of the PSTN port.
NOTE
l pstnport vqe set is to configure the VQE of a single PSTN port. l pstnport vqe batsetis to configure the VQE of PSTN ports in batch.
Step 2 Run the display pstnport vqe command to query the VQE attributes of the PSTN port. ----End
Example
To enable the automatic gain adjustment, set the automatic gain adjustment parameter as 15 (that is -24dBm0), enable the background noise suppression, and set the background noise suppression parameter as 20 dB for PSTN port 0/6/0, do as follows:
huawei(config)#esl user huawei(config-esl-user)#pstnport vqe set 0/6/0 agc enable agc-Level 15 sns enable sns-level 20 PSTN port set completed huawei(config-esl-user)#display pstnport vqe 0/6/0 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port AGC enable AGC value (dbm0) SNS enable SNS value (db) -----------------------------------------------------------------------------0 / 6 / 0 enable -24 enable 20 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Assume the following: l l l l The automatic gain adjustment is enabled. The automatic gain adjustment parameter is set as 15 (that is -24dBm0). The background noise suppression is enabled. The background noise suppression parameter is set as 20 dB.
To configure the VQE attributes for PSTN ports 0/6/0 to 0/6/4 in batches, do as follows:
huawei(config)#esl user huawei(config-esl-user)#pstnport vqe batset 0/6/0 0/6/4 agc enable agc-Level 15 sns enable sns-Level 20 Command processing completed. 5 user data modified successfully huawei(config-esl-user)#display pstnport vqe 0/6 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port AGC enable AGC value (dbm0) SNS enable SNS value (db)
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
155
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------0 / 6 / 0 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 6 / 1 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 6 / 2 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 6 / 3 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 6 / 4 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 6 / 5 enable NULL enable NULL 0 / 6 / 6 enable NULL enable NULL 0 / 6 / 7 enable NULL enable NULL 0 / 6 / 8 enable NULL enable NULL 0 / 6 / 9 enable NULL enable NULL 0 / 6 / 10 enable NULL enable NULL 0 / 6 / 11 enable NULL enable NULL 0 / 6 / 12 enable NULL enable NULL 0 / 6 / 13 enable NULL enable NULL 0 / 6 / 14 enable NULL enable NULL 0 / 6 / 15 enable NULL enable NULL 0 / 6 / 16 enable NULL enable NULL 0 / 6 / 17 enable NULL enable NULL 0 / 6 / 18 enable NULL enable NULL 0 / 6 / 19 enable NULL enable NULL 0 / 6 / 20 enable NULL enable NULL 0 / 6 / 21 enable NULL enable NULL 0 / 6 / 22 enable NULL enable NULL 0 / 6 / 23 enable NULL enable NULL 0 / 6 / 24 enable NULL enable NULL 0 / 6 / 25 enable NULL enable NULL 0 / 6 / 26 enable NULL enable NULL 0 / 6 / 27 enable NULL enable NULL 0 / 6 / 28 enable NULL enable NULL 0 / 6 / 29 enable NULL enable NULL 0 / 6 / 30 enable NULL enable NULL 0 / 6 / 31 enable NULL enable NULL -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
156
11 Configuring the VAG Service
11
About This Chapter
Configuring the VAG Service
Configuring the VAG service includes the application of the VAG service and the process for configuring the VAG on the UA5000. 11.1 Introduction to the VAG Service Virtual access gateway (VAG) means that a physical AG is simulated as multiple virtual AGs. 11.2 Configuration Example of the VAG Service This topic describes how to configure and verify the VAG service by creating two MG interfaces on the UA5000 and then configuring PSTN subscribers on the two MG interfaces. 11.3 Configuring the TID Profile of the VAG This topic describes how to configure the mode of generating terminal IDs (TIDs) of users of all the types of the VAG, including the terminal prefix and TID profile. The TID profile defines the mode of generating the ID of the terminal except the terminal prefix. The ID of a user terminal is a combination of the terminal prefix and the character string generated by the TID profile.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
157
11.1 Introduction to the VAG Service

Virtual access gateway (VAG) means that a physical AG is simulated as multiple virtual AGs.
Service Description
An AG supports different IP interfaces and each interface is used independently to realize the VAG feature. In the VAG service, an AG can be used by several carriers to improve the device utilization, to facilitate the management and charging, and thus to meet the requirements of the carrier. For more information about the features of VAG, see "VAG" in the Feature Description.
An AG supports a maximum of 8 VAGs.
11.2 Configuration Example of the VAG Service

This topic describes how to configure and verify the VAG service by creating two MG interfaces on the UA5000 and then configuring PSTN subscribers on the two MG interfaces.
Prerequisite
l The IP address of the service network port and the subscribers must be configured successfully. The subscribers must be able to call each other. For the procedure for configuring the subscribers, see "10.2 Configuration Example of the VoIP Service." System parameters must be configured according to "10.2 Configuration Example of the VoIP Service."
Networking
Figure 11-1 shows the example network of the VAG service.
NOTE
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
158
Figure 11-1 Example network of the VAG service
Router 10.10.10.1/24 H.248
MGC 10.10.20.1/24
0/11 0/12 P V M B P V M B A A 3 3 2 2
UA5000 10.10.10.2/24
Phone 1 Phone 32 VAG1
Phone 33 Phone 64 VAG2
Data Plan
l Table 11-1 provides the data plan for configuring the VAG 2 on the PVMB control board. For the data plan for configuring VAG 1, see "10.2 Configuration Example of the VoIP Service." In the preceding figure, MG 1 stands for VAG 1, and MG 2 stands for VAG 2.
Table 11-1 Data plan for configuring the VAG on PVMB Data Type MG interface data Item mgid code protocol transfer port Data 1 text H.248 UDP MG: 2944 MGC: 2944 domainname UA50001.com
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
159
Data Type
Item Whether the MG holds ongoing calls when the connection between MGC and MG is broken start-negotiate-version
Data Yes
2
IP addresses
Signaling IP address of MG interface 1 on the UA5000 Media IP address of MG interface 1 on the UA5000 Default gateway of MG interface 1 on the UA5000 MGC
10.10.10.3/24 10.10.10.5/24 10.10.10.1/24 10.10.20.1/24 MG interface: 1 Shelf ID/slot ID: 0/12 Telephone numbers: 12340033-12340064
Telephone numbers
Phone 33-phone 64
Context
Virtual Access Gateway (VAG) is a feature that enables a physical AG to support multiple VAGs. The physical AG supports multiple IP interfaces, and assigns the IP interfaces for dedicated use to realize the VAG feature.
Precaution
l l The MG interface parameters configured on the UA5000 must be the same as the parameters configured on the MGC. The cadence ring tone and initial ring tone must meet the local standard.
Procedure
l l For the procedure for configuring the data of VAG 1, see "10.2 Configuration Example of the VoIP Service." To configure the data of VAG 2, do as follows. 1. Add a service board.
huawei(config)#board add 0/12 a32 huawei(config)#board confirm 0/12 huawei(config)#display board 0 ------------------------------------------------------------------------SlotID BoardName Status Sub0 Sub1 Online/Offline
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
160

------------------------------------------------------------------------0 PWX2 Normal 1 PWX2 Normal 2 3 4 H601PVMB Standby_normal H602ETCA 5 H601PVMB Active_normal H602ETCA H602ETCM ...... 12 A32 Normal ...... 35 -------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.
Configure the attributes for the MG interface of VAG 2.

huawei(config)#interface h248 1 Are you sure to add MG interface?(y/n)[n]:y huawei(config-if-h248-1)#if-h248 attribute mgip 10.10.10.3 mgport 2944 code text transfer udp domainName UA50001.com mgcip_1 10.10.20.1 mgcport_1 2944 mg-media-ip 10.10.10.5 start-negotiate-version 2 huawei(config-if-h248-1)#display if-h248 attribute --------------------------------------------------------------------MGID 1 MG Description MG DomainName UA50001.com Protocol H248 H248version Negotiated Originally 2 Profile Negotiation Para disable Profile 0:NoProfile("") 2833Encrypt Codetype Transmode HeartBeatTimer(s) HeartBeatRetransTimes HeartBeatRetransTimer(s) MG signalling IP MG signalling Port MG media IP MIDType DeviceName Text UDP 60 3 60 10.10.10.3 2944 10.10.10.5 IP4_ADDR -
3. 4.
Configure the digitmap for internal calls on the MG interface.

huawei(config-if-h248-1)#digitmap set inner 1234xxxx
Enable the MG interface.

5.
Query whether the MG interface is in the normal state.

huawei(config-if-h248-1)#quit huawei(config)#display if-h248 all ------------------------------------------------------------------------MGID TransMode State MgPort MGIP/DomainName MgcPort MGCIP/DomainName ------------------------------------------------------------------------1 UDP Normal 2944 10.10.10.3 2944 10.10.20.1 -------------------------------------------------------------------------
6.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
Configure the telephone numbers of the subscribers.


huawei(config)#esl user huawei(config-esl-user)#mgpstnuser batadd 0/12/0 0/12/31 1 terminalid 32 telno 12340033 huawei(config-esl-user)#display mgpstnuser 0/12 -------------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port MGID TelNo Priority TID -------------------------------------------------------0 / 12 / 0 0 Cat3 A32 0 / 12 / 1 0 Cat3 A33 0 / 12 / 2 0 Cat3 A34 0 / 12 / 3 0 Cat3 A35 0 / 12 / 4 0 Cat3 A36 0 / 12 / 5 0 Cat3 A37 0 / 12 / 6 0 Cat3 A38 0 / 12 / 7 0 Cat3 A39 0 / 12 / 8 0 Cat3 A40 0 / 12 / 9 0 Cat3 A41 0 / 12 / 10 0 Cat3 A42 0 / 12 / 11 0 Cat3 A43 0 / 12 / 12 0 Cat3 A44 0 / 12 / 13 0 Cat3 A45 0 / 12 / 14 0 Cat3 A46 0 / 12 / 15 0 Cat3 A47 0 / 12 / 16 0 Cat3 A48 0 / 12 / 17 0 Cat3 A49 0 / 12 / 18 0 Cat3 A50 0 / 12 / 19 0 Cat3 A51 0 / 12 / 20 0 Cat3 A52 0 / 12 / 21 0 Cat3 A53 0 / 12 / 22 0 Cat3 A54 0 / 12 / 23 0 Cat3 A55 0 / 12 / 24 0 Cat3 A56 0 / 12 / 25 0 Cat3 A57 0 / 12 / 26 0 Cat3 A58 0 / 12 / 27 0 Cat3 A59 0 / 12 / 28 0 Cat3 A60 0 / 12 / 29 0 Cat3 A61 0 / 12 / 30 0 Cat3 A62 0 / 12 / 31 0 Cat3 A63 -------------------------------------------------------Command processing completed. 32 port(s) are configured MG PSTN user data
7.
Save the data.

----End
Result
1. 2. 3. 4. When MG interface 1 communicates properly with the MGC, subscribers of phone 1-phone 32 should be able to call each other. When MG interface 2 communicates properly with the MGC, subscribers of phone 33phone 64 should be able to call each other. When MG interfaces 1 and 2 communicate properly with the MGC, subscribers of phone 1-phone 64 should be able to call each other. After disabling MG interface 1 by running the shutdown graceful command, the results should be as follows: l Subscribers of phone 1-phone 32 should not be able to call each other. l Subscribers of phone 33-phone 64 should be able to call each other. l Subscribers of phone 1-phone 32 and phone 33-phone 64 should not be able to call each other.
This indicates that the configuration of each VAG is independent, and the configuration is valid only to the subscribers of the VAG.
11.3 Configuring the TID Profile of the VAG

This topic describes how to configure the mode of generating terminal IDs (TIDs) of users of all the types of the VAG, including the terminal prefix and TID profile. The TID profile defines the mode of generating the ID of the terminal except the terminal prefix. The ID of a user terminal is a combination of the terminal prefix and the character string generated by the TID profile.
Prerequisite
Context
l The system has 18 common TID profiles with the TID indexes of 0-17. When the default TID profiles in the system cannot meet the current requirement, you can add the userdefined TID profile manually as required. The TID profile format string should consist of at least one fixed format "%u" or one unfixed format "%0nu". "n" represents the numeral that ranges from 0 to 10. "%u" means that the length of the parameter to be printed is unlimited, and "%0nu" means that the length of the parameter to be printed is n. The format allows the security character string at the beginning and the end. The parameter list consists of at least one keyword. The keywords are separated by "," and support the addition algorithm. The deviation of addition ranges from 0 to 0x40000000. The keywords include the following: F: Indicates the shelf ID. S: Indicates the slot ID. P: Indicates the port ID. B: Indicates the B channel. G: Indicates the general permanent TID. R: Indicates the RTP virtual TID. l When a PSTN subscriber, an ISDN PRA subscriber or an ISDN BRA subscriber is added, the TID matching each type of the subscriber is output based on the format and the terminal prefix of the matching TID profile. For example, if the matching TID profile format of the PSTN subscriber is %02u/%02u/ %02u, the terminal prefix of the TID profile is aln, and the location of the PSTN subscriber is 0/11/0, the TID of the PSTN subscriber is aln00/11/00 . l You can run the display tid-format command to query the TID profile bound to users of all the types on the current MG interface, and then run the display tid-template command to query the format of the TID profile.
Precaution
l The format of the TID profile of the VAG and the format of the TID profile of the SoftSwitch must be consistent.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
l l l l
The index and name of the added profile must be different from the index and name of the existing profiles in the system. If terminals of a type exist on an interface and the interface is not disabled, the prefix of terminals of this type cannot be modified. If terminals of a type exist on an interface, the index of the TID profile corresponding to the terminals of this type cannot be modified. The system supports 64 TID profiles. The TID profiles with indexes from 0 to 31 are reserved for the system, and the TID profiles with indexes from 32 to 63 can be customized.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the display tid-template command to query the TID profile of the system. Step 2 When the default TID profile in the system cannot meet the requirements, run the tid-template add command to add the required TID profile. When the default TID profile in the system can meet the requirements, go to Step 3. Step 3 Enter MG interface mode. l l If the system protocol is H.248, run the interface h248 command to enter H248 mode. If the system protocol is MGCP, run the interface mgcp command to enter MGCP mode.
Step 4 Configure the TID profiles and terminal prefixes of subscribers of all the types of the current VAG. l In H248 mode, run the tid-format pstn command to configure the TID profile and terminal prefix of the PSTN subscriber. l In H248 mode, run the tid-format bra command to configure the TID profile and terminal prefix of the ISDN BRA subscriber. l In H248 mode, run the tid-format pracommand to configure the TID profile and terminal prefix of the ISDN PRA subscriber. l In H248 mode, run the tid-format rtp command to configure the TID profile and terminal prefix of the RTP terminal. l In H248 mode, run the tid-format r2 command to configure the TID profile and terminal prefix of the R2 subscriber. l In MGCP mode, run the tid-format pstn command to configure the TID profile and terminal prefix of the ISDN subscriber. l In MGCP mode, run the tid-format pra command to configure the TID profile and terminal prefix of the ISDN PRA subscriber. l In MGCP mode, run the tid-format bra command to configure the TID profile and terminal prefix of the ISDN BRA subscriber. ----End
Example
Assume the following: l l l
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
The index of the TID profile is 36. The length of the printing parameter is not limited. The parameter list is shelf ID + 1, slot ID +1, and port ID + 1.
l l
The name of the TID profile is CustomTemplate. The terminal prefix is A.
To configure the TID profile in H248 mode for PSTN subscriber on port 0/15/0, do as follows:
huawei(config)#display tid-template all --------------------------------------------------------Index Name --------------------------------------------------------0 Rtp_Delamination 1 Rtp_No_Delamination 2 General_No_Delamination 3 Aln_Not_Fixed_1 4 Aln_Fixed_1 5 Aln_Not_Fixed_0 6 Aln_Fixed_0 7 Aln_BT 8 Bra_Not_Fixed_1 9 Bra_Fixed_1 10 Bra_Not_Fixed_0 11 Bra_Fixed_0 12 Bra_BT 13 Trunk_Not_Fixed_1 14 Trunk_Fixed_1 15 Trunk_Not_Fixed_0 16 Trunk_Fixed_0 17 Trunk_BT 18 Rtp_Fixed_5u ------------------------------------------------huawei(config)#tid-template add 36 format %u/%u/%u parameterlist f+1,s+1,p+1 name CustomTemplate huawei(config)#interface h248 0 huawei(config-if-h248-0)#tid-format pstn template 36 prefix A huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display tid-format -------------------------------user-type template-index prefix -------------------------------rtp 1 A pstn 36 A bra 2 A pra 2 A r2 2 A -------------------------------huawei(config-if-h248-0)#quit huawei(config)#esl user huawei(config-esl-user)#mgpstnuser add 0/10/0 0 huawei(config-esl-user)#display mgpstnuser 0/10/0 -------------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port MGID TelNo Priority TID -------------------------------------------------------0 / 10 / 0 0 Cat3 A1/11/1 -------------------------------------------------------Command processing completed. 1 port(s) are configured MG PSTN user data
Related Operation
Table 11-2 lists the related operations for configuring the TID profile of the VAG interface. Table 11-2 Related operations for configuring the TID profile of the VAG interface To... Delete the user-defined TID profile
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
Run the Command... tid-template delete
Remarks -
165
To... Modify the user-defined TID profile Modify the prefix of the user terminal
Run the Command... tid-template_modify H248: tid-format MGCP: tid-format
Remarks Run this command to modify the terminal prefix of the user terminal. If terminals of a certain type exist on an interface and the interface is not disabled, the prefix of terminals of this type cannot be modified.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
166
12 Configuring the ISDN Service
12
About This Chapter
Configuring the ISDN Service
Configuring the ISDN service includes the application of the ISDN technology and the related process for configuring the ISDN service of the UA5000. 12.1 Introduction to the ISDN Service The integrated services digital network (ISDN) is a digital communication network developed by integrating the digital network and the data communication network. The ISDN is the digitized stage of the telephone network, which permits voice, data, text, graphics, music, and video to be transmitted over existing telephone wires. 12.2 Configuration Example of the P2P ISDN BRA Service This topic describes how to configure the point-to-point (P2P) ISDN BRA service through the DSL service board. Thus, after the configuration, ISDN BRA subscribers can call each other, and ISDN BRA subscribers and POTS subscribers can call each other. 12.3 Configuration Example of the P2MP ISDN BRA Service This topic describes how to configure the point-to-multipoint (P2MP) ISDN BRA service through the DSL service board. After the configuration, ISDN BRA subscribers can call each other, and ISDN BRA subscribers and POTS subscribers can call each other. 12.4 Configuration Example of the ISDN PRA Service (When the EDTB Service Board Is Used) This topic describes how to configure the ISDN PRA service through the EDTB service board. After the configuration, ISDN PRA subscribers can call each other, and ISDN PRA subscribers and POTS subscribers can call each other. 12.5 Configuring the SIGTRAN Protocol Stack The signaling transport (SIGTRAN) protocol supports the transmission of traditional switched circuit network (SCN) signaling over the IP network through protocol adaptation and transmission.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
167
12.1 Introduction to the ISDN Service

The integrated services digital network (ISDN) is a digital communication network developed by integrating the digital network and the data communication network. The ISDN is the digitized stage of the telephone network, which permits voice, data, text, graphics, music, and video to be transmitted over existing telephone wires.
Service Description
Definition of ISDN by the International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee (CCITT): Integrated services digital network (ISDN) is a communication network evolved from integrated digital network (IDN) and provides the E2E digital connection to support multiple telecommunication services involving the voice and non-voice services. Subscribers can access the network through a group of network interfaces. ISDN provides the following two types of services: l l Basic rate interface (BRI): It provides a rate of 144 kbit/s, and provides two B channels and one D channel. Primary rate interface (PRI): In North America, it provides a rate of 1.544 Mbit/s, and provides 23 B channels and one D channel. In other areas, it provides a rate of 2 Mbit/s, and provides 30 B channels and one D channel.
The B channels are used for bearing the service and the D channel is used for transmitting the call control signaling and the operation, administration and maintenance (OAM) signaling.
The UA5000 provides the ISDN BRA service to the subscribers through the DSL, DSLE/ DSLD board, and provides the ISDN PRA service to the subscribers through the PVMB, PVMD, SDLE, or EDTB board. Table 12-1 shows the number of ISDN BRA ports provided by each board. Table 12-1 Number of ISDN BRA ports provided by each board Board DSL DSLD Ports 8 ISDN BRA ports 16 ISDN BRA ports
Table 12-2 shows the number of ISDN PRA ports provided by each board. Table 12-2 Number of ISDN PRA ports provided by each board Board PVMB PVMD
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
Ports 4 E1 ports, namely, 4 ISDN PRA ports 4 E1 ports, namely, 4 ISDN PRA ports
Board EDTB SDLE
Ports 16 E1 ports, namely, 16 ISDN PRA ports 8 E1 ports, namely, 8 ISDN PRA ports
12.2 Configuration Example of the P2P ISDN BRA Service

This topic describes how to configure the point-to-point (P2P) ISDN BRA service through the DSL service board. Thus, after the configuration, ISDN BRA subscribers can call each other, and ISDN BRA subscribers and POTS subscribers can call each other.
Prerequisite
l l The local IP address must be configured in the IP address pool. The system parameters and the MG interface attributes must be configured successfully. The PSTN subscriber data on the MG interface must be configured successfully and the PSTN subscribers must be able to call each other. For the operation procedure, see "10 Configuring the VoIP Service." The data on the MGC must be configured properly.
Networking
Figure 12-1 shows the example network of the P2P ISDN BRA service.
NOTE
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
169
Figure 12-1 Example network of the P2P ISDN BRA service
Router 10.10.10.1/24 H.248
MGC 10.10.20.1/24
0/8 UA5000 10.10.10.2/24 I P M B I P M B P V M B P V M B D S L
0/11 D S L A 3 2
PBX
PBX
ISDN phone A ISDN phone B
Phone A
Data Plan
Table 12-3 provides the data plan for configuring the P2P ISDN BRA service. Table 12-3 Data plan for configuring the P2P ISDN BRA service Data Type MG interface data Item mgid code protocol port Data 0 text H.248 MG: 2944 MGC: 2944 domainname Whether the termination ID on the MG interface supports the layer configuration terminalID UA5000.com Not supported
0, 2
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
170
Data Type IP addresses
Item The IP address of MG 0 on the UA5000 Default gateway of MG 0 on the UA5000 The IP address of the MGC
Data 10.10.10.2/24 10.10.10.1/24 10.10.20.1/2 15 1 1401 1400 8 0/8, 0/11 0/8/0, 0/11/0 P2P
IUA link parameters
IUA link number IUA link set number Local port number Peer port number IUA interface ID
DSL boards ISDN BRA ports
Shelf ID/slot ID Shelf ID/slot ID/port ID Working mode
Context
l l l One port can be connected to only one terminal. The terminal equipment identifiers (TEIs) of the ISDN digital phones must be 0. If the ISDN digital telephone is not provided with local power, the braport attribute batset frameid/slotid/portid endframeid/slotid/portid rpower yes and braport attribute set frameid/slotid/portid rpower yes commands must be executed on the UA5000 to enable the remote power. The MG interface parameters configured on the UA5000 must be the same as the MG interface parameters configured on the MGC.
Figure 12-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the ISDN service.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
171
Figure 12-2 Flowchart for configuring the ISDN service

Start
Add service boards
Configure the working mode of ISDN BRA port Configure an IUA link set and an IUA link (Optional) Configure SCTP parameters Configure ISDN subscriber data Save the configuration data Configure the SIGTRAN protocol
End
Procedure
Step 1 Add a DSL board.
huawei(config)#board add 0/8 dsl huawei(config)#board add 0/11 dsl huawei(config)#board confirm 0/8 0 frame 8 slot board has been confirmed huawei(config)#board confirm 0/11 0 frame 11 slot board has been confirmed
Step 2 (Optional) Query the attributes of the ISDN BRA ports.

huawei(config)#esl user huawei(config-esl-user)#display braport attribute 0/8 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------F /S /P Remote-power Work-mode BAD BADDelay(s) Keep_L1_Active -----------------------------------------------------------------------------0/8/0 No p2mp disable 30 enable 0/8/1 No p2mp disable 30 enable 0/8/2 No p2mp disable 30 enable 0/8/3 No p2mp disable 30 enable 0/8/4 No p2mp disable 30 enable 0/8/5 No p2mp disable 30 enable 0/8/6 No p2mp disable 30 enable 0/8/7 No p2mp disable 30 enable ----------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-esl-user)#display braport attribute 0/11 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
172
F /S /P Remote-power Work-mode Bad BADDelay(s) Keep_L1_Active ----------------------------------------------------------------------------0/11/0 No p2mp disable 30 enable 0/11/1 No p2mp disable 30 enable 0/11/2 No p2mp disable 30 enable 0/11/3 No p2mp disable 30 enable 0/11/4 No p2mp disable 30 enable 0/11/5 No p2mp disable 30 enable 0/11/6 No p2mp disable 30 enable 0/11/7 No p2mp disable 30 enable --------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Step 3 Configure the working modes of the ports.

huawei(config-esl-user)#braport attribute set 0/8/0 work-mode p2p The board(s) may be reset before the configuration works , are you sure to reset the board(s) when executing this command?(y/n)[n]:y huawei(config-esl-user)#braport attribute set 0/11/0 work-mode p2p The board(s) may be reset before the configuration works , are you sure to reset the board(s) when executing this command?(y/n)[n]:y
Step 4 Add a link set and a link, query the configuration information of the link set and the link.
huawei(config-esl-user)#quit huawei(config)#sigtran huawei(config-sigtran)#iua-linkset add 1 huawei(config-sigtran)#iua-link add 15 1 1401 10.10.10.2 1400 10.10.20.1 huawei(config-sigtran)#display iua-link attribute ---------------------------------------------------------------------LinkNo : 15 LinksetNo : 1 Local prot : 1401 Local IP address : 10.10.10.2 Remote port : 1400 Remote IP address 1 : 10.10.20.1 Remote IP address 2 : InStreamNum : 33 OutStreamNum : 33 ---------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-sigtran)#display iua-link state ------------------------------------------------------------------------LinkNo LinkState LockFlag CongestFlag ListenId SctpAssocId ------------------------------------------------------------------------15 active unlock uncongest 1 3 -------------------------------------------------------------------------
Step 5 Add an ISDN BRA subscriber and configure the data.

huawei(config-sigtran)#quit huawei(config)#esl user huawei(config-esl-user)#mgbrauser add 0/8/0 0 1 8 terminalid 0 huawei(config-esl-user)#mgbrauser add 0/11/0 0 1 10 terminalid 2 huawei(config-esl-user)#display mgbrauser 0/8/0 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------F /S /P MGID LinkSetNo UserIFID R.POWER TelNo Priority TID -----------------------------------------------------------------------------0/ 8/ 0 0 1 8 No Cat3 A0 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-esl-user)#display mgbrauser 0/11/0 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------F /S /P MGID LinkSetNo UserIFID R.POWER TelNo Priority TID -----------------------------------------------------------------------------0/ 11/ 0 0 1 8 No Cat3 A2 ------------------------------------------------------------------------------

----End
Result
1. The ISDN BRA ports should be in the active state.
huawei(config-esl-user)#display port state 0/8/0 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------F/ S/ P Type SubType PortState SvcState SvcType UserType MgID ProtocolID -----------------------------------------------------------------------------0/ 8/0 BRA 2B+D Active AutoBlk InstSvc MG 0 A0 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-esl-user)#display port state 0/11/0 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------F/ S/ P Type SubType PortState SvcState SvcType UserType MgID ProtocolID -----------------------------------------------------------------------------0/ 11/0 BRA 2B+D Active AutoBlk InstSvc MG 0 A2 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.
The working mode of the ISDN BRA ports should be P2P.

huawei(config-esl-user)#display braport attribute 0/8/0 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------F /S /P Remote-power Work-mode Bad BADDelay(s) Keep_L1_Active ----------------------------------------------------------------------------0/ 8/0 No p2p disable 30 enable ----------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-esl-user)#display braport attribute 0/11/0 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------F /S /P Remote-power Work-mode Bad BADDelay(s) Keep_L1_Active ----------------------------------------------------------------------------0/11/0 No p2p disable 30 enable -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
3.
P2P ISDN BRA subscribers ISDN phone A and ISDN phone B should be able to call each other. P2P ISDN BRA subscribers and POTS subscriber Phone A should be able to call each other. The status of the ports with the P2P ISDN BRA service should always be in the active state.
12.3 Configuration Example of the P2MP ISDN BRA Service

This topic describes how to configure the point-to-multipoint (P2MP) ISDN BRA service through the DSL service board. After the configuration, ISDN BRA subscribers can call each other, and ISDN BRA subscribers and POTS subscribers can call each other.
Prerequisite
l l The local IP address must be configured in the IP address pool. The system parameters and the MG interface attributes must be configured successfully. The PSTN subscriber data on the MG interface must be configured successfully and the PSTN subscribers must be able to call each other. For the operation procedure, see "10 Configuring the VoIP Service." One NT1 with power supply and two ISDN digital phones must be available. In addition, the ISDN digital phones must be connected properly.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
The data on the MGC must be configured properly.
Networking
Figure 12-3 shows the example network of the P2MP ISDN BRA service.
NOTE
Figure 12-3 Example network of the P2MP ISDN BRA service
Router 10.10.10.1/24 H.248
MGC 10.10.20.1/24
0/15 UA5000 10.10.10.2/24 I P M B I P M B P V M B P V M B A 3 2 D S L
NT1
Phone A
ISDN phone
ISDN phone
Data Plan
Table 12-4 provides the data plan for configuring the P2MP ISDN BRA service. Table 12-4 Data plan for configuring the P2MP ISDN BRA service Data Type MG interface data Item mgid code protocol
Data 0 text H.248

175
Data Type
Item port
Data MG: 2944 MGC: 2944
domainname terminalID IP addresses MG interface 0 on the UA5000 Default gateway of MG interface 0 on the UA5000 The IP address of the MGC IUA link parameters IUA link set number IUA link number Local port number Peer port number ISDN BRA Port port ID interfaceid
UA5000.com 0, 1 10.10.10.2/24 10.10.10.1/24 10.10.20.1/24 1 15 9900 1400 0/15/0, 0/15/1 8
Context
The MG interface parameters configured on the UA5000 must be the same as the MG interface parameters configured on the MGC.
Figure 12-4 shows the flowchart for configuring the ISDN service.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
176
Figure 12-4 Flowchart for configuring the ISDN service

Start
Add a DSL board
configure the working mode of ISDN BRA port Configure an IUA link set and an IUA link (Optional) Configure SCTP parameters Add an ISDN BRA subscriber and configure the data Save the configuration data Configure the SIGTRAN protocol
End
Procedure
Step 1 Add a DSL board.
huawei(config)#board add 0/15 dsl huawei(config)#board confirm 0/15 0 frame 15 slot board confirms successfully huawei(config)#display board 0 -------------------------------------------------------SlotID BoardName Status Sub0 Sub1 Online/Offline -------------------------------------------------------0 H602PWX0 Normal 1 H602PWX0 Normal 2 3 4 H601PVMB Active_normal H601ETCB H601ETCB 5 H601PVMB Standby_normal H601ETCB H601ETCB ...... 15 DSL Normal ...... 35 --------------------------------------------------------
Step 2 Add an IUA link set and an IUA link.

huawei(config)#sigtran huawei(config-sigtran)#iua-linkset add 1 huawei(config-sigtran)#iua-link add 15 1 9900 10.10.10.2 1400 10.10.20.1 huawei(config-sigtran)#display iua-link attribute
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
177
---------------------------------------------------------------------LinkNo : 15 LinksetNo : 1 Local prot : 9900 Local IP address : 10.10.10.2 Remote port : 1400 Remote IP address 1 : 10.10.20.1 Remote IP address 2 : InStreamNum : 33 OutStreamNum : 33 ---------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-sigtran)#display iua-link state -------------------------------------------------------------LinkNo LinkState LockFlag CongestFlag ListenId SctpAssocId -------------------------------------------------------------15 active unlock uncongest 1 3 --------------------------------------------------------------
Step 3 Add an ISDN BRA subscriber and configure the data.

huawei(config-sigtran)#quit huawei(config)#esl user huawei(config-esl-user)#mgbrauser batadd 0/15/0 0/15/1 0 1 8 terminalid 0 huawei(config-esl-user)#display port state 0/15 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------F/ S/ P Type SubType PortState SvcState SvcType UserType MgID ProtocolID -----------------------------------------------------------------------------0/15/0 BRA 2B+D Deactive StartSvc InstSvc MG 0 A0 0/15/1 BRA 2B+D Deactive StartSvc InstSvc MG 0 A2 huawei(config-esl-user)#display mgbrauser 0/15 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------F /S /P MGID LinkSetNo UserIFID R.POWER TelNo Priority TID ----------------------------------------------------------------------------0/15/ 0 0 1 8 No Cat3 A0 0/15/ 1 0 1 9 No Cat3 A2 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-esl-user)#display braport attribute 0/15 Command: display braport attribute 0/15 -------------------------------------------------------------------------F /S /P Remote-power Work-mode BAD BADDelay(s) Keep-L1-active -------------------------------------------------------------------------0/15/0 No p2mp disable 30 enable 0/15/1 No p2mp disable 30 enable 0/15/2 No p2mp disable 30 enable 0/15/3 No p2mp disable 30 enable 0/15/4 No p2mp disable 30 enable 0/15/5 No p2mp disable 30 enable 0/15/6 No p2mp disable 30 enable 0/15/7 No p2mp disable 30 enable ----------------------------------------------------------------------------

----End
Result
ISDN BRA subscribers should be able to call each other, and ISDN BRA subscribers and POTS subscriber Phone A should be able to call each other.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
178
12.4 Configuration Example of the ISDN PRA Service (When the EDTB Service Board Is Used)
This topic describes how to configure the ISDN PRA service through the EDTB service board. After the configuration, ISDN PRA subscribers can call each other, and ISDN PRA subscribers and POTS subscribers can call each other.
Prerequisite
l The system parameters, the MG interface attributes, and the PSTN subscribers must be configured successfully. For the operation procedure, see "10 Configuring the VoIP Service." The data on the MGC must be configured properly. Several PBX subscribers must be configured.
l l
Context
The MG interface parameters configured on the UA5000 must be the same as the parameters configured on the MGC.
Networking
Figure 12-5 shows the example network of the ISDN PRA service.
NOTE
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
179
Figure 12-5 Example network of the ISDN PRA service

MGC 10.10.20.1/24
Router 10.10.10.1/24 FE/GE I I P P P P V V M M M M B B B B 0/13 E D T B
Router
UA5000 10.10.10.2/24
UA5000
PBX
Phone A
Phone N
Phone N+1
Data Plan
Table 12-5 provides the data plan for configuring the ISDN PRA service. Table 12-5 Data plan for configuring the ISDN PRA service Data Type MG interface data Item mgid code protocol port Data 0 text H.248 MG: 2945 MGC: 2944 domainname terminalid IP addresses MG interface 0 on the UA5000 UA5000.com 0, 1 10.10.10.2/24
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
180
Data Type
Item Default gateway of the MG interface 0 on the UA5000 The IP address of the MGC
Data 10.10.10.1/24 10.10.20.1/2 2 1 1402 1404
IUA link parameters
IUA link set number IUA link number Local port number Peer port number
Figure 12-6 shows the flowchart for configuring the ISDN PRA service. Figure 12-6 Flowchart for configuring the ISDN PRA service
Start
Add an EDTB board
Set the working mode of the EDTB board Add a link set and a link (Optional) Configure SCTP parameters Add an ISDN PRA subscriber and configure the data Save the configuration data Configure the SIGTRAN protocol
End
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
181
Procedure
Step 1 Add an EDTB board.
huawei(config)#board add 0/13 h601edtb 0 frame 13 slot board add successfully huawei(config)#board confirm 0/13 0 frame 13 slot board confirms successfully huawei(config)#display board 0 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------SlotID BoardName Status Sub0 Sub1 Online/Offline ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------0 H602PWX0 Normal 1 H602PWX0 Normal 2 3 4 H601PVMB Active_normal H601ETCB H601ETCB 5 H601PVMB Standby_normal H601ETCB H601ETCB ...... 13 H601EDTB Normal ...... 35 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Step 2 Set the working mode of the EDTB board.

huawei(config)#interface edt 0/13 huawei(config-if-edt-0/13)#runmode indep huawei(config-if-edt-0/13)#quit
Step 3 Add a link set and a link.

huawei(config)#sigtran huawei(config-sigtran)#iua-linkset add 2 huawei(config-sigtran)#iua-link add 1 2 1402 10.10.10.2 1404 10.10.20.1 huawei(config-sigtran)#display iua-link attribute -----------------------------------------------------------------LinkNo : 1 LinksetNo : 2 Local port : 1402 Local IP address : 10.10.10.2 Remote port : 1404 Remote IP address 1 : 10.10.20.1 Remote IP address 2 : InStreamNum : 33 OutStreamNum : 33 -----------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-sigtran)#display iua-link state ----------------------------------------------------------------LinkNo LinkState LockFlag CongestFlag ListenId SctpAssocId ----------------------------------------------------------------1 active unlock uncongest 3 9 -----------------------------------------------------------------
Step 4 Add an ISDN PRA subscriber and configure the data.

huawei(config-sigtran)#quit huawei(config)#esl user huawei(config-esl-user)#mgprauser add 0/13/0 0 2 10 terminalid 0 huawei(config-esl-user)#display port state 0/13/0 -------------------------------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port PortType PortState ServiceType SvcState -------------------------------------------------------------------------0 / 13 / 0 E1 Failed VOIP_PRA -------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-esl-user)#display mgprauser 0/13 ---------------------------------------------------------MGID 0 F/S/P 0/13/0 TerminalID A0 LinkSetNo 2
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
182
InterfaceID 10 Uni-report 1(0-enable 1-disable) Auto-return-to-service-limit 20 Active-mask 255:255:255:255 User Priority is cat3 ---------------------------------------------------------Command processing completed. 1 port(s) are configured MG PRA user data

----End
Result
ISDN PRA subscribers should be able to call subscribers who do not belong to the same PBX, and subscribers who belong to one PBX should be able to call each other.
12.5 Configuring the SIGTRAN Protocol Stack

The signaling transport (SIGTRAN) protocol supports the transmission of traditional switched circuit network (SCN) signaling over the IP network through protocol adaptation and transmission. l l l The SIGTRAN protocol, which is applied to the ISDN services of the UA5000, contains the MAC, IP, SCTP and IUA protocols. Generally, you need not configure the SCTP protocol parameters. Parameters localipaddr, remoteipaddr, localport, and remoteport are used to set up an IUA link between the UA5000 and the MGC. localport on the UA5000 must be the same as remoteport on the MGC. remoteport on the UA5000 must be the same as localport on the MGC.
Related Concept
l SIGTRAN protocol stack: The SIGTRAN protocol stack includes two layers of protocols: transmission and adaptation. The transmission protocol is SCTP/IP and the adaptation protocol can be M2UA (for MTP2 subscribers) or IUA (for Q. 921 subscribers). Figure 12-7 shows the model of the SIGTRAN protocol.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
183
Figure 12-7 Model of the SIGTRAN protocol

M3UA layer M2UA layer IUA layer M2PA layer SCTP IP MAC M3UA: MTP3 User Adaptation Layer M2PA: MTP2 Peer Adaptation Layer M2UA: MTP2 User Adaptation Layer V5UA: V5 User Adaptation Layer IP: Internet Protocol IUA: ISDN Q. 921 User Adaptation Layer MAC: Media Access Control V5UA layer SUA layer
adaptation adaptation adaptation adaptation adaptation adaptation
......
SCTP: Stream Control Transmission Protocol SUA: SCCP User Adaptation Layer
SCTP: The SCTP protocol is a connection-oriented protocol. The basic function of SCTP is to provide reliable transmission for the messages between the UA5000 and the MGC. SCTP functions based on the association between the two terminals of SCTP. SCTP can be regarded as a transmission layer whose upper layer is the SCTP subscriber and the lower layer is the IP network.
Figure 12-8 shows the flowchart for configuring the SIGTRAN protocol stack. Figure 12-8 Flowchart for configuring the SIGTRAN protocol stack
Start
Configure an IUA link set
Configure an IUA link
(Optional) Configure SCTP parameters
End
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
184
Procedure
Step 1 In global config mode, run the sigtran command to enter the sigtran mode. Step 2 Run the iua-linkset add command to add an IUA link set. Step 3 Run the display iua-linkset state command to query the state of the IUA link set. Run the display iua-linkset attribute command to query the attributes of the IUA link set. Step 4 Run the iua-link add command to add an IUA link to the IUA link set. Step 5 Run the display iua-link state command to query the state of the IUA link. Run the display iua-link attribute command to query the attributes of the IUA link. Step 6 (Optional) Run the sctp protocol command to configure the parameters of the SCTP protocol. Step 7 (Optional) Run the display sctp protocol command to query the parameters of the SCTP protocol. ----End
Example
To configure the SIGTRAN protocol stack, do as follows:
huawei(config)#sigtran huawei(config-sigtran)#iua-linkset add 8 mgid 0 huawei(config-sigtran)#display iua-linkset state ----------------------------------------LinksetNo LinkNum LinksetState ----------------------------------------8 0 down ----------------------------------------huawei(config-sigtran)#display iua-linkset attribute ---------------------------------------------------------------------------LinksetNo MgId Pendingtime TrafficMode Client/Server UseTxtIf ---------------------------------------------------------------------------8 0 4 override server integer ---------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-sigtran)#iua-link add 1 8 1401 10.10.1.1 1400 10.10.2.1
NOTE
l In the SIGTRAN protocol, localipaddr, localport, remoteipaddr, and remoteport can uniquely identify an SCTP association. l A UA5000 can be configured with a maximum of eight links and eight link sets.
huawei(config-sigtran)#display iua-link state -------------------------------------------------------LinkNo LinkState LockFlag CongestFlag ListenId SctpAssocId -------------------------------------------------------1 active unlock uncongest 4 6 -------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-sigtran)#display iua-link attribute 1 ---------------------------------------------------------------------LinkNo : 1 LinksetNo : 8 Local port : 1401 Local IP address : 10.10.1.1 Remote port : 1400 Remote IP address 1 : 10.10.2.1 Remote IP address 2 : InStreamNum : 33
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
185
OutStreamNum : 33 ----------------------------------------------------------------------
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
186
13 Configuring the FoIP Service
13
About This Chapter
Configuring the FoIP Service
Configuring the FoIP service includes the application of the FoIP technology and the related process for configuring the FoIP service of the UA5000. 13.1 Introduction to the FoIP Service Fax over Internet Protocol (FoIP) is a method of providing the fax service over the IP network or between the IP network and the traditional PSTN network. 13.2 Configuring the V2 Transparent Transmission Flow In the V2 transparent transmission flow, the voice port functions as the fax port, and the fax signals are encoded in the G.711 encoding mode, in which the voice signals are encoded. 13.3 Configuring the Selfswitch Transparent Transmission Flow In the selfswitch transparent transmission flow, the UA5000 determines whether to add 2 to the voice port number to set the fax port. 13.4 Configuring the V2 T.38 Flow When the V2 T.38 flow is used, the UA5000 must determine whether to add 2 to the voice port ID to set the fax port based on the requirement of the MGC. The fax settings for the receiver should be the same as the fax settings for the sender. 13.5 Configuring the Selfswitch T.38 Flow When the selfswitch T.38 flow is used, the UA5000 need not be controlled by the MGC for the fax service. 13.6 Configuring the V3 Flow In the V3 flow, you can use either the transparent transmission mode or the T.38 mode on the UA5000, which is determined by the mode configured on the MGC. If the MGC uses the T.38 mode, the fax port ID can be negotiated. 13.7 Configuring the V5 Flow The V5 flow is compatible with the V2 flow and the V3 flow. When the peer fax machine uses the V2 or V3 flow, the local fax machine that uses the V5 flow can communicate with the peer fax machine properly. 13.8 Configuring the High-Speed Fax
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
187
If the network communication is of a high quality and the fax machines support the high-speed fax service, you can configure a high-speed fax mode to transmit the signals. In the high-speed mode, the signals are transmitted in the modem mode. 13.9 Configuring the High-Low Speed Selfswitch Fax If the network communication is of a high quality and the fax machines support the high-speed fax service, the data can be transmitted in the high-speed fax mode. In the high-speed fax mode, the signals are transmitted in the modem mode. When the quality of the network communication deteriorates, and the high-speed negotiation fails, the UA5000 automatically switches to the low speed fax mode. In the low-speed fax mode, the signals are transmitted in the fax mode. 13.10 Configuring the Fax Transmission Parameters The fax transmission parameters for the MG include the transmission mode, 10 ms packetization function, and RFC 2198 intelligent start function. You can configure the fax transmission parameters according to the actual application environment to ensure the quality of the fax service. 13.11 Configuring the Fax Training Parameters Configuring the fax training parameters includes configuring the fax training mode and the maximum rate of fax training. The fax training mode takes effect only in the T.38 flow. The maximum rate of fax training takes effect only in the T.38 local training flow.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
188
13.1 Introduction to the FoIP Service

Fax over Internet Protocol (FoIP) is a method of providing the fax service over the IP network or between the IP network and the traditional PSTN network.
Service Description
The fax service is widely used in the PSTN. The fax machine in the POTS service is supported in the NGN network, that is the FoIP. The FoIP is a type of service that provides the transmission of FoIP over the IP network or between the IP network and the PSTN network.
l The UA5000 provides the fax service and the voice service through the voice service boards. Table 13-1 shows the number of ports provided by each type of service boards. Table 13-1 Number of ports provided by each voice service boards Board Type ASL A32 CSRB Number of Ports 16 32 32 Description 16-port POTS service board 32-port POTS service board 32-port POTS and ADSL/ ADSL2+ combo service board
Table 13-2 shows the fax flows supported by the UA5000. Table 13-2 Fax flow list Fax Flow Transparent transmission fax flow V2 transparent transmission flow Selfswitch transparent transmission flow V3 flow V5 flow T.38 fax flow V2 T.38 flow Selfswitch T.38 flow V3 flow V5 flow The T.38 flow does not support high-speed fax or high-low speed selfswitch fax. Remarks The transparent transmission flow supports high-low speed selfswitch fax.
The following part describes each fax flow mode and the principles of using each fax flow mode:
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
According to whether the MGC is involved, the fax mode can be V2 fax or selfswitch fax. According to the coding mode, the fax mode can be transparent transmission fax (G.711 coding) or T.38 fax (T.38 coding). If the SoftSwitch does not support the fax service and the UA5000 functions as the transmit and receive gateway, either the selfswitch transparent transmission mode or the selfswitch T.38 mode can be used. To enhance the intelligence of the fax service (the support from the SoftSwitch and the peer gateway is required), use the V3 flow. If the SoftSwitch supports the V5 flow, but the peer gateway supports only the V2 flow, V3 flow, or V5 flow, use the V5 flow. In the V3 T.38 or V5 T.38 flow, the fax mode is controlled by the MGC. For example, if the flow on the UA5000 is V3, and the flow on the MGC is V3 T.38, the UA5000 uses the V3 T.38 flow. The transparent transmission flow and the T.38 flow support low-speed fax. In the lowspeed fax, data is transmitted in the fax mode. The transparent transmission flow supports high-speed fax and high-low speed selfswitch fax. In the high-speed fax, data is transmitted in the modem mode.
13.2 Configuring the V2 Transparent Transmission Flow

In the V2 transparent transmission flow, the voice port functions as the fax port, and the fax signals are encoded in the G.711 encoding mode, in which the voice signals are encoded.
Prerequisite
l l The data on the MGC must be accurate. The FoIP service is implemented based on the voice service. Before you configure the FoIP service, the voice service data must be configured properly and the subscribers must be able to call each other successfully. For the configuration of the voice service, see "10 Configuring the VoIP Service."
Context
The fax mode for the UA5000 and the MGC must be the transparent transmission mode.
Figure 13-1 shows the flowchart for configuring the V2 transparent transmission flow.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
190
Figure 13-1 Flowchart for configuring the V2 transparent transmission flow

Start
Set the fax transmission mode
Query the fax transmission mode
(Optional) Set the fax training mode
(Optional) Query the fax training mode
End
Procedure
Step 1 Run the fax parameters tranmode command to set the fax transmission mode as the transparent transmission mode.
NOTE
You can select not to set the fax training mode in the V2 transparent transmission flow. If you need to set the fax training mode, set the same mode on the MG and on the MGC.
Step 2 Run the display fax parameters command to query the fax parameters. Step 3 (Optional) Run the dsp attribute train-mode command to set the fax training mode. Step 4 (Optional) Run the display dsp attribute command to query the dsp channel mode. ----End
Example
To configure the V2 transparent transmission flow on the UA5000, do as follows:
huawei(config)#fax parameters tranmode 0 huawei(config)#display fax parameters ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Fax transfers mode :V2 thoroughly T38 Fax Port :RTP port Fix the package interval as 10ms :disable RFC2198 intelligent startup :enable ----------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config)#dsp attribute train-mode 0
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
191
huawei(config)#display dsp attribute ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Fax Max Train Rate :V17 Fax Train Mode :Remote Train DSP chip maximum adaptive JitterBuffer(ms) :135 DSP chip minimum adaptive JitterBuffer(ms) :2 DSP chip initial adaptive JitterBuffer(ms) :2 DSP chip maximum fixed JitterBuffer(ms) :135 DSP chip minimum fixed JitterBuffer(ms) :2 DSP chip nominal fixed JitterBuffer(ms) :60 DSP input gain(PCM->IP)(db) :0 DSP output gain(IP->PCM)(db) :0 DSP code type :G711A RTCP package send interval time(ms) :5000 Severe Degrade Threshold(periods) :400 Support VQM :Disable DSP Rtp Packet Interval(ms) :20 DSP echo check :Open DSP silence reduce :Close DSP need statistics or not :No DSP Packet Lose Compensate :Close DSP clearmode payload value :100 Support RTCP XR :Disable -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
13.3 Configuring the Selfswitch Transparent Transmission Flow

In the selfswitch transparent transmission flow, the UA5000 determines whether to add 2 to the voice port number to set the fax port.
Prerequisite
l l The data on the MGC must be accurate. The FoIP service is implemented based on the voice service. Hence, before the FoIP service is configured, the voice service data must be configured properly and the subscribers must be able to call each other successfully. For the configuration of the voice service, see "10 Configuring the VoIP Service."
Context
l l The fax transmission mode must be configured only on the UA5000. To ensure that the fax service is implemented, the fax training modes on the two UA5000s must be the same, that is, the mode must be either the end-to-end training mode or the local training mode. The end-to-end training mode is recommended.
Figure 13-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the selfswitch transparent transmission.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
192
Figure 13-2 Flowchart for configuring the selfswitch transparent transmission

Start
End
Procedure
Step 1 Run the fax parameters tranmode command to set the fax transmission mode as the transparent transmission mode. Step 2 Run the display fax parameters command to query the fax parameters. Step 3 (Optional) Run the dsp attribute train-mode command to set the fax training mode. Step 4 (Optional) Run the display dsp attribute command to query the DSP channel mode. ----End
Example
To configure the V2 transparent transmission flow on the UA5000, do as follows:
huawei(config)#fax parameters tranmode 3 huawei(config)#display fax parameters ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Fax transfers mode :Self switch thoroughly T38 Fax Port :RTP port Fix the package interval as 10ms :disable RFC2198 intelligent startup :disable ----------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config)#dsp attribute train-mode 0 huawei(config)#display dsp attribute ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Fax Max Train Rate :V17 Fax Train Mode :Remote Train DSP chip maximum adaptive JitterBuffer(ms) :135
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
193
DSP chip minimum adaptive JitterBuffer(ms) :2 DSP chip initial adaptive JitterBuffer(ms) :2 DSP chip maximum fixed JitterBuffer(ms) :135 DSP chip minimum fixed JitterBuffer(ms) :2 DSP chip nominal fixed JitterBuffer(ms) :60 DSP input gain(PCM->IP)(db) :0 DSP output gain(IP->PCM)(db) :0 DSP code type :G711A RTCP package send interval time(ms) :5000 Severe Degrade Threshold(periods) :400 Support VQM :Disable DSP Rtp Packet Interval(ms) :20 DSP echo check :Open DSP silence reduce :Close DSP need statistics or not :No DSP Packet Lose Compensate :Close DSP clearmode payload value :100 Support RTCP XR :Disable -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
13.4 Configuring the V2 T.38 Flow

When the V2 T.38 flow is used, the UA5000 must determine whether to add 2 to the voice port ID to set the fax port based on the requirement of the MGC. The fax settings for the receiver should be the same as the fax settings for the sender.
Prerequisite
Context
l If the fax machines are connected to the same MG, the T.38 fax port ID can be configured at random. If they are connected to different MGs, the configurations of adding 2 to the fax port ID must be the same. That is, 2 is added to both or none of the fax port IDs. To ensure that the fax service is implemented successfully, the fax training modes at both ends of the MG must be the same, that is, the mode must be either the end-to-end training mode or the local training mode. The end-to-end training mode is recommended.
Figure 13-3 shows the flowchart for configuring the V2 T.38 fax service.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
194
Figure 13-3 Flowchart for configuring the V2 T.38 fax service

Start
Set the T.38 fax port
(Optional) Query the attributes of the DSP channel
End
Procedure
Step 1 Run the fax parameters tranmode command to set the V2 T.38 mode as the fax transmission mode. Step 2 Run the fax parameters is-port+2 command to set the T.38 fax port. Step 3 Run the display fax parameters command to query the fax parameters. Step 4 (Optional) Run the dsp attribute train-mode command to set the fax training mode. Step 5 (Optional) Run the display dsp attribute command to query the attributes of the DSP channel. ----End
Example
To configure the V2 T.38 flow, do as follows:
huawei(config)#fax parameters tranmode 1 huawei(config)#fax parameters is-port+2 0 huawei(config)#display fax parameters ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Fax transfers mode :V2 T38 T38 Fax Port :RTP port Fix the package interval as 10ms :disable RFC2198 intelligent startup :disable ----------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config)#dsp attribute train-mode 0
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
195
huawei(config)#display dsp attribute ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Fax Max Train Rate :V17 Fax Train Mode :Remote Train DSP chip maximum adaptive JitterBuffer(ms) :135 DSP chip minimum adaptive JitterBuffer(ms) :2 DSP chip initial adaptive JitterBuffer(ms) :2 DSP chip maximum fixed JitterBuffer(ms) :135 DSP chip minimum fixed JitterBuffer(ms) :2 DSP chip nominal fixed JitterBuffer(ms) :60 DSP input gain(PCM->IP)(db) :0 DSP output gain(IP->PCM)(db) :0 DSP code type :G711A RTCP package send interval time(ms) :5000 Severe Degrade Threshold(periods) :400 Support VQM :Disable DSP Rtp Packet Interval(ms) :20 DSP echo check :Open DSP silence reduce :Close DSP need statistics or not :No DSP Packet Lose Compensate :Close DSP clearmode payload value :100 Support RTCP XR :Disable -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
13.5 Configuring the Selfswitch T.38 Flow

When the selfswitch T.38 flow is used, the UA5000 need not be controlled by the MGC for the fax service.
Prerequisite
Figure 13-4 shows the flowchart for configuring the selfswitch T.38.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
196
Figure 13-4 Flowchart for configuring the selfswitch T.38

Start
End
Procedure
Step 1 Run the fax parameters tranmode command to set the selfswitch T.38 mode as the fax transmission mode. Step 2 Run the display fax parameters command to query the fax parameters. Step 3 (Optional) Run the dsp attribute train-mode command to set the fax training mode. Step 4 (Optional) Run the display dsp attribute command to query the attributes of the DSP. ----End
Example
To set the selfswitch T.38 mode on the UA5000, do as follows:
huawei(config)#fax parameters tranmode 5 huawei(config)#display fax parameters ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Fax transfers mode :Self switch T38 T38 Fax Port :RTP port Fix the package interval as 10ms :disable RFC2198 intelligent startup :disable ----------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config)#dsp attribute train-mode 0 huawei(config)#display dsp attribute ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Fax Max Train Rate :V17 Fax Train Mode :Remote Train DSP chip maximum adaptive JitterBuffer(ms) :135
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
197
DSP chip minimum adaptive JitterBuffer(ms) :2 DSP chip initial adaptive JitterBuffer(ms) :2 DSP chip maximum fixed JitterBuffer(ms) :135 DSP chip minimum fixed JitterBuffer(ms) :2 DSP chip nominal fixed JitterBuffer(ms) :60 DSP input gain(PCM->IP)(db) :0 DSP output gain(IP->PCM)(db) :0 DSP code type :G711A RTCP package send interval time(ms) :5000 Severe Degrade Threshold(periods) :400 Support VQM :Disable DSP Rtp Packet Interval(ms) :20 DSP echo check :Open DSP silence reduce :Close DSP need statistics or not :No DSP Packet Lose Compensate :Close DSP clearmode payload value :100 Support RTCP XR :Disable -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
13.6 Configuring the V3 Flow

In the V3 flow, you can use either the transparent transmission mode or the T.38 mode on the UA5000, which is determined by the mode configured on the MGC. If the MGC uses the T.38 mode, the fax port ID can be negotiated.
Prerequisite
Context
In the T.38 mode, the fax port ID is negotiated. In the V3 flow, you can set one fax port ID as the voice port ID and the other fax port ID as the voice port ID plus 2. The settings result in the fax service failure in the V2 flow. The fax process in the V3 flow on the UA5000 is controlled by the MGC. For example, the training mode, coding mode, and port ID are issued by the MGC.
Figure 13-5 shows the flowchart for configuring the V3 flow service.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
198
Figure 13-5 Flowchart for configuring the V3 flow service

Start
End
Procedure
Step 1 Run the fax parameters tranmode command to set the fax transmission mode as the V3 mode.
NOTE
In the V3 flow, the MGC issues the fax training mode. Hence, you need not configure the fax training mode on the UA5000.
Step 2 Run the display fax parameters command to query the fax parameters. ----End
Example
To configure the V3 flow, do as follows:
huawei(config)#fax parameters tranmode 2 huawei(config)#display fax parameters ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Fax transfers mode :V3 flow T38 Fax Port :RTP port Fix the package interval as 10ms :disable RFC2198 intelligent startup :disable -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
13.7 Configuring the V5 Flow

The V5 flow is compatible with the V2 flow and the V3 flow. When the peer fax machine uses the V2 or V3 flow, the local fax machine that uses the V5 flow can communicate with the peer fax machine properly.
Prerequisite
l l The data on the MGC must be accurate. The FoIP service is implemented based on the voice service. Before you configure the FoIP service, the voice service data must be configured properly and the subscribers must be
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
able to call each other successfully. For the configuration of the voice service, see "10 Configuring the VoIP Service."
Context
In the V5 flow, you can use either the transparent transmission mode or the T.38 mode, which is determined by the mode configured on the MGC.
Figure 13-6 shows the flowchart for configuring the V5 flow. Figure 13-6 Flowchart for configuring the V5 flow
Start
End
Procedure
Step 1 Run the fax parameters tranmode command to set the V5 mode as the fax transmission mode. Step 2 Run the display fax parameters command to query the fax parameters. Step 3 (Optional) Run the dsp attribute train-mode command to set the fax training mode. Step 4 (Optional) Run the display dsp attribute command to query the attributes of the DSP channel. ----End
Example
To configure the V5 flow on the UA5000, do as follows:
huawei(config)#fax parameters tranmode 4 huawei(config)#display fax parameters ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Fax transfers mode :V5 flow T38 Fax Port :RTP port Fix the package interval as 10ms :disable RFC2198 intelligent startup :disable ----------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config)#dsp attribute train-mode 0 huawei(config)#display dsp attribute ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Fax Max Train Rate :V17 Fax Train Mode :Remote Train DSP chip maximum adaptive JitterBuffer(ms) :135 DSP chip minimum adaptive JitterBuffer(ms) :2 DSP chip initial adaptive JitterBuffer(ms) :2 DSP chip maximum fixed JitterBuffer(ms) :135 DSP chip minimum fixed JitterBuffer(ms) :2 DSP chip nominal fixed JitterBuffer(ms) :60 DSP input gain(PCM->IP)(db) :0 DSP output gain(IP->PCM)(db) :0 DSP code type :G711A RTCP package send interval time(ms) :5000 Severe Degrade Threshold(periods) :400 Support VQM :Disable DSP Rtp Packet Interval(ms) :20 DSP echo check :Open DSP silence reduce :Close DSP need statistics or not :No DSP Packet Lose Compensate :Close DSP clearmode payload value :100 Support RTCP XR :Disable -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
13.8 Configuring the High-Speed Fax

If the network communication is of a high quality and the fax machines support the high-speed fax service, you can configure a high-speed fax mode to transmit the signals. In the high-speed mode, the signals are transmitted in the modem mode.
Prerequisite
Context
To implement the high-speed fax service, the following requirements must be met: l Both the UA5000 and the MGC must support the high-speed fax service, and the fax transmission mode must not be the selfswitch T.38 mode or the selfswitch transparent transmission mode. The fax machines must support the high-speed fax service.
Figure 13-7 shows the flowchart for configuring the high-speed fax.
Figure 13-7 Flowchart for configuring the high-speed fax

Start
Selfswitch thoroughly or Selfswitch T38 mode? Yes Set the fax transmission mode
No
Query the modem transmission mode
End
Procedure
Step 1 Run the display fax parameters command to query the fax transmission mode. Step 2 If the fax transmission mode is the selfswitch T.38 mode or the selfswitch transparent transmission mode, run the fax parameters tranmode command to change the fax transmission mode to the fax transmission mode that can be configured. If the fax transmission mode is not the selfswitch T.38 mode or the selfswitch transparent transmission mode, skip this step. Step 3 Run the display modem parameters command to query modem parameters. Step 4 If the modem transmission mode is the transparent transmission mode, the configuration is not required. ----End
Example
To configure the UA5000 with the transparent transmission flow so that the UA5000 supports the high-speed fax, do as follows:
huawei(config)#display fax parameters ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Fax transfers mode :Self switch T38 T38 Fax Port :RTP port Fix the package interval as 10ms :disable RFC2198 intelligent startup :disable
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
202
----------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config)#fax parameters tranmode 4 huawei(config)#display fax parameters ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Fax transfers mode :V5 flow T38 Fax Port :RTP port Fix the package interval as 10ms :disable RFC2198 intelligent startup :disable ----------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config)#display modem parameters ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Modem transfers mode :Thoroughly Modem event mode :Direct Fix the package interval as 10ms :disable RFC2198 intelligent startup :disable -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
13.9 Configuring the High-Low Speed Selfswitch Fax

If the network communication is of a high quality and the fax machines support the high-speed fax service, the data can be transmitted in the high-speed fax mode. In the high-speed fax mode, the signals are transmitted in the modem mode. When the quality of the network communication deteriorates, and the high-speed negotiation fails, the UA5000 automatically switches to the low speed fax mode. In the low-speed fax mode, the signals are transmitted in the fax mode.
Prerequisite
Context
l To implement the high-low speed selfswitch fax service, both the UA5000 and the MGC must support the high-speed fax service, and the UA5000 must use the direct report mode as the modem event report mode. To implement the high-speed fax service, the fax machines must support the high-speed fax service. To configure the high-low speed selfswitch fax service, the fax mode cannot be the selfswitch mode.
l l
Figure 13-8 shows the flowchart for configuring the high-low speed selfswitch fax.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
203
Figure 13-8 Flowchart for configuring the high-low speed selfswitch fax
Start
Set the modem event report mode
Set the modem transmission mode
Query the modem parameters
Set the Fax transmission mode
Query the Fax parameters
End
Procedure
Step 1 Run the modem parameters eventmode command to set the direct report mode as the modem event report mode. Step 2 Run the modem parameters tranmode command to set the transparent transmission mode as the modem transmission mode. Step 3 Run the display modem parameters command to query the modem parameters. ----End
Example
To configure the UA5000 with the transparent transmission flow so that the UA5000 supports the high-low speed selfswitch fax, do as follows:
huawei(config)#modem parameters eventmode 1 huawei(config)#modem parameters tranmode 0 huawei(config)#display modem parameters ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Modem transfers mode :Thoroughly Modem event mode :Direct Fix the package interval as 10ms :disable RFC2198 intelligent startup :disable ----------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config)#fax parameters tranmode 0
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
204
//The mode cannot be set to the selfswitch mode (namely, 3: Selfswitch thoroughly or 5: Selfswitch T38). huawei(config)#display fax parameters ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Fax transfers mode :V2 thoroughly T38 Fax Port :RTP port Fix the package interval as 10ms :disable RFC2198 intelligent startup :disable -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
13.10 Configuring the Fax Transmission Parameters

The fax transmission parameters for the MG include the transmission mode, 10 ms packetization function, and RFC 2198 intelligent start function. You can configure the fax transmission parameters according to the actual application environment to ensure the quality of the fax service.
Context
The fax transmission parameters of the UA5000 include the following: l Transmission mode: the transmission mode supported by the fax service. The UA5000 supports the selection of different transmission modes according to the actual coding scheme and the participating degree of the MGC. The transmission mode can be the following: Transparent transmission mode Auto-negotiation T.38 mode V3 flow Selfswitch transparent transmission mode V5 flow Selfswitch T.38 mode l 10 ms packetization function: Based on the 20 ms G711 transparent transmission, the 10 ms G711 transmission function is supported. This reduces the delay in the transmission and improves the performance of the transparent transmission. RFC 2198 intelligent start function: RFC 2198 uses the redundancy transmission mode to improve the reliability of the data transmission, and to ensure the service quality when the network quality is poor.
NOTE
When the protocol supported by the system is MGCP, parameter tranmode cannot be set to 4.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the fax parameters command to set the fax transmission parameters. Step 2 Run the display fax parameters command to query the fax transmission parameters. ----End
Example
Assume the following:
l l l l
The fax transmission mode is auto-negotiation T.38. The T.38 port ID is equal to the voice port ID. The 10 ms packetization function is enabled for the enhanced function of the transparent transmission. The RFC 2198 intelligent startup function is enabled.
To configure the fax parameters, do as follows:

huawei(config)#fax parameters tranmode 1 is-port+2 0 packet-interval-10ms 1 rfc2198 1 Parameter 10ms packing and modification for rfc2198 intelligent startup is effecitive to both fax and modem
13.11 Configuring the Fax Training Parameters

Configuring the fax training parameters includes configuring the fax training mode and the maximum rate of fax training. The fax training mode takes effect only in the T.38 flow. The maximum rate of fax training takes effect only in the T.38 local training flow.
Context
In the T.38 flow, the fax training mode on both UA5000s must be the same. That is, the mode must be either the end-to-end training mode or the local training mode. The end-to-end training mode is recommended. When the quality of the network communication deteriorates, decrease the rate of the fax training accordingly, if the rate of the fax machine can be decreased.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the dsp attribute train-mode command to set the fax training parameters. Step 2 Run the dsp attribute train-rate command to set the maximum training rate. Step 3 Run the display dsp attribute command to query the attributes of the DSP . ----End
Example
To set the fax training mode of the UA5000 as the end-to-end training mode and the maximum training rate as V29, do as follows:
huawei(config)#dsp attribute train-mode 0 train-rate 1 huawei(config)#display dsp attribute ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Fax Max Train Rate :V29 Fax Train Mode :Remote Train DSP chip maximum adaptive JitterBuffer(ms) :120 DSP chip minimum adaptive JitterBuffer(ms) :20 DSP chip initial adaptive JitterBuffer(ms) :60 DSP chip maximum fixed JitterBuffer(ms) :135 DSP chip minimum fixed JitterBuffer(ms) :2 DSP chip nominal fixed JitterBuffer(ms) :60 DSP input gain(PCM->IP)(db) :-8 DSP output gain(IP->PCM)(db) :2 DSP code type :G729 RTCP package send interval time(ms) :6000
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
206
Severe Degrade Threshold(periods) :1 Support VQM :Disable DSP Rtp Packet Interval(ms) :20 DSP echo check :Open DSP silence reduce :Open DSP Packet Lose Compensate :Open DSP clearmode payload value :100 Support RTCP XR :Disable -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
207
14 Configuring the MoIP Service
14
About This Chapter
Configuring the MoIP Service
Configuring the MoIP service includes the application of the MoIP technology and the related process for configuring the MoIP service of the UA5000. 14.1 Introduction to the MoIP Service Modem over IP (MoIP) provides the modem service over the IP network or between the IP network and the PSTN network. 14.2 Configuring the MoIP Service Configure the MoIP service so that the traditional modem data service can be transmitted over the IP network. 14.3 Configuring the Modem Transmission Parameters Configure the modem transmission parameters for the MG. The modem transmission parameters for the MG includes the transmission mode, 10 ms package function, RFC 2198 intelligent start function, and modem event reporting mode.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
208
14.1 Introduction to the MoIP Service

Modem over IP (MoIP) provides the modem service over the IP network or between the IP network and the PSTN network.
Service Description
The MoIP means the service of connecting modems to the terminals of the traditional POTS subscribers to implement the MoIP functions. The modem service is widely used in the PSTN network. The NGN networking supports the modem device of the traditional PSTN service, namely, the MoIP.
In the modem service and the voice service, the subscriber access ports are provided by the voice service boards. Table 14-1 lists the number of ports provided by each type of service boards. Table 14-1 Number of ports provided by each type of service boards Board Type ASL A32 CSRB Number of Ports 16 32 32 Description 16-port POTS service board 32-port POTS service board 32-port POTS and ADSL/ADSL2+ combo service board
14.2 Configuring the MoIP Service

Configure the MoIP service so that the traditional modem data service can be transmitted over the IP network.
Prerequisite
l l The data on the MGC must be accurate. The MoIP service is implemented based on the voice service. Before you configure the MoIP service, the voice service data must be configured properly and the subscribers must be able to call each other successfully. For the configuration of the voice service, see "10 Configuring the VoIP Service."
Context
The UA5000 supports only the modem service that is in the transparent transmission mode. That is, the UA5000 processes the modem signals as the common RTP data by using the G.711 codec. The transparent transmission mode is used depending on the bearer network. Therefore, when the connection breaks, or a low access rate or an instability occurs, you can check the packet loss rate and the delay jitter index of the bearer network.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the modem parameters tranmode command to set the modem transmission mode. Step 2 Run the display modem parameters command to query the modem parameters. ----End
Example
To set the modem transmission mode as the transparent transmission mode, do as follows:
huawei(config)#modem parameters tranmode 0 huawei(config)#display modem parameters ----------------------------------------------------------------------------Modem transfers mode :Thoroughly Modem event mode :Direct Fix the package interval as 10ms :disable RFC2198 intelligent startup :enable ----------------------------------------------------------------------------NOTE
Only the modem service in transparent transmission mode is supported, and the modem service in relay mode is not supported.
14.3 Configuring the Modem Transmission Parameters

Configure the modem transmission parameters for the MG. The modem transmission parameters for the MG includes the transmission mode, 10 ms package function, RFC 2198 intelligent start function, and modem event reporting mode.
Prerequisite
l l The data on the MGC side must be configured correctly. The MoIP service is provided on the basis of the voice service. Before you configure the MoIP service, the voice service must be configured correctly and the call between subscribers must be normal. For the configuration of the voice service, see "10 Configuring the VoIP Service."
Context
The transmission parameters of the UA5000 include: l Transmission mode: The UA5000 supports only the modem service in transparent transmission mode. The modem signal is processed as the common RTP data by using the G.711 codec. The transparent transmission mode is used depending on the bearer network. Therefore, when the connection breaks, or a low access rate or an instability occurs, you can check the packet loss rate and delay jitter index of the bearer network. 10 ms packetization function: Based on the 20 ms G711 transparent transmission, the UA5000 supports the 10 ms G711 transmission function. This reduces the delay, improves the performance of the transparent transmission, and reduces the impact of the network packet loss on the modem transmission. RFC 2198 intelligent start function: The RFC 2198 uses the redundancy transmission mode to improve the reliability of the data transmission, and to ensure the service quality when the packet loss occurs in the network.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
Modem event reporting mode: In direct reporting mode, after the UA5000 receives a modem event, it reports the event to the softswitch. In delay reporting mode, after the UA5000 receives a modem event, it does not report the event immediately, but waits until the event times out. Then, if no V21 flag (the fax even) is reported, the host reports the modem event. In this way, when the high-speed fax machine fails in the high-speed transmission (by modem) negotiation, it can transmit data in low-speed transmission (by fax) mode.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the modem parameters tranmode command to configure the modem transmission parameters. Step 2 Run the display modem parameters command to query the modem parameters. ----End
Example
To configure the modem transmission mode of the UA5000 as the transparent transmission mode, to configure the modem event reporting mode as the delay reporting mode, and to enable the RFC 2198 intelligent start function and the 10 ms package function, do as follows:
huawei(config)#modem parameters tranmode 0 huawei(config)#modem parameters eventmode 1 packet-interval-10ms 1 rfc2198 1 { <cr>|tranmode<K> }: Command: modem parameters eventmode 1 packet-interval-10ms 1 rfc2198 1 Parameter 10ms packing and modification for rfc2198 intelligent startup is effecitive to both fax and modem
NOTE
Only the modem service in transparent transmission mode is supported, and the modem service in relay mode is not supported.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
211
15 Configuring the R2 Access Service
15
Configuring the R2 Access Service
About This Chapter

Configuring the R2 access service includes the application of the R2 technology and the process for configuring the R2 access service on the UA5000. 15.1 Introduction to the R2 Access Service A signaling system (SS) is an important part of the communication network. It is a tool for the nodes in the communication network to exchange information. The inter-office signaling includes the channel associated signaling (CAS) and common channel signaling (CCS). The R2 signaling is a common CAS. 15.2 Configuration Example of the R2 Access Service This topic describes how to configure the R2 access service on the UA5000-1 through the signaling mode and the basic parameters of R2 profile of the E1 port on the EDTB board of the UA5000-1. 15.3 Adding an R2 Profile You can define an R2 signaling with certain characteristics as an R2 profile. The R2 profile index can be referenced by the MG R2 subscribers. That is, the R2 profile is valid for the MG R2 subscribers who reference this profile. 15.4 Configuring the Adaptation Data of the R2 Profile Configure the R2 profile data, including the R2 address receiving attributes, R2 address sending attributes, R2 profile attributes, R2 line signaling attributes, and register signaling attributes. 15.5 Loading an R2 Signaling Configuration File You can integrate the R2 signaling conversion tables into a script file. Then, configure the R2 signaling conversion table of the UA5000 by loading the script file.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
212
15.1 Introduction to the R2 Access Service

A signaling system (SS) is an important part of the communication network. It is a tool for the nodes in the communication network to exchange information. The inter-office signaling includes the channel associated signaling (CAS) and common channel signaling (CCS). The R2 signaling is a common CAS.
Service Description
To unify the inter-office signaling, the ITU-T makes recommendations for signaling and finally forms the signaling systems 1 to 7, R1 signaling, and R2 signaling in succession. Among them, SS1 to SS5, R1, and R2 are CAS. R2 is a common CAS. Generally, different countries define their own national standard for CAS according to the ITU-T recommendations. For example, China defines Signaling No. 1, which is different from the standard R2 to a certain extent. The description of each signaling is as follows: l CAS The signaling information is transmitted within the voice channel. The inter-office signaling of the CAS signaling consists of line signaling (supervisory signals) and register signaling (with control function). l R2 signaling It is a type of CAS. The R2 signaling can be used in international and national networks. Signaling No. 1, used in China, is a subset of the R2 signaling. The R2 signaling consists of line signaling and register signaling. l Line signaling It controls the transmission path between switches or the transmission path inside a switch. During a call, the line signaling is used to set up, maintain, release, and monitor the selected route. The line signaling can be forward or backward and is categorized into analog line signaling and digital line signaling. Currently, only the digital R2 line signaling is provided for the switching and wireless overseas products. The digital line signaling is fixedly transmitted through timeslot 16 of each 30/32-channel pulse code modulation (PCM). l Register signaling It provides the address and other information required for call routing and related call processing. The register signaling is used to send and request for the caller and called numbers, as well as sending caller subscriber type, called subscriber state, and call service type. The register signaling complies with the multiple frequency control (MFC) principle. It is transmitted in the voice channel and it occupies the voice channel resources. It is transmitted before the call is set up, but it cannot be transmitted during a call session. l Forward signaling and backward signaling Forward signaling is sent from the calling office to the called office. Backward signaling is sent from the called office to the calling office.
The UA5000 provides the R2 access service through the EDTB board. Table 15-1 lists the number of ports provided by the EDTB board.
Table 15-1 Number of ports provided by the EDTB board Board Type EDTB Number of Ports 16 Remarks 16-port E1 service board
15.2 Configuration Example of the R2 Access Service

This topic describes how to configure the R2 access service on the UA5000-1 through the signaling mode and the basic parameters of R2 profile of the E1 port on the EDTB board of the UA5000-1.
Prerequisite
l l l l The UA5000-1 must support the R2 CAS and the PBX user must be configured on UA5000-1. The data of phone D must be configured properly on the UA5000-2. The PBX must support the R2 CAS. The PBX must be configured properly. Phones A, B and C must communicate with each other properly. The physical connection between the PBX and the UA5000-1 must be correct.
Context
In the R2 CAS configuration, a large amount of data is configured through the script file provided by Huawei according to the signaling standard of a specific country (such as CAS conversion table). Therefore, you need not configure this part of the data. This section provides a simplified configuration example to make you familiar with the flowchart for configuring the R2 access service.
Networking
Figure 15-1 shows the example network of the R2 access service.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
214
Figure 15-1 Example network of the R2 access service
MGC
H.248
H.248
UA5000-1 R2 PBX E1
UA5000-2
Phone A
Phone B
Phone C
Phone D
NOTE
The UA5000 converts the R2 CAS into the H.248 messages, and then reports the messages to the MGC. At the same time, the UA5000 receives the H.248 messages and converts them into the R2 CAS. In this way, the MGC that uses H.248 and the PBXs or the switches that use the R2 CAS can communicate with each other.
Data Plan
Table 15-2 provides the data plan for configuring the R2 access service. Table 15-2 Data plan for configuring the R2 access service Item R2 profile index R2 signaling type Data 0 Argentina R2 signaling 0 Item R2 profile name Shelf ID/slot ID/port ID of the MG R2 subscribers start-terminalid Data Argentina 0/7/2
mgid
Figure 15-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the R2 access service.
Figure 15-2 Flowchart for configuring the R2 access service

Start
Add an EDTB board
Set the working mode of the EDTB board
Set the signaling mode of the E1 port
Add an R2 profile
Configure the R2 profile data
Configure the R2 address receiving attributes
Configure the R2 address sending attributes
Configure the R2 profile attributes
Configure the R2 line signaling attributes
Configure the R2 interregister signaling attributes
Add an R2 subscriber
End
Procedure
Step 1 Add and confirm an EDTB board.
huawei(config)#board add 0/7 h601edtb huawei(config)#board confirm 0/7
Step 2 Set the working mode of the EDTB board.

huawei(config)#interface edt 0/7 huawei(config-if-edt-0/7)#runmode indep
Step 3 Set the signaling mode of the E1 port.

huawei(config-if-edt-0/7)#e1port signal 2 cas huawei(config-if-edt-0/7)#display port mode -----------------------------------------------------------------------------Port Signalling CRC4 Impedance Service flag-interval-index ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
216
0 CCS Disable 75 1 CCS Disable 75 2 CAS Disable 75 3 CCS Disable 75 4 CCS Disable 75 5 CCS Disable 75 6 CCS Disable 75 7 CCS Disable 75 8 CCS Disable 75 9 CCS Disable 75 10 CCS Disable 75 11 CCS Disable 75 12 CCS Disable 75 13 CCS Disable 75 14 CCS Disable 75 15 CCS Disable 75 -----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Step 4 Query the version and type of the R2 signaling.

huawei(config-if-edt-0/7)#quit huawei(config)#display r2 signaling-type --------------------------------------------------------R2 signaling-type --------------------------------------------------------file version: 100 signaling-type: 0 - Standard_R2 1 - Brazil_R2 2 - Argentina_R2 3-15: Extend_R2 ---------------------------------------------------------
Step 5 Add an R2 profile.

huawei(config)#r2 profile 0 Are you sure to add r2 profile?(y/n)[n]:y huawei(config-r2-0)#
Step 6 Configure the R2 profile.

huawei(config-r2-0)#profile attribute name brazil signaling-type 2
Step 7 Query the details of the R2 profile.

huawei(config-r2-0)#display profile detail --------------------------------------------------------R2 signaling profile --------------------------------------------------------index: 0 name: brazil signaling-type: 2 --------------------------------------------------------R2 line-signaling attribute --------------------------------------------------------type(0:L1B,1:L2B,2:L3B,3:PULSE): 1 wait-seize-ack-time(ms): 5000 wait-answer-time(s): 300 wait-clear-forward-time(ms): 200 wait-protect-time(ms): 200 --------------------------------------------------------R2 register-signaling attribute --------------------------------------------------------type(0:MFC,1:PULSE,2:DTMF,3:MFP,4:DPMFP):0 signal-send-voltage(dBm): 13 back-pulse-time(ms): 150 dtmf-send-time(ms): 68 dtmf-send-interval(ms): 68 no-cid-permit(yes/no): yes number-max-interval(s): 50 signal-keep-max-time(s): 15 receive-number-max-interval(s): 50 signal-stop-permit-time(s): 15
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
217
wait-caller-category-time(s): 50 wait-Bsignal-time(s): 50 number-send-mode(0:immediate,1:delay): 1 calling-number-max-length: 12 compelling-sequence-keepalive-time(ms): 40000 send-pulse-signal(yes/no): no --------------------------------------------------------R2 address-receive attribute --------------------------------------------------------DI: yes SI: yes SC: yes ES: no CC: no DISC: no NAC: no SP: no RCPS: 1 RCCP: 1 --------------------------------------------------------R2 address-send attribute --------------------------------------------------------DI: yes SI: yes SC: yes ES: no CC: no DISC: no NAC: no SP: no ---------------------------------------------------------
Step 8 Add a media gateway (MG) R2 subscriber.

huawei(config-r2-0)#quit huawei(config)#esl user huawei(config-esl-user)#mgr2user add 0/7/2 0 0 start-terminalid 0 huawei(config-esl-user)#display mgr2user state 0/7/2 ---------------------------------------------F / S/ P/ TS ServiceState TerminalID ---------------------------------------------0/ 7/ 2/ 0 Fault 0 0/ 7/ 2/ 1 Fault 1 0/ 7/ 2/ 2 Fault 2 0/ 7/ 2/ 3 Fault 3 0/ 7/ 2/ 4 Fault 4 0/ 7/ 2/ 5 Fault 5 0/ 7/ 2/ 6 Fault 6 0/ 7/ 2/ 7 Fault 7 0/ 7/ 2/ 8 Fault 8 0/ 7/ 2/ 9 Fault 9 0/ 7/ 2/ 10 Fault 10 0/ 7/ 2/ 11 Fault 11 0/ 7/ 2/ 12 Fault 12 0/ 7/ 2/ 13 Fault 13 0/ 7/ 2/ 14 Fault 14 0/ 7/ 2/ 15 Fault 15 0/ 7/ 2/ 16 Fault 16 0/ 7/ 2/ 17 Fault 17 0/ 7/ 2/ 18 Fault 18 0/ 7/ 2/ 19 Fault 19 0/ 7/ 2/ 20 Fault 20 0/ 7/ 2/ 21 Fault 21 0/ 7/ 2/ 22 Fault 22 0/ 7/ 2/ 23 Fault 23 0/ 7/ 2/ 24 Fault 24 0/ 7/ 2/ 25 Fault 25 0/ 7/ 2/ 26 Fault 26 0/ 7/ 2/ 27 Fault 27 0/ 7/ 2/ 28 Fault 28
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
218
0/ 7/ 2/ 29 Fault 29 0/ 7/ 2/ 30 Fault 30 0/ 7/ 2/ 31 Fault 31 ---------------------------------------------huawei(config-esl-user)#display port state 0/7/2 -------------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port PortType PortState ServiceType -------------------------------------------------------0 / 7 / 2 E1 Normal MGR2 ---------------------------------------------------------
----End
Result
Any one phone among phones A, B, and C should be able to communicate with phone D.
15.3 Adding an R2 Profile

You can define an R2 signaling with certain characteristics as an R2 profile. The R2 profile index can be referenced by the MG R2 subscribers. That is, the R2 profile is valid for the MG R2 subscribers who reference this profile.
Context
You can add a maximum of 16 R2 profiles with the signaling type that ranges from 0 to 15. The signaling types are defined as follows: l l l l 0: Standard_R2 1: Brazil_R2 2: Argentina_R2 315: Subscriber self-defined R2
NOTE
By default, in the case of the R2 profiles that range from 0 to 15, the values of the following four tables are default values. The four tables are register signaling attribute table, line signaling attribute table, address sending attribute table, and address receiving attribute table.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the r2 profile command to add an R2 profile. Step 2 Run the display r2 profile command to query the attributes of the R2 profile. ----End
Example
To add an R2 profile with index 2, do as follows:
huawei(config)#r2 profile 2 Are you sure to add r2 profile?(y/n)[n]: y huawei(config-r2-2)#display r2 profile --------------------------------------------------------R2 signalling profile --------------------------------------------------------index: 2 name: standard r2
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
219
signalling-type: 0 ---------------------------------------------------------
Related Operation
Table 15-3 lists the related operations for adding an R2 profile. Table 15-3 Related operations for adding an R2 profile To... Delete an R2 profile Modify the attributes of an R2 profile Query the basic information about all R2 profiles that have been configured Query the general attributes of an R2 profile Run the Command... undo r2 profile profile attribute display r2 profile all In... Global config mode R2 mode Global config mode
display profile detail
R2 mode
15.4 Configuring the Adaptation Data of the R2 Profile

Configure the R2 profile data, including the R2 address receiving attributes, R2 address sending attributes, R2 profile attributes, R2 line signaling attributes, and register signaling attributes.
NOTE
When you configure the adaptation data of the R2 profile, if a parameter in the signaling standard of a country is the same as the default parameter defined by the UA5000, the parameter need not be changed. If a parameter in the signaling standard of a country is different from the default parameter defined by the UA5000, the parameter need be changed accordingly.
15.4.1 Configuring the R2 Address Receiving Attributes

Configuring the R2 address receiving attributes means configuring the address receiving attributes in the adaptation data of the specified R2 profile.
Context
The UA5000 provides default values for the R2 address receiving attributes. Perform the following operation to configure the attributes if the default values do not meet the requirement.
Procedure
Step 1 In global config mode, run the r2 profile command to enter the R2 mode. Step 2 Run the address-receive attribute command to configure the R2 address receiving attributes. Step 3 Run the display address-receive command to query the R2 address receiving attributes. ----End
Example
To set ES to yes in the address receiving table of the R2 profile with index 2, do as follows:
huawei(config)#r2 profile 2 huawei(config-r2-2)#address-receive attribute ES yes huawei(config-r2-2)#display address-receive --------------------------------------------------------------------------R2 address-receive attribute --------------------------------------------------------------------------index: 2 DI: yes SI: yes SC: yes ES: yes CC: no DISC: no NAC: no SP: no RCPS: 1 RCCP: 1 ---------------------------------------------------------
15.4.2 Configuring the R2 Address Sending Attributes

Configuring the R2 address sending attributes means configuring the address sending attributes in the adaptation data of the specified R2 profile.
Context
The UA5000 provides default values for the attributes. Perform the following operation to configure the attributes if the default values do not meet the requirement.
Procedure
Step 1 In global config mode, run the r2 profile command to enter the R2 mode. Step 2 Run the address-send attribute command to configure the R2 address sending table. Step 3 Run the display address-send command to query the R2 address sending attributes. ----End
Example
To set SI as no in the address sending table of the R2 profile with index 2, do as follows:
huawei(config)#r2 profile 2 huawei(config-r2-2)#address-send attribute si no huawei(config-r2-2)#display address-send --------------------------------------------------------------------------R2 address-send attribute --------------------------------------------------------------------------index: 2 DI: yes SI: no SC: yes ES: no CC: no DISC: no NAC: no SP: no ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
221
15.4.3 Configuring the R2 Profile Attributes

Configure or modify the basic information about the R2 profile so that the parameters in the R2 profile meet the requirements of the subscribers.
Context
The UA5000 provides default values for the R2 profile attributes. Perform the following operation to configure the attributes if the default values do not meet the requirement.
Procedure
Step 1 In the global config mode, run the r2 profile command to enter the R2 mode. Step 2 Run the profile attribute command to configure the attributes of the R2 profile. Step 3 Run the display r2 profile command to query the attributes of the R2 profile. ----End
Example
To modify the R2 profile with index 2 so that the name of the profile is Argentina and the signaling type is 2, do as follows:
huawei(config)#r2 profile 2 huawei(config-r2-2)#profile attribute name Argentina signalling-type 2 huawei(config-r2-2)#display r2 profile --------------------------------------------------------------------------R2 signaling profile --------------------------------------------------------------------------index: 2 name: Argentina signalling-type: 2 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
15.4.4 Configuring the R2 Line Signaling Attributes

Configuring the R2 line signaling attributes means configuring the line signaling attributes in the adaptation data of the specified R2 profile.
Context
The UA5000 provides default values for the R2 line signaling attributes. Perform the following operation to configure the attributes if the default values do not meet your requirement.
Procedure
Step 1 In global config mode, run the r2 profile command to enter the R2 mode. Step 2 In global config mode, run the line-signaling attribute command to configure the R2 line signaling attributes. Step 3 In the global config mode, run the display line-signaling attribute command to query the R2 line signaling attributes. ----End
Example
Assume the following: l l l l l type: L2B wait-seize-ack-time: 3500 ms wait-answer-time: 260s wait-clear-forward-time: 1000 ms wait-protect-time: 1000 ms
To modify the line signaling attributes of the R2 profile with index 2, do as follows:
huawei(config)#r2 profile 2 huawei(config-r2-2)#line-signaling attribute type 1 wait-seize-ack-time 3500 wait-answer-time 260 wait-clear-forward-time 1000 wait-protect-time 1000 huawei(config-r2-2)#display line-signaling attribute --------------------------------------------------------R2 line-signaling attribute --------------------------------------------------------index: 2 type(0:L1B,1:L2B,2:L3B,3:PULSE): 1 wait-seize-ack-time(ms): 3500 wait-answer-time(s): 260 wait-clear-forward-time(ms): 1000 wait-protect-time(ms): 1000 ---------------------------------------------------------
15.4.5 Configuring the R2 Register Signaling Attributes

Configuring the R2 register signaling attributes means configuring the register signaling attributes in the adaptation data of the R2 profile.
Context
The UA5000 provides default values for the R2 register signaling attributes. Perform the following operation to configure the attributes if the default values do not meet the requirement.
Procedure
Step 1 In global config mode, run the r2 profile command to enter the R2 mode. Step 2 Run the register-signaling attribute command to configure the attributes of the R2 register signaling. Step 3 Run the display register-signaling attribute command to query the attributes of the R2 register signaling. ----End
Example
Assume the following: l l l type: 0 signal-send-voltage: 20 dBm back-pulse-time: 150 ms
To modify the line signaling attributes of the R2 profile with index 2, do as follows:
huawei(config)#r2 profile 2 huawei(config-r2-2)#register-signaling attribute type 0 signal-send-voltage 20
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
223
back-pulse-time 150 huawei(config-r2-2)#display register-signaling attribute --------------------------------------------------------R2 register-signaling attribute --------------------------------------------------------index: 2 type(0:MFC,1:PULSE,2:DTMF,3:MFP,4:DPMFP):0 signal-send-voltage(dBm): 20 back-pulse-time(ms): 150 dtmf-send-time(ms): 68 dtmf-send-interval(ms): 68 no-cid-permit(yes/no): yes number-max-interval(s): 50 signal-keep-max-time(s): 15 receive-number-max-interval(s): 50 signal-stop-permit-time(s): 15 wait-caller-category-time(s): 50 wait-Bsignal-time(s): 50 number-send-mode(0:immediate,1:delay): 1 calling-number-max-length: 12 compelling-sequence-keepalive-time(ms): 40000 send-pulse-signal(yes/no): no ---------------------------------------------------------
15.5 Loading an R2 Signaling Configuration File

You can integrate the R2 signaling conversion tables into a script file. Then, configure the R2 signaling conversion table of the UA5000 by loading the script file.
Context
To convert R2 signaling to adapt to the standards of different countries, you must configure the mapping table between the physical signals and the logical signals. This mapping table is named the R2 signaling conversion table, which consists of the following four subtables: l l l l Line signaling report conversion table Line signaling delivery conversion table Line signaling delivery conversion table Register signaling delivery conversion table
Huawei produces a script file by collecting all man machine language (MML) commands used for configuring the R2 signaling conversion table according to the signaling standard of your country. You can load the script file to complete the configuration of the R2 signaling conversion table on site. l l You can select only one loading mode among Xmodem, TFTP, SFTP, and FTP. During the loading, running information and other prompts are displayed, indicating the loading progress, loading result, and failure cause in the case of a failure.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the load r2-signaling-file command to load the R2 signaling configuration file. ----End
Example
To load an R2 signaling configuration file through TFTP, do as follows:
huawei#load r2-signaling-file tftp 10.11.117.170 r2signalingtype.efs During the file load, the R2 signaling adaptation data will be modified and all the being services will be interrupted Please ensure the file is correct,and please save it after load complete Are you sure to load this file? (y/n)[n]:y Load(backup,duplicate,...) begins, please wait and notice the rate of progress Any operation such as reboot or switchover will cause failure and unpredictable result
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
225
16 Configuring the V5 Voice Service
16
Configuring the V5 Voice Service
About This Chapter

Configuring the V5 voice service includes the application of the V5 technology and the process for configuring the V5 voice service on the UA5000. 16.1 Introduction to the V5 Voice Service The V5 interface is designed for the access network (AN) development and is located between the local exchange (LE) and the AN. The interface changes the analog connection between the exchange and the access device to a standard digital connection. 16.2 Configuration Example of the V5 Voice Service This topic describes how to configure a V5 interface and the V5 voice subscriber data on the UA5000. In this way, the voice service is transmitted upstream to the exchange for processing so that the voice subscribers can call each other. 16.3 Configuring a PSTN Subscriber After configuring the v5 interface, configure the public switched telephone network (PSTN) subscriber data on the V5 interface so that the PSTN subscribers can call each other. 16.4 Configuring an ISDN Subscriber After configuring the V5 interface, configure the ISDN subscriber data on the V5 interface so that the UA5000 can support the ISDN BRA and ISDN PRA access services. 16.5 Blocking a V5 Service Port You can block a V5 service port by blocking the shelf number/slot number/port number, V5 interface ID + L3 address, or V5 interface ID + EF address. 16.6 Configuring the Loopback for a V5 Service Port You can configure the loopback for a V5 service port and locate the subscriber line faults or network transmission faults based on the voice quality.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
226
16.1 Introduction to the V5 Voice Service

The V5 interface is designed for the access network (AN) development and is located between the local exchange (LE) and the AN. The interface changes the analog connection between the exchange and the access device to a standard digital connection.
Service Description
When the PVMB or PVMD board functions as the narrowband control board, the UA5000 supports the V5 interface and is compatible with the optical line terminal (OLT). The OLT is a narrowband access device. The UA5000 provides the V5 voice service by connecting to the PSTN switch through the V5 interface.
The V5 interface is a standard interface between the access network (AN) and the local exchange (LE). The V5 interface includes the V5.1 and V5.2 interfaces. l l A V5.1 interface manages only one 2048 kbit/s link, and it does not have the line concentration capability. When the V5.1 protocol is used for configuring the narrowband subscriber, a maximum of 30 narrowband subscribers can be added. TS16 and the timeslots that are configured as Cchannels are skipped when the V5.1 timeslots increase. When you add the PSTN subscribers in batches, the system automatically searches for the PSTN ports within a specified range and adds the PSTN subscribers one by one. The layer 3 addresses and telephone numbers of the added PSTN subscribers increase by the set step value. The default step is 1. A V5.2 interface manages 1-16 2048 kbit/s links, and it has the line concentration capability. For configuring the narrowband subscribers, the link timeslot is allocated as follows: When the 5.1 protocol is used, one narrowband subscriber constantly occupies one timeslot. When the 5.2 protocol is used, no link timeslot is occupied. The V5.2 timeslot is allocated dynamically after the subscriber picks up the phone. The ring modes of the PSTN subscriber are controlled by the LE, whereas the ring tones are configured on the UA5000. Therefore, a ring mapping must be created between the ring modes and the ring tones. One mapping is applied to one V5 interface. If you do not create a ring mapping, the default ring tones are used. If the C&C08 switch functions as the LE, you need not set the ring mapping, because the ring modes set on the C&C08 switch are the same as the ring tones set on the UA5000. Currently, the following three types of ring-stop modes are supported: l a:b a: ring duration b: stop duration l a:b:c:d a: ring duration
l l
b: stop duration c: ring duration d: stop duration l a:b:c:d:e:f a: ring duration b: stop duration c: ring duration d: stop duration e: ring duration f: stop duration
16.2 Configuration Example of the V5 Voice Service

This topic describes how to configure a V5 interface and the V5 voice subscriber data on the UA5000. In this way, the voice service is transmitted upstream to the exchange for processing so that the voice subscribers can call each other.
Context
The V5 parameters must be the same on the AN and the LE.
NOTE
For the cascaded interfaces, the AN_V5 interface is the upper-level interface of the LE_V5. Therefore, the parameter upperv5id of the LE_V5 must be configured. The AN_V5 interface does not have an upperlevel V5 interface, and it is not required to configure this parameter.
Networking
Figure 16-1 shows the example network of the V5 voice service.
NOTE
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
228
Figure 16-1 Example network of the V5 voice service

LE
V5 link1 P V M B
V5 link2 P V M B
0/13 A 3 2
UA5000
Phone A
Phone B
Data Plan
Table 16-1 provides the data plan for configuring the V5 voice service. Table 16-1 Data for configuring the V5 voice service Data Type V5 interface Item Interface ID Protocol version Interface type Interface variable ID of the PSTN C channel ID of the logical C channel Data 0 V5.2 AN_V5 0 0 0/4/0: 0 0/5/0: It need not be specified. Number of the timeslot occupied by the physical C channel Protection group type 0/4/0: 16 0/5/0: 16 0/4/0: protection group I active 0/5/0: protection group I standby Narrowband service board Subscriber
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
Slot of A32 board PSTN subscribers
0/13 L3 address: 8, 9
229
Data Type
Item
Data Telephone numbers: 12340000-12340001
User-defined ring Ring Peer parameter Cadence ring mode
Ring duration: 0 ms 0 0: normal ring
Figure 16-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the V5 voice service. Figure 16-2 Flowchart for configuring the V5 voice service
Start Query the status of the V5 interface
(Optional) Set E1 port CRC4
Add a slave shelf
(Optional Set E1 port impedance
Add an inter-shelf link
Add a V5 interface
Confirm the boards
Set the V5 interface attributes
Load softwares to the boards
Add 2M V5 links
Query the status of the boards
Configure logic C channels
Add narrowband service boards
Reset the V5 interface
Configure subscriber data
End
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
230

NOTE
The steps in dashed line frames are for adding a slave shelf. If there is no slave shelf on the UA5000, skip the steps.
Procedure
Step 1 (Optional) Configure CRC4 for the E1 port.
NOTE
The configuration must be same as the configuration on the LE side. Otherwise, the CRC4 may fail.
huawei(config)#interface pvm 0/4 huawei(config-if-pvm-0/4)#crc4 0
Step 2 (Optional) Configure the impedance attributes of the E1 port.

huawei(config-if-pvm-0/4)#quit huawei(config)#esl user huawei(config-esl-user)#pstnport electric set 0/13/0 impedance 2 current 6 huawei(config-esl-user)#quit
Step 3 Add a V5 interface.

huawei(config)#interface v5 0 Are you sure to add V5 interface? (y/n)[n]:y huawei(config-if-v5-0)#
Step 4 Configure the V5 interface attributes.

huawei(config-if-v5-0)#if-v5 attribute an_v5 v52 0 0 -------------------------------------------------------------------------IF ID IF type Superior IF ID IF Desc 0 AN_V5 -1 Protocol Version Variable Code PSTN C-channel ID V5.2 0 0 Start link identification: Timed starting In restarting In re-provisioning In link restoration no no no no --------------------------------------------------------------------------
Step 5 Add links.

huawei(config-if-v5-0)#link add 0/4/0 1 huawei(config-if-v5-0)#link add 0/5/0 2
Step 6 Configure physical C channels.

huawei(config-if-v5-0)#c-channel add 0/4/0 tsno 16 1:protc1_act 0 huawei(config-if-v5-0)#c-channel add 0/5/0 tsno 16 2:protc1_std
Step 7 Reset the V5 interface.

huawei(config-if-v5-0)#reset Are you sure to reset V5 interface?(y/n)[n]:y This operation will take some time,please wait ......
Step 8 Configure the ringing mode.

huawei(config-if-v5-0)#ringmode add 0 128
Step 9 Configure a user-defined ringing mode.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
231

NOTE
You can change the 16 user-defined ringing modes to the required ringing modes, but you cannot add a ringing mode. In the global config mode, run the user defined-ring modify command to change a user-defined ringing mode.
huawei(config-if-v5-0)#quit huawei(config)#user defined-ring modify 0 para1 0
Step 10 Add a A32 board and confirm it.

huawei(config)#board add 0/13 a32 huawei(config)#board confirm 0/13
Step 11 Configure the subscriber data.

huawei(config)#narrow user huawei(config-narrow-user)#pstnuser add 0/13/0 0 8 telno 12340000 huawei(config-narrow-user)#pstnuser add 0/13/1 0 9 telno 12340001

huawei(config-narrow-user)#quit huawei(config)#save
----End
Result
1. Verify whether the V5 interface attributes are configured successfully.
huawei(config)#interface v5 0 huawei(config-if-v5-0)#display if-v5 state -------------------------------------------------------------------------V5 interface state: Interface normal V5 interface ID value 0 0 Primary link ID number 1 2 V5 interface type AN_V5 Secondary link ID 2 V5 Interface link Current variable
Starting link identification: Interface timed starting : no no Start after re-provisioning: no no
start in interface starting : Start after link restoration:
States of protocol data links under V5 protocol PSTN protocol data link state : normal Control protocol data link state : normal BCC protocol data link state : normal Link control protocol data link state : normal Protection protocol data link 1 state : normal Protection protocol data link 2 state : unusable Logic C-
Data link Data link Data link Data link Data link Data link
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
232

channel: C-channel type 0 ACT Bearer protocol: C-channel ISDN_F 0 0
frame/slot/port/TS 0 /4 /0 /16
Protection group GROUP1-
PSTN CTRL BCC PROTECT LINKCTRL ISDN_Ds ISDN_P 1 1 1 1 1 0 0
Standby physical Cchannel: Serial No. frame/slot/port/TS type 0 0 /5 /0 /16 STD
Protection group GROUP1-
--------------------------------------------------------------------------
2.
Verify whether the E1 link is normal.

huawei(config-if-v5-0)#display link state -------------------------------------------------------------------------ID. CRC4 Link FSM Local LID state -------------------------------------------------------------------------1 yes Link fault Link ID not requested 2 no Link fault Link ID not requested --------------------------------------------------------------------------
16.3 Configuring a PSTN Subscriber

After configuring the v5 interface, configure the public switched telephone network (PSTN) subscriber data on the V5 interface so that the PSTN subscribers can call each other.
Prerequisite
The V5 interface must be configured properly. For details, see "16.2 Configuration Example of the V5 Voice Service."
Procedure
Step 1 Run the narrow user command to enter the narrow user mode. Step 2 Run the pstnuser add command to add a PSTN subscriber or run the pstnuser batadd command to add the PSTN subscribers in batches. Step 3 Run the display user data command to query the PSTN subscriber data. Step 4 Run the pstnport attribute set command to set the PSTN port attributes. Step 5 Run the display pstnport attribute command to query the PSTN port attributes. ----End
Example
The following example describes how to configure a PSTN subscriber. Table 16-2 provides the data plan for configuring a PSTN subscriber.
Table 16-2 Data plan for configuring a PSTN subscriber Data Type A32 board V5 interface PSTN subscriber Item Shelf ID/slot ID/port ID V5 interface ID L3 address Telephone number PSTN port Supports polarity reversal Data 0/13/0 0 8 12340000 Support
huawei(config)#narrow user huawei(config-narrow-user)#pstnuser add 0/13/0 0 8 telno 12340000 huawei(config-narrow-user)#display user data 0/13/0 -----------------------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port V5ID L3_Addr V5.1 Ts Telephone Number -----------------------------------------------------------------0 / 13 / 0 0 8 12340000 -----------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-narrow-user)#pstnport attribute set 0/13/0 polarity-reverse support huawei(config-narrow-user)#display pstnport attribute 0/13/0 ------------------------------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port Gain(db) Dial-Mode Polarity-Reverse User-Type ------------------------------------------------------------------------0 / 10 / 0 High gain DTMF-Pulse-Both Supported DEL -------------------------------------------------------------------------
16.4 Configuring an ISDN Subscriber

After configuring the V5 interface, configure the ISDN subscriber data on the V5 interface so that the UA5000 can support the ISDN BRA and ISDN PRA access services.
Prerequisite
l l The V5 interface parameters must be configured properly. For details, see "16.2 Configuration Example of the V5 Voice Service." The ISDN port group number must be added. To add the ISDN port group number, run the isdn-channel add command.
Procedure
l The procedure for configuring an ISDN BRA subscriber is as follows: 1. 2. 3. l 1. 2.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
Run the narrow user command to enter the narrow user mode. Run the brauser add command to add an ISDN BRA subscriber or run the brauser batadd command to add the ISDN BRA subscribers in batches. Run the display user data command to query the ISDN BRA subscriber data. Run the narrow user command to enter the narrow user mode. Run the prauser add command to add an ISDN PRA subscriber.
The procedure for configuring an ISDN PRA subscriber is as follows:
3. ----End
Run the display user data command to query the ISDN PRA subscriber data.
Example
The following example describes how to configure an ISDN BRA subscriber. Table 16-3 provides the data plan configuring an ISDN BRA subscriber. Table 16-3 Data plan for configuring an ISDN BRA subscriber Data Type DSL board V5 interface ISDN BRA subscriber Item Shelf ID/slot ID V5 interface ID EF address ISDN port group number Telephone number Data 0/15 0 0 0 12345678
huawei(config)#narrow user huawei(config-narrow-user)#brauser add 0/15/0 0 0 0 telno 12345678 huawei(config-narrow-user)#display user data 0/15/0 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port V5ID EF_Addr PortGrpNo R.Pwr V51Ts1/2 Telephone Number ---------------------------------------------------------------------------0 / 15 / 0 0 0 0 No 12345678 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
The following example describes how to configure an ISDN PRA subscriber. Table 16-4 provides the data plan for configuring an ISDN PRA subscriber. Table 16-4 Data plan for configuring an ISDN PRA subscriber Data Type EDTB board V5 interface ISDN PRA subscriber Item Shelf ID/slot ID V5 interface ID EF address ISDN port group number E1 port Shelf ID/slot ID/port ID Data 0/5 0 0 0 0/5/2
huawei(config)#narrow user huawei(config-narrow-user)#prauser add 0/5/2 0 0 0 huawei(config-narrow-user)#display user data 0/5/2 -----------------------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port V5ID EFAddr PortGrpNo ServiceType -----------------------------------------------------------------0 / 5 / 2 0 0 0 PRA ------------------------------------------------------------------
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
235
16.5 Blocking a V5 Service Port

You can block a V5 service port by blocking the shelf number/slot number/port number, V5 interface ID + L3 address, or V5 interface ID + EF address.
Precaution
If any subscriber is already added to a V5 service port, performing such an operation may interrupt the ongoing call on that port.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the narrow user command to enter the Narrow user mode. Step 2 Run the block command to block the V5 service port. ----End
Example
To block the V5 port with the v5id of 1 and the L3 address (namely, the available protocol address on the V5 port) of 11234, do as follows:
huawei(config)#narrow user huawei(config-narrow-user)#block delay 1 l3 1234
Related Operation
To... Unblock the V5 port Loop back the V5 port Run the Command... undo block loop
16.6 Configuring the Loopback for a V5 Service Port

You can configure the loopback for a V5 service port and locate the subscriber line faults or network transmission faults based on the voice quality.
Prerequisite
The parameters related to the V5 interface must be configured. For details, see "16.2 Configuration Example of the V5 Voice Service."
Context
l The local loopback can be performed on the V5 service port after the offhook. That is, the subscribers of the port can hear only their own voice after they take the phone off the hook. The subscribers can check the line status based on the voice quality.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
The remote loopback can be performed on the V5 service port after the conversation starts. That is, the subscriber of the port cannot hear any voice, and the subscribers of the peer end hear their own voice. The subscriber of the peer end can check the network transmission status based on the voice quality. The loopback tag is removed when the V5 service port is faulty, recovered, and reset. During the loopback, the subscriber data cannot be changed or deleted. A conversation does not affect the loopback tag of the V5 service port.
l l l
Precaution
The loopback cannot be performed when the V5 service port is faulty or the timeslot is not occupied.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the narrow user command to enter the narrow user mode. Step 2 Run the loop command to perform the loopback on the V5 service port. ----End
Example
To perform the remote loopback on the V5 service port with the ID 1 and the 13 address (namely, the available protocol address on the V5 port) 1234, do as follows:
huawei(config)#narrow user huawei(config-narrow-user)#loop remote 1 l3 1234
Related Operation
To... Block the V5 port Run the Command... block
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
237
17 Configuring the SPC
17
About This Chapter
Configuring the SPC
This topic describes the application of the SPC technology and provides examples for configuring the common SPC service and U port transparent transmission service. 17.1 Introduction to the SPC The semi-permanent connection (SPC) is used to connect, release, check, and protect one or more 64 KB communication channels between the ports of different boards or between different ports of a same board. 17.2 Configuration Example of the Common SPC This topic describes how to set up a common SPC between port 0/13/0/0 and port 0/15/0/0 on the UA5000 (in this example, the SPC type is private.) Thus, when outer-group subscriber A calls intra-group subscriber B, subscriber A does not need the two-stage dialing or the assistance of the operator. 17.3 Configuration Example of the U Interface Transparent Transmission In this example, the UA5000 is configured with two DSL boards. One DSL board is connected to the DDN node machine through the U interface. The services on the U interface are transmitted transparently to the terminal that is connected to the other DSL board through the SPC. Thus, the transmission distance of the DDN node machine can be extended.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
238
17.1 Introduction to the SPC

The semi-permanent connection (SPC) is used to connect, release, check, and protect one or more 64 KB communication channels between the ports of different boards or between different ports of a same board.
Service Description
The SPC occupies dedicated voice channels to meet the requirements of special and important access users and ensure the quality of the service. The UA5000 supports a common SPC between the narrowband service ports. The common SPCs include internal SPC (an-spc), private SPC (an-private), V5-SPC (v5-spc), and V5-pre SPC (v5pre). U interface transparent transmission is a type of internal SPC.
Table 17-1 lists the mapping between the SPC application type and the SPC type. Table 17-1 Mapping between the SPC application type and the SPC type Service Type Hotline telephone SPC for connecting the subscriber on the LE side Narrowband data service, including U interface transparent transmission and V.35 connection Voice frequency telephone service Z interface extension PBX bi-directional interconnection Transparent transmission for E&M trunk service Hotline telephone for the E&M trunk interface SPC Application Type hotline normal normal SPC Type private V5-spc or V5-pre an-spc
normal Z-extension PBX-bothway normal EM-signal
an-spc private private an-spc private
Table 17-2 lists the mapping between the SPC type and the port type. Table 17-2 Mapping between the SPC type and the port type SPC Type an-spc
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
Port Type PSTN, 2B+D, E1, V5TK, G.SHDSL, VFB

SPC Type private V5-spc V5-pre
Port Type PSTN, E1, V5TK, CDI PSTN, 2B+D PSTN
A port can be configured with both common access service and SPC service; however, a port can be configured with only one service at a time. To set up an SPC, pay attention to the following restrictions on the channel ID. l l l If the start or the end port of the SPC is a PSTN port, the channel ID at the PSTN port is 0. If the start or the end port of the SPC is a V5TK port, the channel ID at the V5TK port cannot be 0 or the ID of channel C. If the start or the end port of the SPC is an E1 port, the channel ID at the E1 port cannot be 0.
17.2 Configuration Example of the Common SPC

This topic describes how to set up a common SPC between port 0/13/0/0 and port 0/15/0/0 on the UA5000 (in this example, the SPC type is private.) Thus, when outer-group subscriber A calls intra-group subscriber B, subscriber A does not need the two-stage dialing or the assistance of the operator.
Context
Subscribers A and B must be configured on different ports of one board or on different ports of different boards.
Networking
Figure 17-1 shows the example network of the common SPC. Figure 17-1 Example network of the common SPC
0/13 P UA5000 V M B P V M B A 3 2 0/15 A 3 2
Phone A
Phone B
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
240
Data Plan
Table 17-3 provides the data plan for configuring an SPC between subscriber A and subscriber B. Table 17-3 Data Plan for configuring an SPC Item Application type SPC type Start port of the SPC End port of the SPC Total number of channels for the SPC Data normal private 0/13/0/0 0/15/0/0 1
Figure 17-2 shows the flowchart for configuring a common SPC. Figure 17-2 Flowchart for configuring a common SPC
Start
Add boards
Confirm the boards
Configure an SPC
End
Procedure
Step 1 Add A32 boards.
huawei(config)#board add 0/13 a32 huawei(config)#board add 0/15 a32
Step 2 Confirm the A32 boards.


huawei(config)#board confirm 0/13 huawei(config)#board confirm 0/15
Step 3 Configure an SPC between subscriber A and subscriber B.

huawei(config)#spc add private start 0/13/0/0 end 0/15/0/0 1 normal

huawei(config)#save
----End
Result
After the SPC between subscriber A and subscriber B is set up, subscriber B should hear the ring tone when subscriber A picks up the phone.
17.3 Configuration Example of the U Interface Transparent Transmission

In this example, the UA5000 is configured with two DSL boards. One DSL board is connected to the DDN node machine through the U interface. The services on the U interface are transmitted transparently to the terminal that is connected to the other DSL board through the SPC. Thus, the transmission distance of the DDN node machine can be extended.
Context
l l Only the PVMD supports U interface transparent transmission, whereas the PVMB does not support U interface transparent transmission. The port on the DSL board that is connected to the network must work in the MNT mode, whereas the port on the DSL board that is connected to the subscriber must work in the MLT mode.
Networking
Figure 17-3 shows the example network for configuring the U interface transparent transmission.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
242
Figure 17-3 Example network for configuring the U interface transparent transmission
DDN node
U interface
0/8 P P UA5000 V V M M D D A D
0/11 D S L A A S S L L
S S L L
U interface
Customer A
Data Plan
Table 17-4 provides the data plan for configuring the U interface transparent transmission. Table 17-4 Data plan for configuring the U interface transparent transmission Port or Device DSL board connected to the network DSL board connected to the subscriber SPC Item Shelf ID/slot ID Shelf ID/slot ID Application type SPC type Start shelf ID/slot ID/port ID/channel ID End shelf ID/slot ID/port ID/ channel ID Total number of channels
Data 0/8 0/11 normal an-spc 0/8/0/0 0/11/0/0 2

243
Port or Device
Item Subtype of the start port Subtype of the end port
Data MNT MLT
Figure 17-4 shows the flowchart for configuring the U interface transparent transmission. Figure 17-4 Flowchart for configuring the U interface transparent transmission
Start
Add boards
Confirm the boards
Configure an SPC
End
Procedure
Step 1 Add two DSL boards.
huawei(config)#board add 0/8 dsl huawei(config)#board add 0/11 dsl
Step 2 Confirm the DSL boards.

Step 3 Configure an SPC.

huawei(config)#spc add an-spc start 0/8/0/0 end 0/11/0/0 2 normal startportsubtype mnt endportsubtype mlt

huawei(config)#save
----End
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
244
Result
The DSL board helps to extend the transmission distance of the U interface of the DDN node machine. This ensures that the coverage of the services is extended.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
245
18 Configuring the DDI Service
18
About This Chapter
Configuring the DDI Service
Configuring the direct dialing in (DDI) service includes the application of the DDI technology and the process for configuring the DDI service on the UA5000. 18.1 Introduction to the DDI Service In the DDI service, the call can be connected to the extension directly without the two-stage dialing and the assistance of an operator. 18.2 Configuration Example of the DDI Service This topic describes how to configure the DDI service by adding a CDI board to the UA5000 and then configuring the DDI subscribers on the MG interface. The DDI subscriber to which each port corresponds is an intra-group subscriber. Thus, outer-group subscriber A can call intragroup subscriber B without the two-stage dialing.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
246
18.1 Introduction to the DDI Service

In the DDI service, the call can be connected to the extension directly without the two-stage dialing and the assistance of an operator.
Service Description
You can connect the UA5000 to an enterprise PBX through an analog trunk interface provided by a CDI board, as shown in Figure 18-1. In this way, the UA5000 realizes the DDI service. An outer-group subscriber can dial the access code of the enterprise (PBX pilot number) + PBX extension number to call an intra-group subscriber through DDI. Hence, no two-stage dialing or operator assistance is involved in this process. The UA5000 provides a channel for directly calling the PBX through the CDI board. The UA5000 also provides an emergency channel. The UA5000 VoIP subscribers can call the PSTN subscribers through the emergency channels provided by the CDI board in the case of network failure (such as physical line failure or disconnection from the MGC), as shown in Figure 18-1. Figure 18-1 DDI service application
MGC Appserver
NMS
Enterprise 2 UA5000
UA5000
Enterprise 1
PBX
The UA5000 supports the DDI service only when it uses the H. 248 protocol.
18.2 Configuration Example of the DDI Service

This topic describes how to configure the DDI service by adding a CDI board to the UA5000 and then configuring the DDI subscribers on the MG interface. The DDI subscriber to which each port corresponds is an intra-group subscriber. Thus, outer-group subscriber A can call intragroup subscriber B without the two-stage dialing.
Prerequisite
The data on the MGC must be configured.
Precaution
You can set certain ports on the CDI board as DDI channels and other ports as emergency channels. You cannot, however, set a port as a DDI channel and an emergency channel at the same time.
Networking
The UA5000 provides voice services through the voice access ports on the ASL boards. The voice signals are processed by the PVMB board, and then transmitted to the upper layer network. Figure 18-2 shows the example network of the DDI service.
NOTE
Figure 18-2 Example network of the DDI service

MGC
UA5000
P P V V M M B B
A S L
P P V V M M B B
C D I
A S L
UA5000
PBX
Phone A Phone B
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
248
Data Plan
Table 18-1 provides the data plan for configuring the DDI service. Table 18-1 Data plan for configuring the DDI service Item UA5000 Gateway of the UA5000 MGC Data 10.10.10.2/24 10.10.10.1/24 10.10.20.1/24 MGC port: 2944 MG MG ID: 0 Domain name: UA5000.com Code: text Protocol: H.248 Transfer: udp MG port: 2944 start-negotiate-version Remarks Uplink FE port (fast Ethernet port) The default gateway for service upstream 2
Context
l l l The terminal ID of the DDI user must be the same as the ID configured on the MGC. If the MG interface does not support the terminal layer configuration, the terminal IDs of the DDI users must be numbered within the MG interface. If the MG interface supports the terminal layer configuration, you need not set a terminal ID because the system generates a protocol address automatically.
Figure 18-3 shows the flowchart for configuring the DDI service.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
249
Figure 18-3 Flowchart for configuring the DDI service

Start
Add a CDI board
Configure the attributes of the CDI port

Configure the DDI subscriber data
Save the data
End
Procedure
Step 1 Add a CDI board.
huawei(config)#board add 0/11 cdi huawei(config)#board confirm 0/11
Step 2 Add and configure the MG interface data.

NOTE
For the procedure for configuring an MG interface, see "9 Configuring the MG Interface".
huawei(config)#interface h248 0 Are you sure to add MG interface?(y/n)[n]:y huawei(config-if-h248-0)#if-h248 attribute mgip 10.10.10.2 mgport 2944 code text transfer udp domainName UA5000.com mgcip_1 10.10.20.1 mgcport_1 2944 mg-media-ip 10.10.10.4 start-negotiate-version 2 huawei(config-if-h248-0)#reset coldstart Are you sure to reset MG interface?(y/n)[n]:y huawei(config-if-h248-0)# Reset MG interface 0 success!
Step 3 (Optional) Query the status of the MG interface.

huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display if-h248 attribute --------------------------------------------------------------------MGID 0 MG Description MG DomainName UA5000.com Protocol H248 H248version Negotiated Originally 2 Profile Negotiation Para disable Profile 1:Resv1("") 2833Encrypt Codetype Transmode HeartBeatTimer(s) HeartBeatRetransTimes HeartBeatRetransTimer(s) MG signalling IP Text UDP 60 3 60 10.10.10.2
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
250

MG signalling Port MG media IP MIDType DeviceName 2944 10.10.10.4 IP4_ADDR -
Step 4 Quit the MG interface mode and enter the ESL user mode.
huawei(config-if-h248-0)#quit huawei(config)#esl user huawei(config-esl-user)#
Step 5 Add and configure the DDI subscriber data.

huawei(config-esl-user)#mgddiuser add 0/11/0 0 151 huawei(config-esl-user)#display port state 0/11/0 -------------------------------------------------------------------------F / S/ P Type State SvcState SvcType UserType MgID ProtocolID -------------------------------------------------------------------------0/11/0 CDI Idle StartService InstSvc MG 0 151 -------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config-esl-user)#quit
Step 6 (Optional) Configure the attributes of the DDI port.

huawei(config)#cdi huawei(config-cdi)#port attribute set 0/11/0 dialmode PULSE huawei(config-cdi)#quit

huawei(config)#save
----End
Result
The DDI service configuration of subscriber A and subscriber B is complete. Subscriber A should be able to call subscriber B by dialing the access code (PBX pilot number) of the company + PBX extension number of subscriber B.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
251
19 Configuring the SDL Service
19
About This Chapter
Configuring the SDL Service
Configuring the SDL service includes the application of the SDL board and the process for configuring the SDL service through the SDL board on the UA5000. 19.1 Introduction to the SDL Service The UA5000 provides different SDL services, including the N x 64 k (N ranges from 1 to 32) data service and E1 access service through the SDL/SDLE board. 19.2 Configuration Example of the Normal SDL Service This topic describes how to configure the two routers connected to the two SDL boards through the SHDSL terminals so that the routers can communicate with each other.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
252
19.1 Introduction to the SDL Service

The UA5000 provides different SDL services, including the N x 64 k (N ranges from 1 to 32) data service and E1 access service through the SDL/SDLE board.
Service Description
The UA5000 provides the N x 64 k (N ranges from 1 to 32) data services and E1 services through the SDL/SDLE board. The service data is sent through SPCs, which are set up between G.SHDSL ports on the SDL/SDLE board and other service ports. The SDL/SDLE board supports two types of SPCs: intra-board SPCs and inter-board SPCs. l l An intra-board SPC is set up between G.SHDSL ports, E1 ports, or a G.SHDSL port and an E1 port on one SDL/SDLE board. An inter-board SPC is set up between a port on one SDL/SDLE board and a G.SHDSL port on the other SDL/SDLE board, or between a port on one SDL/SDLE board and an E1 port on the PVMB or PVMD board.
The SDL/SDLE board can work in the normal mode or the transmission mode. l l The SDL board provides four G.SHDSL ports and four E1 ports. The SDLE board provides eight G.SHDSL ports and eight E1 ports.
The G.SHDSL ports provided by the SDL/SDLE board work in the FE1 or V.35 mode to extend the transmission distance of the E1 or V.35 services.
19.2 Configuration Example of the Normal SDL Service

This topic describes how to configure the two routers connected to the two SDL boards through the SHDSL terminals so that the routers can communicate with each other.
Networking
Figure 19-1 shows the example network of the SDL normal service.
NOTE
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
253
Figure 19-1 Example network of the SDL normal service

LE DDN E1/V5 0/8 0/9 SS D D L L
PP VV MM BB SHDSL terminal
SHDSL terminal V.35/E1
Router
Router
Data Plan
Table 19-1 provides the data plan for configuring the SDL normal service. Table 19-1 Data plan for configuring the SDL normal service Interface or Device SDL board Item Shelf/Slot Running mode Clock source SHDSL port SPC Clock mode Service type Connection type Start shelf number/ slot number/port number/channel number End shelf number/ slot number/port number/channel number Channel number Data 0/8 and 0/9 normal system E1 mode normal an-spc 0/8/4/1 Remarks Normal mode system clock Normal application Internal SPC -
0/9/4/1
10
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
254
Context
When you configure the application of the SDL normal service, the running mode of the SDL board must be normal. The SPC on the SDL board has the following limitations based on the service mode. l l l l l The intra-board SPC of the SDL board supports a maximum of 32 timeslots. The minimum timeslot number is occupied first for both the start and the end timeslots of the SPC. The intra-board SPC from SDL to SDL supports a maximum of 30 timeslots. The minimum timeslot number is occupied first for both the start and the end timeslots of the SPC. If the SDL board is configured with the inter-board SPC service, use the system clock. When the transport mode is configured for the SDL board, do not select the SHDSL port as the clock source. When you create the inter-board SPC from PVM/EDTB to SDL, the following situations occur: The SPC from E1 port to V.35 port supports a maximum of 30 timeslots. At the start of the SPC, timeslot 3 of the port is occupied first. At the end, timeslot 0 is occupied first. The SPC from E1 port to FE1 port supports a maximum of 30 timeslots. At the start of the SPC, timeslot 1 of the port is occupied first. At the end, timeslot 1 is occupied first.
Figure 19-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the SDL service. Figure 19-2 Flowchart for configuring the SDL service
Start
Add SDL boards
Confirm the SDL boards
Configure the running mode of the boards Configure the clock source for the boards
Configure an SHDSL port
Set up an SPC
End
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
255
Precaution
When you are configuring the timeslot range for the SPC by running the spc addan-spc command, note that the timeslot of the SPC must be within the range of the G.SHDSL port rate. For example, if the port rate is 10, the timeslot range of the SPC must be 09.
Procedure
Step 1 Add SDL boards.
huawei(config)#board add 0/8 sdl huawei(config)#board add 0/9 sdl
Step 2 Confirm the SDL boards.

Step 3 Configure the running mode of the boards.

huawei(config)#interface sdl 0/8 huawei(config-if-sdl-0/8)#runmode normal clock line 0
Step 4 Configure the clock source of the board.

huawei(config-if-sdl-0/8)#clock source line 0 huawei(config-if-sdl-0/8)#display clock config -----------------------------------------------Board's clock source: FE1 line 0 clock ------------------------------------------------
Step 5 Configure an SHDSL port. l Query the configuration of the SHDSL port. If the running mode is the E1 mode, you need not change it.
huawei(config-if-sdl-0/8)#display port config -------------------------Port Frame Username -------------------------0 PCM31 1 PCM31 2 PCM31 3 PCM31 ---------------------------------Port Workmode Active Username ---------------------------------4 E1 Allow 5 E1 Allow 6 E1 Allow 7 E1 Allow ----------------------------------
l Query the configuration of the SHDSL port. If the running mode is the V.35 mode, change it to the E1 mode.
huawei(config-if-sdl-0/8)#display port config -------------------------Port Frame Username -------------------------0 PCM31 1 PCM31 2 PCM31 3 PCM31 ---------------------------------Port Workmode Active Username ---------------------------------4 V35 Allow user1
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
256
5 E1 Allow 6 E1 Allow 7 E1 Allow ---------------------------------huawei(config-if-sdl-0/8)#shdslport modify 4 runmode fe1
Step 6 Query the timeslot occupancy of the port (before creating the SPC, the timeslot is not occupied).
huawei(config-if-sdl-0/8)#display timeslot ---------------------------------------------------------| 0--7 | 8--15 | 16--23 | 24--31 | ---------------------------------------------------------FE1 line 0 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | FE1 line 1 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | FE1 line 2 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | FE1 line 3 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | SHDSL line 0 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | SHDSL line 1 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | SHDSL line 2 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | SHDSL line 3 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | ---------------------------------------------------------'0'-Not used; '1'-Used ----------------------------------------------------------
Step 7 Repeat Steps 36 to configure the SDL board on shelf 0/slot 9. Step 8 Set up an SPC.
huawei(config)#spc add an-spc start 0/8/4/1 end 0/9/4/1 10 normal huawei(config)#interface sdl 0/8 huawei(config-if-sdl-0/8)#display timeslot ---------------------------------------------------------| 0--7 | 8--15 | 16--23 | 24--31 | ---------------------------------------------------------FE1 line 0 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | FE1 line 1 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | FE1 line 2 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | FE1 line 3 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | SHDSL line 0 | 01111111 | 11100000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | SHDSL line 1 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | SHDSL line 2 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | SHDSL line 3 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | 00000000 | ---------------------------------------------------------'0'-Not used; '1'-Used ----------------------------------------------------------
----End
Result
The routers connected to the two SDL boards should be able to communicate with each other.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
257
20 Configuring the MTA Service
20
About This Chapter
Configuring the MTA Service
Configuring the multifunctional terminal adapter (MTA) service includes the application of the MTA technology and the process for configuring the MTA service on the UA5000. 20.1 Introduction to the MTA Service The UA5000 supports accessing the subscriber data service through the multifunctional terminal adapter (MTA). 20.2 Configuration Example of the MTA Service This topic describes how to add the MTA on port 0/8/0 and port 0/11/0 on the UA5000 so that subscribers connected to port 0/8/0 and port 0/11/0 can exchange data.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
258
20.1 Introduction to the MTA Service

The UA5000 supports accessing the subscriber data service through the multifunctional terminal adapter (MTA).
Service Description
The UA5000 provides the following ports through the MTA: l l 64 kbit/s and 128 kbit/s rate synchronous ports 2.4 kbit/s, 4.8 kbit/s, 9.6 kbit/s, and 19.2 kbit/s sub-rate synchronous or asynchronous ports
In this way, the UA5000 provides the data terminal subscribers with the physical communication channels between the data terminal subscribers and the DDN network or other data terminal subscribers.
The MTA is connected to the DSL board through the 2B1Q interface. On the subscriber side, the MTA provides one V.35/V.24 compatible port and two V.24 ports. The three ports can work only in the DCE mode. l V.35/V.24 compatible port (port 0): It is a DB25 socket, which directly provides the V.24 port (or the DCE-DTE cross over cable can be used). The port supports the synchronous rate of 64 kbit/s, and the synchronous/asynchronous rates of 19.2 kbit/s, 9.6 kbit/s, 4.8 kbit/ s, and 2.4 kbit/s. The port functions as a V.35 port through the V.35 transit cable, and supports the rates of 128 kbit/s and 64 kbit/s. V.24 ports (ports 1 and 2) are RJ45 socket (8-pin RJ-45 socket). The ports function as the V.24 ports through the RJ45-DB25 transit cable. The ports support the synchronous rate of 64 kbit/s, and the synchronous/asynchronous rates of 19.2 kbit/s, 9.6 kbit/s, 4.8 kbit/s, and 2.4 kbit/s. The rate of 19.2 kbit/s is not recommended for port 2 (refer to the X.50 protocol).
The data devices that are connected directly to the MTA must have the standard V.24/RS-232 serial ports, or the V.35 serial ports. The devices include the following: l l l l Router PC Front end processor Other data terminal equipment (DTE)
20.2 Configuration Example of the MTA Service

This topic describes how to add the MTA on port 0/8/0 and port 0/11/0 on the UA5000 so that subscribers connected to port 0/8/0 and port 0/11/0 can exchange data.
Prerequisite
Bit 2 of the DIP switch on the MTA must be set to ON so that port 0 on the MTA works in the V.24 mode.
Precaution
l l Before connecting a DTE, make sure that the port type, the DIP switches, and the cable are correct. Otherwise, the ports on the UA5000 and the DTE may be damaged. The power of the MTA must map the MTA.
Networking
Figure 20-1 shows the example network of the MTA service. Figure 20-1 Example network of the MTA service
LE
E1/V5
0/8
0/11
UA5000
P P V V M M B B
D S L
D S L
A A S S L L
MTA
MTA
Computer A
Computer B
Data Plan
Table 20-1 provides the data plan for configuring the MTA service. Table 20-1 Data plan for configuring the MTA service Data Type DSL board MTA port DSL board Item Shelf ID/slot ID Shelf ID/slot ID/port ID Channel number Rate of channel 0
Data 0/8, 0/11 0/8/0, 0/11/0 0 19200 bit/s

260
Data Type
Item Asynchronous word length of channel 0 Synchronous or asynchronous selection of the channel
Data 10 asyn Common application Internal SPC 0/8/0/0 0/11/0/0 1
SPC
Application type SPC type Start shelf ID/slot ID/port ID/ channel ID End shelf ID/slot ID/port ID/ channel ID Total number of channels
Figure 20-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the MTA service. Figure 20-2 Flowchart for configuring the MTA service
Start
Add an MTA
Modify the attributes of the MTA Query the settings of the MTA channels
Set up an SPC
End
Procedure
Step 1 Add an MTA.
huawei(config)#mta add 0/8/0 huawei(config)#display mta ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
261
Frame/Slot/Port status Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 0 /8/0 Normal Syn 4.8K Unavail Unavail ------------------------------------------------------------------------Total: 1 MTA, 1 normal, 0 fault, 0 unknown ------------------------------------------------------------------
Step 2 Modify the attributes of the MTA.

huawei(config)#mta modify 0/8/0 channelNo 0 asyn_len 10 mode asyn rate 19200
Step 3 Query the settings of the MTA channels.

huawei(config)#display mta 0/8/0 -----------------------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port mmunication status protocol 0 /8 /0 Normal X.50 S bit loop Channel 0: Mode:Asyn Rate:19.2K Port type:DCE Clock type:Internal mode Signal phase: Data receive In-phase Data send In-phase Clock receive Inphase Clock send In-phase Data length:10 B channel: B1 Involve phase:Sequence phase Channel 1: Unavailable Channel 2: Unavailable
Step 4 Repeat steps 1 to 3 to configure the other MTA on port 0/11/0. Step 5 Set up an SPC.
huawei(config)#spc add an-spc start 0/8/0/0 end 0/11/0/0 1 normal
----End
Result
Connect the two MTAs to two computers, and set the baud rate of the HyperTerminal to 19200 bit/s and do not set any flow control. The computers can send data to the MTAs and receive data from the MTAs through the serial ports.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
262
21 Configuring the VFB Service
21
About This Chapter
Configuring the VFB Service
Configuring the VFB service includes the application of the VFB technology and the process for configuring the VFB service on the UA5000. 21.1 Introduction to the VFB Service The UA5000 supports the audio telephone service through the VFB board. 21.2 Configuration Example of the VFB Service This topic describes how to configure two VFB boards on the UA5000 to set up an SPC between port 0/8/0 and port 0/12/0. Thus, subscribers connected to port 0/8/0 and port 0/12/0 are connected through a private line.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
263
21.1 Introduction to the VFB Service

The UA5000 supports the audio telephone service through the VFB board.
Service Description
The UA5000 transmits voice or data services over the voice frequency (VF) channel in a private network.
The UA5000 provides point-to-point VF channels. You can connect a VF phone or modem to each end of the channel to implement the private line interconnection of the voice or data services.
21.2 Configuration Example of the VFB Service

This topic describes how to configure two VFB boards on the UA5000 to set up an SPC between port 0/8/0 and port 0/12/0. Thus, subscribers connected to port 0/8/0 and port 0/12/0 are connected through a private line.
Networking
Figure 21-1 shows the example network of the VFB service.
NOTE
Figure 21-1 Example network of the VFB service

0/8 UA5000 P P V V M M B B V F B 0/12 V F B
VF telephone
VF telephone
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
264
Data Plan
Table 21-1 provides the data plan for configuring the VFB service. Table 21-1 Data plan for configuring the VFB service Data Type VFB board VFB port Item Shelf ID/slot ID/port ID Working mode Rx gain Tx gain SPC Application type SPC type Start shelf ID/slot ID/ port ID/channel ID End shelf ID/slot ID/ port ID/channel ID Total number of channels Data 0/8/0, 0/12/0 2-wire -6 dB +5 dB normal an-spc 0/8/0/0 0/12/0/0 1 Remarks 2-wire Common application Internal SPC -
Context
l l When modifying the working mode of the VFB port, you must delete the SPC that is set up on the port. When modifying other attributes on the VFB port, you need not delete the SPC that is set up on the port.
Figure 21-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the VFB service.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
265
Figure 21-2 Flowchart for configuring the VFB service

Start
Add VFB boards
Confirm the VFB boards
Configure the VFB port attributes
Set up an SPC
QoS qualified? Yes End
No
Modify the VFB port attributes
Procedure
Step 1 Add two VFB boards.
huawei(config)#board add 0/8 VFB huawei(config)#board add 0/12 VFB
Step 2 Confirm the two VFB boards.

Step 3 Configure the VFB port attributes.

huawei(config)#vfb huawei(config-vfb)#port attribute set 0/8/0 mode 2line receivegain 5 transmitgain 9 huawei(config-vfb)#display port attribute 0/8/0 -----------------------------------------Port Mode Resistance Receive Transmit -----------------------------------------0 Two line 600 -6dB +5dB -----------------------------------------huawei(config-vfb)#port attribute set 0/12/0 mode 2line receivegain 5 transmitgain 9 huawei(config-vfb)#display port attribute 0/12/0 -----------------------------------------Port Mode Resistance Receive Transmit
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
266

-----------------------------------------0 Two line 600 -6dB +5dB -----------------------------------------huawei(config-vfb)#quit
Step 4 Set up an SPC.

Step 5 (Optional) Modify the VFB port attributes. After the SPC is set up, the subscribers that are connected to the two ports can call each other. 1. If the voice of the peer end is very low, increase the Rx gain of the local end or the Tx gain of the peer end.
huawei(config)#vfb huawei(config-vfb)#port attribute set 0/8/0 receivegain 6 huawei(config-vfb)#display port attribute 0/8/0 -------------------------------------------------------Port Mode Resistance Receive Transmit Name -------------------------------------------------------0 Two line 600 -5dB +5dB --------------------------------------------------------
2.
If the voice of the peer end is very high and is distorted, decrease the Rx gain of the local end or the Tx gain of the peer end.
huawei(config-vfb)#port attribute set 0/8/0 receivegain 4 huawei(config-vfb)#display port attribute 0/8/0 ------------------------------------------------------Port Mode Resistance Receive Transmit Name -------------------------------------------------------0 Two line 600 -7dB +5dB --------------------------------------------------------
----End
Result
Subscribers connected to the two VFB boards should be able to call each other.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
267
22 Configuring the ATI Service
22
About This Chapter
Configuring the ATI Service
Configuring the ATI service includes the application of the ATI and the process for configuring the ATI service on the UA5000. 22.1 Introduction to the ATI Service The UA5000 supports the transparent transmission of the E&M signalings and the 2-wire/4-wire VF signals through the ATI board. 22.2 Configuration Example of the 2-Wire/4-Wire VF and E&M Trunk Service Transparent Transmission This topic describes how to configure two ATI boards on the UA5000, configure the subscriber line mode of ATI ports 0/7/0 and 0/13/0 to 2wire, and set up an SPC between the two ports. The SPC type is normal. Thus, the private line service of subscribers connected to port 0/7/0 and port 0/13/0 is implemented. 22.3 Configuration Example of the Hotline Service on the E&M Trunk Interface This topic describes how to configure two ATI boards on the UA5000, and set up an SPC between port 0/7/0 and port 0/13/0. The SPC type is the private line. Thus, subscribers connected to port 0/7/0 and port 0/13/0 can communicate with each other after taking the phones off the hook.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
268
22.1 Introduction to the ATI Service

The UA5000 supports the transparent transmission of the E&M signalings and the 2-wire/4-wire VF signals through the ATI board.
Service Description
The signaling channel and voice channel of the E&M trunk interface are separate. Therefore, when the E&M trunk interface is supported, a port includes the signaling line (E line and M line) and the voice frequency (VF) line. Where, l l The signaling line can be configured to support the Bell IV-type or V-type interface through DIP switch settings. The VF line can be configured to support the 4-wire or 2-wire interface through the DIP switch settings.
The ATI board provides six 2-wire/4-wire E&M trunk interfaces. Each interface of an ATI board provides the 2-wire/4-wire VF line or the 1E1M signaling line. When the E&M signaling line is not used, the 2-wire/4-wire VF line can be used separately for transmitting VF signals.
22.2 Configuration Example of the 2-Wire/4-Wire VF and E&M Trunk Service Transparent Transmission
This topic describes how to configure two ATI boards on the UA5000, configure the subscriber line mode of ATI ports 0/7/0 and 0/13/0 to 2wire, and set up an SPC between the two ports. The SPC type is normal. Thus, the private line service of subscribers connected to port 0/7/0 and port 0/13/0 is implemented.
Networking
Figure 22-1 shows the example network of the 2-wire/4-wire VF and E&M trunk service transparent transmission. Figure 22-1 Example network of the 2-wire/4-wire VF and E&M trunk service transparent transmission
0/7 P UA5000 V B P V B A T I 0/13 A T I
M M
E&M interface
E&M interface
Modem A
Modem B
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
269
Data Plan
Table 22-1 provides the data plan for configuring the 2-wire/4-wire VF and E&M trunk service transparent transmission. Table 22-1 Data plan for configuring the 2-wire/4-wire VF and E&M trunk service transparent transmission Data Type ATI board Item Shelf ID/slot ID of the board to which modem A is connected Shelf ID/slot ID of the board to which modem B is connected E&M interface Subscriber line mode EM working mode Rx gain Tx gain SPC Application type SPC type Start shelf ID/slot ID/port ID/ channel ID End shelf ID/slot ID/port ID/ channel ID Total number of channels Data 0/7 0/13 2-wire 1E1M -6 dB -2.5 dB normal an-spc 0/7/0/0 0/13/0/0 1 Remarks 2-wire Common application Internal SPC -
Context
l l Currently, the ATI board supports only the 1E1M mode. After modifying the EM mode and the subscriber line mode, adjust the DIP switches on the board.
Figure 22-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the ATI service.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
270
Figure 22-2 Flowchart for configuring the ATI service

Start
Add ATI boards
Confirm ATI boards
Configure the ATI port attributes
Set up an SPC
No
Modify the ATI port attributes
Procedure
Step 1 Add ATI boards.
huawei(config)#board add 0/7 ati huawei(config)#board add 0/13 ati
Step 2 Confirm the ATI boards.

Step 3 Configure the attributes of the ATI port to which subscriber A is connected.
huawei(config)#ati huawei(config-ati)#port attribute set 0/7/0 recvgain 28 transgain 9 workmode 1E1M userline 2Wire
Step 4 Configure the attributes of the ATI port to which subscriber B is connected.
huawei(config-ati)#port attribute set 0/13/0 recvgain 28 transgain 9 workmode 1E1M userline 2Wire
Step 5 Set up an SPC

----End
Result
Subscribers of the two terminals that are connected to the two modems should be able to call each other.
22.3 Configuration Example of the Hotline Service on the E&M Trunk Interface
This topic describes how to configure two ATI boards on the UA5000, and set up an SPC between port 0/7/0 and port 0/13/0. The SPC type is the private line. Thus, subscribers connected to port 0/7/0 and port 0/13/0 can communicate with each other after taking the phones off the hook.
Networking
Figure 22-3 shows the example network of the hotline service on the E&M trunk interface.
NOTE
Figure 22-3 Example network of the hotline service on the E&M trunk interface
0/7 P UA5000 V P V A T I 0/13 A T I
M M B B
PCM-MUX/PBX
Telephone A
Telephone B
Data Plan
Table 22-2 provides the data plan for configuring the hotline service on the E&M trunk service. Table 22-2 Data plan for configuring the hotline service on the E&M trunk service Data Type ATI board E&M interface Item Shelf ID/slot ID/port ID Subscriber line mode Rx gain
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
Data 0/7, 0/13 4-wire -10 dB
Remarks 4-wire 272
Data Type
Item Tx gain E&M working mode
Data +5 dB 1E1M em-signal private 0/7/0 0/13/0 1
Remarks EM signalling application Private line -
SPC
Application type SPC type Start shelf ID/slot ID/port ID End shelf ID/slot ID/port ID Total number of channels
Figure 22-4 shows the flowchart for configuring the ATI service. Figure 22-4 Flowchart for configuring the ATI service
Start
Add ATI boards
Confirm ATI boards
Configure the ATI port attributes
Set up an SPC
No
Modify the ATI port attributes
Procedure
Step 1 Add ATI boards.

huawei(config)#board add 0/7 ati huawei(config)#board add 0/13 ati
Step 2 Confirm the ATI boards.

Step 3 Configure the attributes of the ATI port to which subscriber A is connected.
huawei(config)#ati huawei(config-ati)#port attribute set 0/7/0 recvgain 20 transgain 24 userline 4Wire workmode 1E1M
Step 4 Configure the attributes of the ATI port to which subscriber B is connected.
huawei(config-ati)#port attribute set 0/13/0 recvgain 20 transgain 24 userline 4Wire workmode 1E1M

huawei(config)#spc add private start 0/7/0/0 end 0/13/0/0 1 em-signal
----End
Result
l l l l After subscriber A takes the phone off the hook, subscriber B hears the ringing tone and subscriber A hears the ring back tone. After subscriber B takes the phone off the hook, subscriber A and subscriber B can talk with each other over the phone. After one subscriber disconnects the call, the other subscriber hears the busy tone. When the service bearer channel between the two subscribers becomes faulty, the subscriber who takes the phone off the hook hears the busy tone.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
274
23 Configuring the CDI Service
23
About This Chapter
Configuring the CDI Service
Configuring the CDI service includes the function application of the CDI board and the process for configuring the CDI service through the CDI board on the UA5000. 23.1 Introduction to the CDI Service The UA5000 supports the transparent transmission between the analog subscriber ports through the CDI board. 23.2 Configuration Example of the Z Interface Extension Service This topic describes how to configure the CDI board and ASL board on the UA5000, and set up an SPC between the CDI board and the ASL board. The SPC type is Z-extension. Thus, the subscriber connected to the ASL board can be connected to a port on the CDI board through the SPC. 23.3 Configuration Example of the PBX-Bothway Service This topic describes how to configure the PBX-Bothway service to set up a private SPC between the ports on two CDI boards. Thus, the bothway service of the PBX-1 and PBX-2 subscribers is implemented.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
275
23.1 Introduction to the CDI Service

The UA5000 supports the transparent transmission between the analog subscriber ports through the CDI board.
Service Description
The CDI board implements the transparent extension of the POTS port (Z interface) of the connected LE between the CDI port and the ASL port through the following ways: l l l Digital/Analog conversion Transparent transmission Host signaling processing
Z interface is an analog phone interface. In the access network, Z interface extension service is applicable to the following two scenarios: l l The V5 interface is not enabled for interconnection with the LE in the network. There is a certain market demand for the analog phone service. The analog phone of one LE is connected to another LE through the Z interface extension without changing the charging mode. This can save the toll charge.
l l The CDI board is connected to the analog line. The CDI port functions as an analog phone. The CDI board supports the following services: Z interface extension PBX-bothway E1-direct dialing in (E1-DDI) l The Rx gain of the CDI board ranges from -22.5 dB to -3 dB. The Tx gain ranges from -8.5 dB to +13 dB. The adjustment step is 0.5 dB.
23.2 Configuration Example of the Z Interface Extension Service

This topic describes how to configure the CDI board and ASL board on the UA5000, and set up an SPC between the CDI board and the ASL board. The SPC type is Z-extension. Thus, the subscriber connected to the ASL board can be connected to a port on the CDI board through the SPC.
Networking
The CDI board is connected to subscriber B of the PBX through the Z interface. Subscriber A is connected to a port on the CDI board through a private SPC. In this way, the Z interface extension function is realized. Figure 23-1 shows the example network of the Z interface extension.
Figure 23-1 Example network of the Z interface extension

LE
0/8 P P UA5000 V V M M B B Z interface PBX C D I
0/11 A S L A S L
Phone B
Phone A
Phone C
Data Plan
Table 23-1 provides the data plan for configuring the Z interface extension. Table 23-1 Data plan for configuring the Z interface extension Data Type CDI board ASL board CDI port Item Shelf ID/slot ID Shelf ID/slot ID Shelf ID/slot ID/port ID Rx gain Tx gain Dial-up mode Supports delayed dialing Working mode Ringing SPC Application type SPC type Data 0/8 0/11 0/8/0 -7 dB -5 dB DTMF no DDI Normal Z-extension private Remarks Dual tone Not supported Z interface extension Only private line can be supported
277
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
Data Type
Item Start shelf ID/slot ID/ port ID/channel ID End shelf ID/slot ID/ port ID/channel ID Total number of channels
Data 0/8/0/0 0/11/0/0 1
Remarks Only one B channel can be occupied.
Context
The CDI port supports only the private SPC.
Figure 23-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the Z interface extension. Figure 23-2 Flowchart for configuring the Z interface extension
Start
Add CDI boards
Confirm CDI boards
Set up an SPC
No
Modify the attributes of the CDI port
Procedure
Step 1 Add a CDI board and an ASL board.

huawei(config)#board add 0/8 cdi huawei(config)#board add 0/11 asl
Step 2 Confirm the CDI board and the ASL board.

Step 3 Modify the attributes of the CDI port.

huawei(config)#cdi huawei(config-cdi)#port attribute set 0/8/0 recvgain 31 transgain 7 dialmode DTMF delaydial no workmode DDI ringmode 4 huawei(config-cdi)#quit

huawei(config)#spc add private start 0/8/0/0 end 0/11/0/0 1 z-extension
----End
Result
When subscriber C dials the number of subscriber A, the phone of subscriber B should ring. That is, the phone of subscriber B functions as the phone of subscriber A.
23.3 Configuration Example of the PBX-Bothway Service

This topic describes how to configure the PBX-Bothway service to set up a private SPC between the ports on two CDI boards. Thus, the bothway service of the PBX-1 and PBX-2 subscribers is implemented.
Networking
One CDI board (in slot 0/8) is connected to PBX-1 through a twisted pair (Z interface). The other CDI board (in slot 0/11) is connected to PBX-2 through a twisted pair (Z interface). Figure 23-3 shows the example network for configuring the PBX-bothway service.
NOTE
Figure 23-3 Example network for configuring the PBX-bothway service

0/8 UA5000 P P A C S D L I 0/11 C D I A S A S
V V M M B B
L L Z interface
Z interface
PBX-1
PBX-2
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
279
Data Plan
Table 23-2 provides the data plan for configuring the PBX-bothway service. Table 23-2 Data plan for configuring the PBX-bothway service Data Type CDI board SPC Item Shelf ID/slot ID Application type SPC type Start shelf ID/slot ID/ port ID/channel ID End Shelf ID/slot ID/ port ID/channel ID Total number of channels Data 0/8, 0/11 PBX-bothway private 0/8/0/0 0/11/0/0 1 Remarks PBX-bothway connection Private line type Only one B channel is occupied.
Figure 23-4 shows the flowchart for configuring the CDI service. Figure 23-4 Flowchart for configuring the CDI service
Start
Add CDI boards
Confirm CDI boards
Set up an SPC
No
Modify the attributes of the CDI port
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
280
Procedure
Step 1 Add a CDI board.
huawei(config)#board add 0/8 cdi huawei(config)#board add 0/11 cdi
Step 2 Confirm the CDI board.

Step 3 Set up an SPC.

huawei(config)#spc add private start 0/8/0/0 end 0/11/0/0 1 PBX-bothway
Step 4 If the service quality cannot meet the requirement, you need to change port attributes. ----End
Result
A private SPC is set up between the ports on the two CDI boards. PBXs should be able to initiate calls between each other. In this way, the PBX-bothway service of the PBX-1 and PBX-2 subscribers is implemented. In addition, the service quality can meet the requirement.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
281
24 Configuring the EPON Upstream Transmission
24
Configuring the EPON Upstream Transmission
About This Chapter

This topic describes the Ethernet passive optical network (EPON) technology and how to configure the EPON upstream transmission on the UA5000 MiniMSAN. 24.1 Introduction to the EPON Upstream Transmission EPON can transmit the converged data, video, and voice over the optical fiber. 24.2 Configuration Example of the EPON Upstream Transmission This topic describes how to implement the EPON upstream transmission of the UA5000 MiniMSAN by configuring the EP1A board on the UA5000 MiniMSAN. Thus, the UA5000 MiniMSAN and OLT form an EPON. 24.3 Querying the Attributes of the Ports on the EP1A Board The EP1A provides one EPON uplink port and one FE/GE adaptive electrical port. By querying the attributes of the ports on the EP1A board, you can obtain the type, adaptive mode, rate, working mode, activation status, and current status of each port on the EP1A board. 24.4 Querying the Statistics of the Ports on the EP1A Board By querying the statistics of the ports on the EP1A board, you can obtain the transmitted frames, received frames, and error frames. Thus, this helps you to detect and locate the faults of the ports on the EP1A board in time.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
282
24.1 Introduction to the EPON Upstream Transmission

EPON can transmit the converged data, video, and voice over the optical fiber.
Service Description
Passive optical network (PON) is a point-to-multipoint (P2MP) network, consisting of the optical line terminal (OLT), optical network unit (ONU), and passive optical splitter (POS). EPON, a type of the PON technology, has the common features, such as the high bandwidth, wide coverage, flexible networking, and passive network nodes. EPON overcomes the disadvantages of the Ethernet which lacks operations, administration, and maintenance (OAM) measures. EPON can improve the network bandwidth and performance, and save the maintenance cost. The UA5000 MiniMSAN supports the EPON upstream transmission. The UA5000 MiniMSAN that works as an ONU can use the wide coverage, flexible networking, and low maintenance cost provided by the EPON network. The UA5000 MiniMSAN works with the OLT to provide high-bandwidth access for subscribers. At the same time, it helps increase the density of subscribers at the OLT end.
The UA5000 MiniMSAN provides the EPON upstream transmission through the EP1A board. The detailed specifications are as follows: l l Supports one EPON uplink port with the upstream and downstream rates 1.25 Gbit/s. Supports the transmission distance of a maximum of 20 km.
24.2 Configuration Example of the EPON Upstream Transmission

This topic describes how to implement the EPON upstream transmission of the UA5000 MiniMSAN by configuring the EP1A board on the UA5000 MiniMSAN. Thus, the UA5000 MiniMSAN and OLT form an EPON.
Prerequisite
l l The network devices and the lines must be in the normal state. When the PVM board adopts the independent upstream transmission mode, the ETH1 port on the PVM board and the FE port on the EP1A board must be connected through a network cable.
Networking
Figure 24-1 shows the example network of the EPON upstream transmission service. Connect the EPON port on the EP1A board in slot 0/3 of the UA5000 MiniMSAN to the splitter through an optical fiber. Thus, the connection between the UA5000 MiniMSAN and OLT is set up.
Figure 24-1 Example network of the EPON upstream transmission service

Router
OLT
Optical spllitter Optical spllitter EPON UA5000 MiniMSAN_B
0/3 EPON 0/7

I P E P V P 1 MMA AA 3 3 2 2
EPON
HABM shelf
UA5000 MiniMSAN_A
PBX
NT1
Phone
Phone
ISDN BRA Phone
ISDN BRA Phone
Phone
Phone
Data Plan
Table 24-1 provides the data plan for configuring the EPON upstream transmission service.
NOTE
The following table provides only the data plan of the VoIP service of the EP1A board. For the data plans of services such as P2P ISDN BRA and P2MP ISDN BRA, see "12.2 Configuration Example of the P2P ISDN BRA Service" and "12.3 Configuration Example of the P2MP ISDN BRA Service" respectively.
Table 24-1 Data plan for configuring the EPON upstream transmission service Category UA5000 MiniMSAN_A MG interface data Item The EP1A board: provides the EPON port to interconnect to the upper-layer OLT mgid code protocol
Data Shelf ID/Slot ID: 0/3 0 text H.248

284
Category
Item tranfer port
Data UDP MG: 2944 MGC: 2944
domainname start-negotiate-version
UA5000.com 2
IP address
The signaling IP address of MG 0 of the UA5000 The media IP address of MG 0 of the UA5000 The default gateway of MG 0 of the UA5000 The IP address of the MGC
10.10.10.2/24 10.10.10.4/24 10.10.10.1/24 10.10.20.1/24 Shelf ID/Slot ID: 0/7 Telephone number: 1234000112340032
Telephone number configuration
Phone1Phone32
terminal id
031. Terminals 031 correspond with telephone numbers 1234000112340032. The default system value Supported 15 (-24 dbm0) Supported 20 (20 dB)
ToS strategy Voice enhancing function
IP priority and ToS priority The function of automatic gain adjustment of the PSTN port The parameter value of automatic gain adjustment of the PSTN port The function of the spectral noise suppression (SNS) of the PSTN port The parameter value of the SNS of the PSTN port
Context
l You need to add the EP1A board if the UA5000 MiniMSAN needs the EPON upstream transmission. After the EP1A board is added successfully, the UA5000 MiniMSAN can implement the EPON upstream transmission through the EPON uplink port on the EP1A board.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
When the UA5000 MiniMSAN implements the upstream transmission through the EP1A board, the UA5000 MiniMSAN supports only the IP services, such as VoIP, FoIP, MoIP, and ISDN. This document describes only the configuration on the UA5000 MiniMSAN. For the configuration on the OLT, see the related guide. For example, if the OLT is the MA5680T of Huawei, see the MA5680T Configuration Guide. The configurations on the UA5000 MiniMSAN_B and UA5000 MiniMSAN_A are the same. This topic considers the configuration on the UA5000 MiniMSAN_A as an example.
Figure 24-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the EPON upstream transmission service.
Figure 24-2 Flowchart for configuring the EPON upstream transmission service
Start
Add an EP1A board
Confirm the EP1A board Configure the service
Save the data
End
Procedure
Step 1 Add an EP1A board. You can add the EP1A board offline on the CLI, and then insert the EP1A board. You can also insert the EP1A board into the shelf, and then add the EP1A board on the CLI.
huawei(config)#board add 0/3 h601ep1a
Step 2 Confirm the EP1A board.

huawei(config)#board confirm 0/3
After the EP1A board is added successfully, the UA5000 MiniMSAN can implement the EPON upstream transmission through the EPON uplink port on the EP1A board. Step 3 Configure the service.

NOTE
l For the configuration of the ISDN service, see "12 Configuring the ISDN Service." l For the configuration of the FoIP and MoIP services, see "13 Configuring the FoIP Service" and "14 Configuring the MoIP Service." The slot positions for the PVM and service boards on the UA5000 MiniMSAN are different from the slot positions described in the topics for reference. Configure the UA5000 MiniMSAN according to the parameters that are actually used. The following configuration procedure considers configuring the VoIP service as an example.
1.
Set the IP address of the service network port.

huawei(config)#interface eth huawei(interface-eth)#ip modify 10.10.10.10 ip_address 10.10.10.2 gateway 10.10.10.1 submask 255.255.255.0 /When the device is configured with the IP address of the service network port, whereas the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway of the current service network port on the device are inconsistent with the requirement of the actual data plan, run this command to modify the configuration./ /If no IP address is added to the current IP address pool of the device, run the ip address command to add the media IP address and signaling IP address to the IP address pool./ huawei(interface-eth)#ip address 10.10.10.2 255.255.255.0 10.10.10.1 huawei(interface-eth)#ip address 10.10.10.4 255.255.255.0 10.10.10.1 huawei(interface-eth)#display ip address Eth: IPAddress ..........: 10.10.10.2 SubMask.............: 255.255.255.0 GateWay.............: 10.10.10.1 MacIndex............: 0 MacAddress..........: 00-E0-FC-44-16-57 VlanID .............: -IPAddress ..........: SubMask.............: GateWay.............: MacIndex............: MacAddress..........: VlanID .............: 10.10.10.4 255.255.255.0 10.10.10.1 0 00-E0-FC-44-16-57 --
2.

huawei(interface-eth)#quit huawei(config)#qos ip 10.10.10.2 strategy none
3.
Configure the working mode of the PVM board to the independent networking mode. In the independent networking mode, the PVM control board provides services independently.
4.
Add an A32 service board and confirm the board.

huawei(config)#board add 0/7 a32 huawei(config)#board confirm 0/7 huawei(config)#display board 0 ------------------------------------------------------------------------SlotID BoardName Status Sub0 Sub1 Online/Offline ------------------------------------------------------------------------0 PWX2 Normal 1 2 H601PVMB Active_normal H602ETCA H602ETCM 3 H601EP1A Normal 4 5 6 7 A32 Normal
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
287
8 -------------------------------------------------------------------------
5.

huawei(config)#interface h248 0 Are you sure to add MG interface? (y/n)[n]:y huawei(config-if-h248-0)#if-h248 attribute mgip 10.10.10.2 mgport 2944 code text transfer udp domainName UA5000.com mgcip_1 10.10.20.1 mgcport_1 2944 mg-media-ip 10.10.10.4 start-negotiate-version 2 huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display if-h248 attribute --------------------------------------------------------------------MGID 0 MG Description MG DomainName UA5000.com Protocol H248 H248version Negotiated Originally 2 Profile Negotiation Para disable Profile 0:NoProfile("") 2833Encrypt Codetype Transmode HeartBeatTimer(s) HeartBeatRetransTimes HeartBeatRetransTimer(s) MG signalling IP MG signalling Port MG media IP MIDType DeviceName Text UDP 60 3 60 10.10.10.2 2944 10.10.10.4 IP4_ADDR -
6.
Set the H.248 protocol parameter. (Enable the three-way handshake signal switch of the H. 248 protocol stack.)
7.
Reset the MG interface.

8.
Query whether the MG interface is normal.

9.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
Configure subscriber telephone numbers.

huawei(config)#esl user huawei(config-esl-user)#mgpstnuser batadd 0/7/0 0/7/31 0 terminalid 0 telno 12340001 huawei(config-esl-user)#display mgpstnuser 0/7 -------------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port MGID TelNo Priority TID -------------------------------------------------------0 / 7 / 0 0 12340001 Cat3 A0 0 / 7 / 1 0 12340002 Cat3 A1 0 / 7 / 2 0 12340003 Cat3 A2 0 / 7 / 3 0 12340004 Cat3 A3 0 / 7 / 4 0 12340005 Cat3 A4 0 / 7 / 5 0 12340006 Cat3 A5 0 / 7 / 6 0 12340007 Cat3 A6 0 / 7 / 7 0 12340008 Cat3 A7 0 / 7 / 8 0 12340009 Cat3 A8 0 / 7 / 9 0 12340010 Cat3 A9 0 / 7 / 10 0 12340011 Cat3 A10 0 / 7 / 11 0 12340012 Cat3 A11 0 / 7 / 12 0 12340013 Cat3 A12 0 / 7 / 13 0 12340014 Cat3 A13 0 / 7 / 14 0 12340015 Cat3 A14 0 / 7 / 15 0 12340016 Cat3 A15 0 / 7 / 16 0 12340017 Cat3 A16 0 / 7 / 17 0 12340018 Cat3 A17 0 / 7 / 18 0 12340019 Cat3 A18 0 / 7 / 19 0 12340020 Cat3 A19 0 / 7 / 20 0 12340021 Cat3 A20 0 / 7 / 21 0 12340022 Cat3 A21 0 / 7 / 22 0 12340023 Cat3 A22 0 / 7 / 23 0 12340024 Cat3 A23 0 / 7 / 24 0 12340025 Cat3 A24 0 / 7 / 25 0 12340026 Cat3 A25 0 / 7 / 26 0 12340027 Cat3 A26 0 / 7 / 27 0 12340028 Cat3 A27 0 / 7 / 28 0 12340029 Cat3 A28 0 / 7 / 29 0 12340030 Cat3 A29 0 / 7 / 30 0 12340031 Cat3 A30 0 / 7 / 31 0 12340032 Cat3 A31 -------------------------------------------------------Command processing completed. 32 port(s) are configured MG PSTN user data

huawei(config-esl-user)#pstnport vqe batset 0/7/0 0/7/31 agc enable agc-Level 15 sns enable sns-Level 20 Command processing completed. 32 user data modified successfully huawei(config-esl-user)#display pstnport vqe 0/7 ------------------------------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port AGC enable AGC value (dbm0) SNS enable SNS value(db) ------------------------------------------------------------------------0 / 7 / 0 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 1 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 2 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 3 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 4 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 5 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 6 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 7 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 8 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 9 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 10 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 11 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 12 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 13 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 14 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 15 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 16 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 17 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 18 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 19 enable -24 enable 20
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
289
---- More ( Press 'Q' to break ) ---huawei(config-esl-user)#quit

huawei(config)#save
----End
Result
After the configuration, the UA5000 MiniMSAN can implement the following functions: l l The UA5000 MiniMSAN and OLT can exchange data in the EPON mode. The subscribers configured on the UA5000 MiniMSAN service boards can call each other.
24.3 Querying the Attributes of the Ports on the EP1A Board

The EP1A provides one EPON uplink port and one FE/GE adaptive electrical port. By querying the attributes of the ports on the EP1A board, you can obtain the type, adaptive mode, rate, working mode, activation status, and current status of each port on the EP1A board.
Context
When you query the attributes of the ports on the EP1A board, the system displays "-" for the status of the item that the port does not support. l l The PON port does not support the port impedance, MDI, port rate, and port mode. The system displays "-" for the status of these items. The GE/FE adaptive electrical port does not support the port impedance. The system displays "-" for the status of this item.
Precaution
The EP1A board supports two ports: the EPON uplink port and FE/GE adaptive electrical port. The EPON uplink port corresponds to the logical number 0, and the FE/GE adaptive electrical port corresponds to the logical number 1. When you query the attributes of the ports on the EP1A board and enter a logical number that is greater than 1, the system prompts an error.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the interface epon command to enter the EPON mode. Step 2 Run the display port state command to query the attributes of the ports on the EP1A board. ----End
Example
To query the attributes of the ports on the EP1A board of the UA5000 MiniMSAN, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface epon 0/3 huawei(config-if-epon-0/3)#display port state all ----------------------------------------------------------------------Port PortType Impedance MDI Speed(Mbps) Duplex Active Link -----------------------------------------------------------------------
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
290
0 EPON ACTIVE UP 1 GE ELC AUTO 100 FULL ACTIVE UP -----------------------------------------------------------------------
24.4 Querying the Statistics of the Ports on the EP1A Board

By querying the statistics of the ports on the EP1A board, you can obtain the transmitted frames, received frames, and error frames. Thus, this helps you to detect and locate the faults of the ports on the EP1A board in time.
Context
The EP1A board supports two ports: the EPON uplink port and FE/GE adaptive electrical port. If the result of the queried statistical item is 0x00, it indicates that the port does not receive frames of this type, or the port does not carry any traffic currently.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the interface epon command to enter the EPON mode. Step 2 Run the display port statistic command to query the statistics of the EPON port. ----End
Example
To query the statistics of the port on the EP1A board of the UA5000 MiniMSAN, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface epon 0/3 huawei(config-if-epon-0/3)#display port statistic all Number of transmitted frames of PON port Number of received frames of PON port Number of received FEC error frames of PON port Number of received HEC error frames of PON port Number of discard frames of PON port in send direction Number of discard frames of UNI port in send direction Number of transmitted frames of UNI port Number of received frames of UNI port Number of received error frames of UNI port
=0x0cef7d90 =0x0b913fed =0x00 =0x00 =0x00 =0x00 =0x039 =0x01228f6d =0x00
Related Operation
Table 24-2 lists the related operation for querying the statistics about the port on the EP1A board. Table 24-2 Related operation for querying the statistics about the port on the EP1A board To... Clear the statistics of the ports on the EP1A board Run the Command... reset port statistic
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
291
25 Configuring the GPON Upstream Transmission
25
Configuring the GPON Upstream Transmission
About This Chapter

This topic describes the gigabit-capable passive optical network (GPON) technology and describes how to configure the GPON upstream transmission on the UA5000 MiniMSAN. 25.1 Introduction to the GPON Upstream Transmission GPON is a point-to-multipoint (P2MP) broadband optical transmission system. It can transmit data of any type. 25.2 Configuration Example of the GPON Upstream Transmission This topic describes how to implement the GPON upstream transmission of the UA5000 MiniMSAN by configuring the GP1A board on the UA5000 MiniMSAN. Thus, the UA5000 MiniMSAN and OLT form a GPON. 25.3 Querying the Attributes of the Ports on the GP1A Board The GP1A board provides one GPON uplink port, one FE/GE auto-sensing electrical port, one 100M electrical port, two 100M optical ports, and four E1 ports. By querying the attributes of the port on the GP1A board, you can learn the type, impedance, auto-sensing mode, rate, working mode, activation status, and current status of each port on the GP1A board. 25.4 Querying the Statistics of the Port on the GP1A Board By querying the statistics of the port on the GP1A board, you can learn the information about each port on the board. This helps you to detect and locate the faults of the port on the GP1A board in time.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
292
25.1 Introduction to the GPON Upstream Transmission

GPON is a point-to-multipoint (P2MP) broadband optical transmission system. It can transmit data of any type.
Service Description
Passive optical network (PON) is a P2MP network, consisting of the optical line terminal (OLT), optical network unit (ONU), and passive optical splitter (POS). GPON is defined in the ITU-T Recommendations G.984.x. It supports downstream rates of 1.2 Gbit/s and 2.4 Gbit/s, and upstream rates of 155 Mbit/s, 622 Mbit/s, 1.2 Gbit/s, and 2.4 Gbit/s. To meet the requirements of the users for the multiple networking modes, the UA5000 MiniMSAN provides the GPON uplink port to form a GPON network with the OLT. The UA5000 MiniMSAN that works as an ONU can use the wide coverage, flexible networking, and low maintenance cost provided by the GPON network. The UA5000 MiniMSAN works with the OLT to provide high-bandwidth access for subscribers. At the same time, it helps increase the density of subscribers at the OLT end. For details about the GPON upstream transmission, see "GPON Upstream Transmission" in "Feature Description".
The UA5000 MiniMSAN provides the GPON upstream transmission through the GP1A board. The detailed specifications are as follows: l l l The UA5000 MiniMSAN supports one GPON uplink port with a downstream rate of 2.488 Gbit/s and an upstream rate of 1.244 Gbit/s. The UA5000 MiniMSAN supports eight transmission containers (T-CONTs) with 32 GEM ports. The OLT manages and configures the services on the PON board of the UA5000 MiniMSAN through the optical network termination management and control interface (OMCI). That is, the OLT manages the UA5000 MiniMSAN as an ONT. The OLT does not manage the existing services of the UA5000.
25.2 Configuration Example of the GPON Upstream Transmission

This topic describes how to implement the GPON upstream transmission of the UA5000 MiniMSAN by configuring the GP1A board on the UA5000 MiniMSAN. Thus, the UA5000 MiniMSAN and OLT form a GPON.
Prerequisite
l l The network devices and the lines must be in the normal state. When the PVM board adopts the independent upstream transmission mode, the ETH1 port on the PVM board and the FE port on the GP1A board must be connected through a network cable.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
Networking
Figure 25-1 shows the example network of the GPON upstream transmission service. Use the optical fiber to connect the GPON port on the GP1A board in slot 0/3 of the UA5000 MiniMSAN to the optical splitter to set up the connection with the OLT. Figure 25-1 Example network of the GPON upstream transmission service
DDN
MGC
OLT
Optical Splitter GPON UA5000 MiniMSAN_B Optical Splitter

GPON
0/3 GPON 0/7

I P G P V P 1 MMA AA 3 3 2 2
HABM Shelf
UA5000 MiniMSAN_A
PBX
NT1
Phone
Phone ISDN BRA ISDN BRA Phone Phone
Phone
Phone
Data Plan
Table 25-1 provides the data plan for configuring the GPON upstream transmission service.
NOTE
The following table provides only the data plan of the VoIP service. For the data plans of other services such as the P2P ISDN BRA and P2MP ISDN BRA, see "12.2 Configuration Example of the P2P ISDN BRA Service" and "12.3 Configuration Example of the P2MP ISDN BRA Service" respectively. In the case of the HABM shelf, the GP1A board can be inserted in slot 3. In the case of other high-density shelves, the GP1A board can be inserted in slot 6.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
294
Table 25-1 Data plan for configuring the GPON upstream transmission service Category UA5000 MiniMSAN_A MG interface data Item The GP1A board: provides the GPON port to interconnect with the upper-layer OLT mgid code protocol tranfer port Data Shelf ID/Slot ID: 0/3 0 text H.248 UDP MG: 2944 MGC: 2944 domainname start-negotiate-version UA5000.com 2
IP Address
The signaling IP address of MG 0 of the UA5000 The media IP address of MG 0 of the UA5000 The default gateway of MG 0 of the UA5000 IP address of the MGC
10.10.10.2/24 10.10.10.4/24 10.10.10.1/24 10.10.20.1/24 Shelf ID/Slot ID: 0/7 Telephone number: 12340001-12340032
Telephone number configuration
Phone1-Phone32
terminal id
0-31. Terminals 0-31 correspond with telephone numbers 12340001-12340032 The default system value Supported 15 (-24 dbm0) Supported 20 (20 db)
ToS strategy Voice enhancing function
IP priority and ToS priority The function of automatic gain adjustment of the PSTN port The value of automatic gain adjustment of the PSTN port The SNS function of the PSTN port The SNS value of the PSTN port
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
295
Context
l You need to add the GP1A board if the UA5000 MiniMSAN needs the GPON upstream transmission. After the GP1A board is added successfully, the UA5000 MiniMSAN can implement the GPON upstream transmission through the GPON uplink port on the GP1A board. When the UA5000 MiniMSAN implements the upstream transmission through the GP1A board, it supports not only the IP services, such as VoIP, FoIP, MoIP, and ISDN, but also the POTS such as V5. This document describes only the configuration on the UA5000 MiniMSAN. For the configuration on the OLT, see the related guide. For example, if the OLT is the MA5680T of Huawei, see the MA5680T Configuration Guide. The configurations on the UA5000 MiniMSAN_B and UA5000 MiniMSAN_A are the same. This topic considers the configuration on the UA5000 MiniMSAN_A as an example. The ONT (that is, the UA5000 MiniMSAN) must register on the OLT before the configuration.
l l
Figure 25-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the GPON upstream transmission service. Figure 25-2 Flowchart for configuring the GPON upstream transmission service
Procedure
Step 1 Add a GP1A board. You can add the GP1A board offline on the CLI, and then insert the GP1A board. You can also insert the GP1A board into the shelf, and then add the GP1A board on the CLI.

huawei(config)#board add 0/3 h601gp1a
Step 2 Confirm the GP1A board.

huawei(config)#board confirm 0/3
After the GP1A board is added successfully, the UA5000 MiniMSAN can implement the GPON upstream transmission through the GPON uplink port on the GP1A board. Step 3 Configure the service.
NOTE
l For the configuration of the ISDN service, see "12 Configuring the ISDN Service." l For the configurations of the FoIP and MoIP services, see "13 Configuring the FoIP Service" and "14 Configuring the MoIP Service." The slot positions for the PVM and service boards on the UA5000 MiniMSAN are different from the slot positions described in the topics for reference. Configure the UA5000 MiniMSAN according to the parameters that are actually used. The following configuration procedure considers configuring the VoIP service as an example.
1.
Set the IP address of service network port.

huawei(config)#interface eth huawei(interface-eth)#ip modify 10.10.10.10 ip_address 10.10.10.2 gateway 10.10.10.1 submask 255.255.255.0 /When the device is configured with the IP address of the service network port, whereas the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway are inconsistent with the requirement of the actual data plan, run this command to modify the configuration./ /If no IP address is added to the current IP address pool of the device, run the ip address command to add the media IP address and signaling IP address to the IP address pool./ huawei(interface-eth)#ip address 10.10.10.2 255.255.255.0 10.10.10.1 huawei(interface-eth)#ip address 10.10.10.4 255.255.255.0 10.10.10.1 huawei(interface-eth)#display ip address Eth: IPAddress ..........: 10.10.10.2 SubMask.............: 255.255.255.0 GateWay.............: 10.10.10.1 MacIndex............: 0 MacAddress..........: 00-E0-FC-44-16-57 VlanID .............: -IPAddress ..........: SubMask.............: GateWay.............: MacIndex............: MacAddress..........: VlanID .............: 10.10.10.4 255.255.255.0 10.10.10.1 0 00-E0-FC-44-16-57 --
2.

huawei(interface-eth)#quit huawei(config)#qos ip 10.10.10.2 strategy none huawei(config)#qos ip 10.10.10.2 strategy tos
3.
Configure the working mode of the PVM board as alone. In this independent networking mode, the PVM control board provides services independently.
4.
Add an A32 service board, and confirm the board.

huawei(config)#board add 0/7 a32 huawei(config)#board confirm 0/7 huawei(config)#display board 0 ------------------------------------------------------------------------SlotID BoardName Status Sub0 Sub1 Online/Offline
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
297
------------------------------------------------------------------------0 PWX2 Normal 1 2 H601PVMB Active_normal H602ETCA H602ETCM 3 H601GP1A Normal 4 5 6 7 A32 Normal 8 -------------------------------------------------------------------------
5.

huawei(config)#interface h248 0 Are you sure to add MG interface? (y/n)[n]:y huawei(config-if-h248-0)#if-h248 attribute mgip 10.10.10.2 mgport 2944 code text transfer udp domainName UA5000.com mgcip_1 10.10.20.1 mgcport_1 2944 mg-media-ip 10.10.10.4 start-negotiate-version 2 huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display if-h248 attribute --------------------------------------------------------------------MGID 0 MG Description MG DomainName UA5000.com Protocol H248 H248version Negotiated Originally 2 Profile Negotiation Para disable Profile 0:NoProfile("") 2833Encrypt Codetype Transmode HeartBeatTimer(s) HeartBeatRetransTimes HeartBeatRetransTimer(s) MG signalling IP MG signalling Port MG media IP MIDType DeviceName Text UDP 60 3 60 10.10.10.2 2944 10.10.10.4 IP4_ADDR -
6.
Set the H.248 protocol parameter. (Enable the three-way handshake signal switch of the H. 248 protocol stack.)
7.
Reset the MG interface.

8.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
Query whether the MG interface is normal.

9.
Configure the subscriber telephone numbers.

huawei(config)#esl user huawei(config-esl-user)#mgpstnuser batadd 0/7/0 0/7/31 0 terminalid 0 telno 12340001 huawei(config-esl-user)#display mgpstnuser 0/7 -------------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port MGID TelNo Priority TID -------------------------------------------------------0 / 7 / 0 0 12340001 Cat3 A0 0 / 7 / 1 0 12340002 Cat3 A1 0 / 7 / 2 0 12340003 Cat3 A2 0 / 7 / 3 0 12340004 Cat3 A3 0 / 7 / 4 0 12340005 Cat3 A4 0 / 7 / 5 0 12340006 Cat3 A5 0 / 7 / 6 0 12340007 Cat3 A6 0 / 7 / 7 0 12340008 Cat3 A7 0 / 7 / 8 0 12340009 Cat3 A8 0 / 7 / 9 0 12340010 Cat3 A9 0 / 7 / 10 0 12340011 Cat3 A10 0 / 7 / 11 0 12340012 Cat3 A11 0 / 7 / 12 0 12340013 Cat3 A12 0 / 7 / 13 0 12340014 Cat3 A13 0 / 7 / 14 0 12340015 Cat3 A14 0 / 7 / 15 0 12340016 Cat3 A15 0 / 7 / 16 0 12340017 Cat3 A16 0 / 7 / 17 0 12340018 Cat3 A17 0 / 7 / 18 0 12340019 Cat3 A18 0 / 7 / 19 0 12340020 Cat3 A19 0 / 7 / 20 0 12340021 Cat3 A20 0 / 7 / 21 0 12340022 Cat3 A21 0 / 7 / 22 0 12340023 Cat3 A22 0 / 7 / 23 0 12340024 Cat3 A23 0 / 7 / 24 0 12340025 Cat3 A24 0 / 7 / 25 0 12340026 Cat3 A25 0 / 7 / 26 0 12340027 Cat3 A26 0 / 7 / 27 0 12340028 Cat3 A27 0 / 7 / 28 0 12340029 Cat3 A28 0 / 7 / 29 0 12340030 Cat3 A29 0 / 7 / 30 0 12340031 Cat3 A30 0 / 7 / 31 0 12340032 Cat3 A31 -------------------------------------------------------Command processing completed. 32 port(s) are configured MG PSTN user data

huawei(config-esl-user)#pstnport vqe batset 0/7/0 0/7/31 agc enable agc-Level 15 sns enable sns-Level 20 Command processing completed. 32 user data modified successfully huawei(config-esl-user)#display pstnport vqe 0/7 ------------------------------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port AGC enable AGC value (dbm0) SNS enable SNS value(db) ------------------------------------------------------------------------0 / 7 / 0 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 1 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 2 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 3 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 4 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 5 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 6 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 7 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 8 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 9 enable -24 enable 20 0 / 7 / 10 enable -24 enable 20
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
299

-24 -24 -24 -24 -24 -24 -24 -24 -24 enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable enable 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
0 / 7 / 11 enable 0 / 7 / 12 enable 0 / 7 / 13 enable 0 / 7 / 14 enable 0 / 7 / 15 enable 0 / 7 / 16 enable 0 / 7 / 17 enable 0 / 7 / 18 enable 0 / 7 / 19 enable ---- More ( Press 'Q' to break ) ---huawei(config-esl-user)#quit

huawei(config)#save
----End
Result
After the configuration, the UA5000 MiniMSAN can perform the following functions: l l The UA5000 MiniMSAN and OLT can transmit data in the GPON mode. The subscribers configured on the service boards of the UA5000 MiniMSAN can call each other.
25.3 Querying the Attributes of the Ports on the GP1A Board

The GP1A board provides one GPON uplink port, one FE/GE auto-sensing electrical port, one 100M electrical port, two 100M optical ports, and four E1 ports. By querying the attributes of the port on the GP1A board, you can learn the type, impedance, auto-sensing mode, rate, working mode, activation status, and current status of each port on the GP1A board.
Context
When you query the attributes of the port on the GP1A board, the system displays "-" for the item that the port does not support. l l l l The PON port does not support the port impedance, MDI, port rate, and port mode. The system displays "-" for these items. The 100M electrical port does not support the port impedance. The system displays "-"for this item. The GE/FE auto-sensing electrical port and 100M optical port does not support the port impedance and MDI. The system displays "-" for the two items. The E1 port does not support the MDI, port rate, and port mode. The system displays "-" for these items.
Table 25-2 lists the port types corresponding to the IDs of the ports on the GP1A board. Table 25-2 Port types corresponding to IDs of the ports on the GP1A board Port Description PON port GE/FE auto-sensing electrical port
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
Port ID 0 1
300
Port Description 100M electrical port 100M optical port E1 port
Port ID 2 3-4 5-8
Precaution
The GP1A board supports nine ports. When you query the attributes of the port on the GP1A board, the system displays an error, if you enter a logical number greater than 8.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the interface gpon command to enter the GPON mode. Step 2 Run the display port state command to query the attributes of the port on the GP1A board. ----End
Example
To query the port attributes of the GP1A board on the UA5000 MiniMSAN, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface gpon 0/3 huawei(config-if-gpon-0/3)#display port state all ----------------------------------------------------------------------Port PortType Impedance MDI Speed(Mbps) Duplex Active Link ----------------------------------------------------------------------0 GPON ACTIVE UP 1 GE AUTO HALF ACTIVE UP 2 FE ELC AUTO AUTO HALF ACTIVE UP 3 FE OPT 100 FULL ACTIVE UP 4 FE OPT 100 FULL ACTIVE UP 5 E1 75 ACTIVE UP 6 E1 75 ACTIVE UP 7 E1 75 ACTIVE UP 8 E1 75 ACTIVE UP -----------------------------------------------------------------------
25.4 Querying the Statistics of the Port on the GP1A Board

By querying the statistics of the port on the GP1A board, you can learn the information about each port on the board. This helps you to detect and locate the faults of the port on the GP1A board in time.
Context
The GP1A board supports nine ports. They are one GPON uplink port, one FE/GE auto-sensing electrical port, one 100M electrical port, two 100M optical ports, and four E1 ports. If the result of the queried statistical item is 0x0, it indicates that the port does not receive frames of this type, or the port does not carry any traffic currently.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the interface gpon command to enter the GPON mode. Step 2 Run the display port statistic command to query the statistics of the GPON port. ----End
Example
To query the statistics of the E1 port group on the GP1A board of the UA5000 MiniMSAN, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface gpon 0/3 huawei(config-if-gpon-0/3)#display port statistic e1port-group port5: Number of GEM frames of E1 port =0x0 Number of E1 channels from TGMAC =0x0 Number of E1 channels to TGMAC =0xb278 port6: Number of GEM frames of E1 port =0x0 Number of E1 channels from TGMAC =0x0 Number of E1 channels to TGMAC =0xdf7a port7: Number of GEM frames of E1 port =0x0 Number of E1 channels from TGMAC =0x0 Number of E1 channels to TGMAC =0x117d port8: Number of GEM frames of E1 port =0x0 Number of E1 channels from TGMAC =0x0 Number of E1 channels to TGMAC =0xab7f
To query the statistics of the Ethernet port group on the GP1A board of the UA5000 MiniMSAN, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface gpon 0/3 huawei(config-if-gpon-0/3)#display port statistic ethport-group port0: Number of transmitted frames of PON port =0x0 Number of received frames of PON port =0x0 Number of discard frames of PON port in send direction =0x0 port1: Number of transmitted frames of UNI port =0x0 Number of received frames of UNI port =0x0 Number of discard frames of UNI port in send direction =0x0 port2: Number of transmitted frames of FE port =0x0 Number of received frames of FE port =0x0 Number of discard frames of FE port in send direction =0x0 port3: Number of transmitted frames of FE optics port =0x0 Number of received frames of FE optics port =0x0 Number of discard frames of FE optics port in send direction =0x0 port4: Number of transmitted frames of FE optics port =0x0 Number of received frames of FE optics port =0x0 Number of discard frames of FE optics port in send direction =0x0
Related Operation
Table 25-3 lists the related operation for querying the statistics of the port on the GP1A board.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
302
Table 25-3 Related operation for querying the statistics of the port on the GP1A board To... Clear the statistics of the port on the GP1A board Run the Command... reset port statistic
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
303
26 Configuring the Remote Subtending
26
Configuring the Remote Subtending
About This Chapter

Configuring the remote subtending includes the description of the remote subtending networking and the process for configuring the remote subtending through different boards on the UA5000. 26.1 Introduction to the Remote Subtending The remote subtending facilitates the flexible networking of the UA5000, and the expansion of capacity of the UA5000. 26.2 Configuration Example of the E1 Subtending This topic describes how to subtend a remote RSU to the UA5000 through the EDTB board. Thus, the two subtended devices are connected through an E1 cable to extend the service transmission distance and to expand the access capacity of the UA5000.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
304
26.1 Introduction to the Remote Subtending

The remote subtending facilitates the flexible networking of the UA5000, and the expansion of capacity of the UA5000.
Service Description
The UA5000 enables you to subtend the remote service shelves to the master shelf through the E1 ports on the PVMB or PVMD board, or through the E1 ports on the EDTB board, thus to expand the capacity of the UA5000. The remote service shelf uses the RSU4 or RSU8 board as the control board. The local office and the remote office are connected by the E1 cables over the multi-service transport platform (MSTP) or the synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH).
The remote service shelves access the modem services and the voice services through the ports of the voice service boards. Table 26-1 shows the number of ports provided by the service boards in the remote service shelves. Table 26-1 Specification of the remote service shelf Shelf Type RSU_HAFS_30(HABD) RSU_HABS_30(HABA) Service Board A32 A32 Maximum Number of Ports 1920 1920
26.2 Configuration Example of the E1 Subtending

This topic describes how to subtend a remote RSU to the UA5000 through the EDTB board. Thus, the two subtended devices are connected through an E1 cable to extend the service transmission distance and to expand the access capacity of the UA5000.
Prerequisite
l l l l The data on the MGC must be accurate. The E1 cable must be connected correctly. The MG interface must be configured properly. (For details about the procedure, see "9 Configuring the MG Interface.") The RSU boards and the A32 boards must be added to the remote service shelf.
Context
The EDTB board can be installed in slots 6-17 of the HABA or HABD shelf, slots 12-17 of the HABC shelf, or slots 6-11 of the HABL shelf. A maximum of six EDTB boards can be installed in the adjacent slots of a shelf.
Networking
Figure 26-1 shows the example network of the E1 subtending. Figure 26-1 Example network of the E1 subtending
MGC H.248
E1
LAN Switch FE/GE
SDH
E1 UA5000 P P E E V V D D M MT T B B B B E1 MSTP A A 3 3 2 2
E1
E1
R R S S U U 8 8
A A A A 3 3 3 3 2 2 2 2
Phone 1
Phone 128
Data Plan
Table 26-2 provides the data plan for configuring the E1 subtending.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
306
Table 26-2 Data plan for configuring the E1 subtending Data Type IP address Item IP address/subnet mask of UA5000 MG 0 Default IP address/subnet mask of UA5000 MG 0 IP address/subnet mask of the MGC Parameters of the MG interface MG ID Code Protocol MG Port MGC Port Terminal layer configuration Telephone numbers Phone 1-phone 128 Data 10.10.10.2/255.255.255.0 10.10.10.1/255.255.255.0 10.10.20.1/255.255.255.0 0 text UDP 2944 2944 No, terminalid: 0-127 Shelf ID/slot ID/port ID: 1/9/0-1/12/31 Telephone number: 12340001-12340128 EDTB boards Remote service shelf RSU board Shelf ID/slot ID Shelf ID Shelf type Shelf ID/slot ID 0/6 and 0/7 1 RSU_HAFS_30(HABD) 1/4 and 1/5
Context
l l The MG interface parameters must be the same as the MG interface parameters configured on the MGC. The EDTB board must work in the independent mode and the default value is independent.
Figure 26-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the E1 subtending.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
307
Figure 26-2 Flowchart for configuring the E1 subtending

Start
Add EDTB boards
Confirm the EDTB boards
Add remote service shelf
Add inter-shelf links
Add subscribers to slave service shelf
End
Procedure
Step 1 Add EDTB boards.
huawei(config)#board batadd 0/6 0/7 h601EDTB
Step 2 Confirm the EDTB boards.

Step 3 Add the remote service shelves.

huawei(config-if-edt-0/7)#quit huawei(config)#frame add 1 FrameType: 0 : MAIN_HABM_30(HABA) 2 : MAIN_HAFM_6(HABL) 4 : MAIN_H601HABC(HABC) 6 : MAIN_H601HABM(HABM) 8 : SLAVE_HABS_32(HABB) 10 : SLAVE_HAFS_30(HABD) 12 : SLAVE_H602HABE(HABE) 14 : RSU_HABS_30(HABA) 16 : RSU_HAFS_6(HABL) 18 : RSUG_ONU04A 20 : RSP_19(HCB) 22 : RSP_14(HIB)
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23
: : : : : : : : : : : :
MAIN_HAFM_30(HABD) MAIN_H602HABD(HABD) MAIN_H601HABO(HABO) SLAVE_HAFS_32(HABE) SLAVE_HABS_30(HABA) SLAVE_H602HABD(HABD) RSU_HAFS_30(HABD) RSU_HAFS_12(HABC) RSUG_ONU60A(HUBO) RSUG_ONU08A RSP_15(HDB) RSP_12(HFB)
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
308

24 : RSP_10(HGB) 26 : RSP_6B(HLB) 28 : UAS_R (HUBS) 30 : UAFS_R(HUBF) 32 : ONU60A_R(HUBO) 34 : VRSP_12(HABA) 36 : HWTA(HIB_1) 38 : HWTA(HIB_3) Please select frame type (0 ~ 38):12 Frame add successfully 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 : : : : : : :

RSP_6A(HMB) UAM_R (HUBM) UAFM_R(HUBE) UAMB_R(HUBB) ONUF01D100_R(HUBL) VRSP_18(HABA) HWTA(HIB_2)
Step 4 Add the inter-shelf links.

huawei(config)#frame huawei(config)#frame huawei(config)#frame huawei(config)#frame huawei(config)#frame huawei(config)#frame huawei(config)#frame huawei(config)#frame huawei(config)#frame huawei(config)#frame huawei(config)#frame huawei(config)#frame huawei(config)#frame huawei(config)#frame huawei(config)#frame huawei(config)#frame link link link link link link link link link link link link link link link link start start start start start start start start start start start start start start start start 0/6/0 end 1/4/0 0/6/1 end 1/4/1 0/6/2 end 1/4/2 0/6/3 end 1/4/3 0/6/4 end 1/4/4 0/6/5 end 1/4/5 0/6/6 end 1/4/6 0/6/7 end 1/4/7 0/6/8 end 1/5/0 0/6/9 end 1/5/1 0/6/10 end 1/5/2 0/6/11 end 1/5/3 0/6/12 end 1/5/4 0/6/13 end 1/5/5 0/6/14 end 1/5/6 0/6/15 end 1/5/7
Step 5 Query the inter-shelf links.

huawei(config)#display frame link -------------------------------------------------------Record UpBoardName Frame/Slot/Port DownBoardName Frame/Slot/Port -------------------------------------------------------1 H601EDTB 0 /6/0 RSU8 1 /4 /0 2 H601EDTB 0 /6/1 RSU8 1 /4 /1 3 H601EDTB 0 /6/2 RSU8 1 /4 /2 4 H601EDTB 0 /6/3 RSU8 1 /4 /3 5 H601EDTB 0 /6/4 RSU8 1 /4 /4 6 H601EDTB 0 /6/5 RSU8 1 /4 /5 7 H601EDTB 0 /6/6 RSU8 1 /4 /6 8 H601EDTB 0 /6/7 RSU8 1 /4 /7 9 H601EDTB 0 /6/8 RSU8 1 /5 /0 10 H601EDTB 0 /6/9 RSU8 1 /5 /1 11 H601EDTB 0 /6/10 RSU8 1 /5 /2 12 H601EDTB 0 /6/11 RSU8 1 /5 /3 13 H601EDTB 0 /6/12 RSU8 1 /5 /4 14 H601EDTB 0 /6/13 RSU8 1 /5 /5 15 H601EDTB 0 /6/14 RSU8 1 /5 /6 16 H601EDTB 0 /6/15 RSU8 1 /5 /7 --------------------------------------------------------
Step 6 Query the port status of the boards subtended between shelves.
huawei(config)#display port state 0/6 -------------------------------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port PortType PortState ServiceType SvcState -------------------------------------------------------------------------0 / 6 / 0 E1 Normal RSU 0 / 6 / 1 E1 Normal RSU 0 / 6 / 2 E1 Normal RSU 0 / 6 / 3 E1 Normal RSU 0 / 6 / 4 E1 Normal RSU 0 / 6 / 5 E1 Normal RSU 0 / 6 / 6 E1 Normal RSU 0 / 6 / 7 E1 Normal RSU 0 / 6 / 8 E1 Normal RSU 0 / 6 / 9 E1 Normal RSU 0 / 6 / 10 E1 Normal RSU 0 / 6 / 11 E1 Normal RSU -
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
309
0 / 6 / 12 E1 Normal RSU 0 / 6 / 13 E1 Normal RSU 0 / 6 / 14 E1 Normal RSU 0 / 6 / 15 E1 Normal RSU -------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config)#display port state 1/4 -------------------------------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port PortType PortState ServiceType SvcState -------------------------------------------------------------------------1 / 4 / 0 E1 Normal RSU 1 / 4 / 1 E1 Normal RSU 1 / 4 / 2 E1 Normal RSU 1 / 4 / 3 E1 Normal RSU 1 / 4 / 4 E1 Normal RSU 1 / 4 / 5 E1 Normal RSU 1 / 4 / 6 E1 Normal RSU 1 / 4 / 7 E1 Normal RSU -------------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(config)#display port state 1/5 -------------------------------------------------------------------------Frame/Slot/Port PortType PortState ServiceType SvcState -------------------------------------------------------------------------1 / 5 / 0 E1 Normal RSU 1 / 5 / 1 E1 Normal RSU 1 / 5 / 2 E1 Normal RSU 1 / 5 / 3 E1 Normal RSU 1 / 5 / 4 E1 Normal RSU 1 / 5 / 5 E1 Normal RSU 1 / 5 / 6 E1 Normal RSU 1 / 5 / 7 E1 Normal RSU --------------------------------------------------------------------------
Step 7 Add and confirm service boards in the slave shelf.

huawei(config)#board huawei(config)#board huawei(config)#board huawei(config)#board huawei(config)#board batadd 0/9 0/12 a32 confirm 0/9 confirm 0/10 confirm 0/11 confirm 0/12
Step 8 Add remote subscribers.

huawei(config)#esl user huawei(config-esl-user)#mgpstnuser batadd 1/9/0 1/12/31 0 terminalid 0 telno 12340001
----End
Result
After the E1 subtending is configured, subscribers with phone numbers 1234000112340128 should be able to call each other.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
310
27 Configuring the QoS of the Voice Service
27
Configuring the QoS of the Voice Service
About This Chapter

Configuring the QoS of the voice service includes the application of the QoS technology and the process for configuring the QoS test of the voice service on the UA5000. 27.1 Introduction to the Voice Service QoS The quality of service (QoS) provides subscriber services with end-to-end quality assurance by a set of measurement indexes, such as service availability, throughput, time delay, jitter, and loss rate. 27.2 Configuration Example of the QoS Test Task This topic describes how to start a passive QoS test task on the UA5000 to monitor the actual service.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
311
27.1 Introduction to the Voice Service QoS

The quality of service (QoS) provides subscriber services with end-to-end quality assurance by a set of measurement indexes, such as service availability, throughput, time delay, jitter, and loss rate.
Service Description
The UA5000 provides the function of the QoS test. The UA5000 can work with the EMS to test the quality of the IP network, or start the QoS test by itself. The UA5000 can add an 802.1Q/ 802.1p or a type of service (ToS) label to the upstream packet. The upper layer device in the IP network can take proper measures according to the label to ensure the QoS of the voice service. l Passive QoS test: After receiving the test command from the EMS or the host, the UA5000 collects all QoS messages of appropriate sessions. The messages are reported to the EMS through a test port at the scheduled time. The differences between the active and passive tests are as follows: In the active test, the call is set up automatically and the QoS information is recorded. In the passive test, the QoS information is recorded only when there are calls that meet the requirements. l In the QoS passive test, the UA5000 command line and the EMS are independent of each other. The EMS can start the test task without running the UA5000 command line. The UA5000 command line can, however, forcibly stop the test task started by the EMS.
l l The UA5000 supports the active and passive QoS tests. The UA5000 supports a maximum of 16 passive QoS tests concurrently.
27.2 Configuration Example of the QoS Test Task

This topic describes how to start a passive QoS test task on the UA5000 to monitor the actual service.
Prerequisite
Before a QoS test is started, the following parameters must be set: l l l IP address of the peer device used in the test Start time of the test Interval for reporting the test result to the EMS
Data Plan
Table 27-1 provides the data plan for starting a QoS test at the local end.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
312
Table 27-1 Data plan for starting a QoS test at the local end Item Loop delay Jitter Packet loss ratio IP address of the peer device Index of the task Data 200 ms 20 ms 1% 10.10.20.20 1
Context
To start a QoS test task on the UA5000, run the qos-rtptest command. The test result is not reported to the EMS.
Procedure
Step 1 Set the QoS alarm threshold parameters.
huawei(config)#qos threshold loopdelay 200 jitter 20 packetlost 1
Step 2 Start the QoS test task on the UA5000.

huawei(config)#qos-rtptest 1 10.10.20.20
----End
Result
The QoS test task for 10.10.20.20 is started. When the QoS parameters exceed the thresholds, the QoS alarms are generated. To verify the configuration of the QoS test task, do as follows:
huawei(config)#display qos-rtptest all Task Index : 1 Task Execution Time (sec) : 0 Peer Address : 10.10.20.20 Duration (sec) :3600 Tick (sec) : 60 TaskMode : COMMAND InPkts : 0 OutPkts : 0 InOctets : 0 OutOctets : 0 InDropPkts : 0 MaxDropRate (percent) : 0, Port :-/-/MinDropRate (percent) : 0, Port :-/-/MaxJitter (millisec) : 0, Port :-/-/MinJitter (millisec) : 0, Port :-/-/MaxLoopDelay (millisec) : 0, Port :-/-/MinLoopDelay (millisec) : 0, Port :-/-/-
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
313
28 Configuring the Security of the Voice Service
28
Configuring the Security of the Voice Service
About This Chapter

Configuring the security of the voice service includes the registration process of the device and the configuration process of the UA5000 device authentication. 28.1 Introduction to the Voice Service Security This topic describes how the UA5000 as an MG requests registration on the MGC and the registration process of the device when the H.248 or MGCP protocol is used. 28.2 Configuring the Device Authentication This topic describes how to configure the authentication parameters of the MG interface on the UA5000 to implement the device authentication function when the H.248 or HGCP protocol is used.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
314
28.1 Introduction to the Voice Service Security

This topic describes how the UA5000 as an MG requests registration on the MGC and the registration process of the device when the H.248 or MGCP protocol is used.
28.1.1 Registration Process When the H.248 Protocol Is Used

This topic describes the process that the UA5000 registers on the MGC as an MG and the MGC verifies the validity of the MG identity when the H.248 protocol is used.
Service Description
Figure 28-1 shows the process for registering the MG with the MGC when the H.248 protocol is used. Figure 28-1 Process for registering the MG with the MGC (through the H.248 protocol)
MG Start MGC (1) ServiceChange (2) Reply (3) Modify (4) Reply (5) Modify (6) Reply
Table 28-1 describes the registration process. Table 28-1 Process for registering the MG with the MGC (through the H.248 protocol) Number (1) Description The MG sends a ServiceChange message to the MGC for registration. In the ServiceChange message, TerminationID is Root, Method is Restart, ServiceChangeReason is mandatory and the version is optional. The message contains the MG timestamp (determined by the time of the MG) and the MG ID. The values of the MG timestamp and the MG ID are encrypted through MD5 by the static cipher key, which is set by both the MG and the MGC. The MGC sends the Reply message to the MG.
(2)
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
315
Number (3)
Description The MGC sends the Modify message to the MG. The MGC produces a key according to the MG timestamp, MG ID, and MGC ID. The MGC then sends the Modify message that contains the key to the MG. The KEY is encrypted through the MD5 by the static cipher key, which is set by both the MG and the MGC. The MG sends the Reply message to the MGC. The MGC sends the Modify message, which contains the MGC timestamp encrypted by the key. The MG receives the Modify message and obtains the MGC timestamp. The MG sends the Reply message to the MGC. The message contains the MG ID and the MGC timestamp encrypted by the key for authentication.
(4) (5) (6)
NOTE
After the registration is completed successfully, the MG sends the heartbeat detection messages for security authentication. When the heartbeat detection message fails in the security authentication, the MGC forces the MG to exit the service. The heartbeat detection messages are contained in the Modify message, and the message sending interval is three minutes.
28.1.2 Registration Process When the MGCP Protocol Is Used

This topic describes the process that the UA5000 registers on the MGC as an MG and the MGC verifies the validity of the MG identity when the MGCP protocol is used.
Service Description
In the MGCP protocol, the MG can register with the MGC in either of the following ways: wildcard registration and single endpoint registration. Wildcard registration If there are a large number of subscribers under an MG interface, the registration process takes a long time and a large number of messages are generated. In this case, wildcard registration is recommended. Figure 28-2 shows the wildcard registration process.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
316
Figure 28-2 Wildcard registration process (through the MGCP protocol)

MG Start (1) RSIP (2) ACK (3) RQNT (4) ACK (5) RQNT (6) ACK (7) NTFY (8) ACK MGC
Table 28-2 describes the wildcard registration process when the MGCP protocol is used. Table 28-2 Wildcard registration process (through the MGCP protocol) Number (1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) Description The MG sends a registration request message to the MGC. The MGC sends a reply message to the MGC. The MGC sends the random number and algorithm ID for generating the shared cipher key to the MG. The MG sends a reply message to the MGC. The MGC initiates the authentication of the MG. The MG sends a reply message to the MGC. The MG sends an authentication response message to the MGC. The MGC sends a reply message to the MG.
Single endpoint registration To register a single MG, use the single endpoint registration process. Figure 28-3 shows the single endpoint registration process.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
317
Figure 28-3 Single endpoint registration process (through the MGCP protocol)
MG (1) RSIP (2) ACK (3) RQNT (4) ACK MGC
Table 28-3 describes the single endpoint registration process when the MGCP protocol is used. Table 28-3 Single endpoint registration process (through the MGCP prtocol) Number 1 2 3 4 Description The MG sends a registration message to the MGC. The MGC sends a reply message to the MG. The MGC sends a RQNT message to the MG. The MG sends a reply message to the MGC.
28.2 Configuring the Device Authentication

This topic describes how to configure the authentication parameters of the MG interface on the UA5000 to implement the device authentication function when the H.248 or HGCP protocol is used.
28.2.1 Configuring the Device Authentication (the H.248 Protocol)

When the H.248 protocol is used, you can configure the UA5000 device authentication by configuring the registration mode of the MG interface, the MG interface to support the device authentication, authentication initial key, and authentication gateway ID of the MG interface.
Prerequisite
l l The MG interface must be added successfully. The encryption type, initial key, and DH authentication MG ID must be configured on the MGC. The parameters configured on the UA5000 must be the same as the parameters configured on the MGC.
Context
When the MGC is the SoftX3000 of Huawei, the authentication MG ID must be a string with more than eight digits, and the initial key must be a string with more than eight and less than 16 digits.
Procedure
Step 1 In the global config mode, run the interface h248 command to enter the MG interface mode. Step 2 Run the display mg-software parameter 4 command to query the registration mode used by the MG interface. l To register all the subscribers under the MG interface, use the wildcard registration mode. l To register a single subscriber under the MG interface, use the single endpoint registration mode. Step 3 If the query result is different from the planned registration mode, run the mg-software parameter 4 command to set the registration mode of the MG interface. If the query result is the same as the planned registration mode, proceed to Step 4. Step 4 Run the mg-software parameter 6 0 command to set the MG interface to support the device authentication. Step 5 Run the auth command to set the authentication MG ID and initial key. Step 6 Run the display auth command to query the device authentication parameters. Step 7 Run the reset command to reset the MG interface. ----End
Example
The following example describes how to configure the authentication for the UA5000. Table 28-4 provides the data plan for configuring the device authentication parameters. Table 28-4 Data plan for configuring the device authentication parameters (through the H.248 protocol) Item MG interface ID Data 0 Item Whether to use the wildcard for registration Initial key Data Yes
Authentication MG ID
UA5000
0123456789ABCDE F
huawei(config)#interface h248 0 huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display mg-software parameter 4 ------------------------------------------------Interface Id:0 para index:4 value:0 ------------------------------------------------APPENDIX: ------------------------------------------------Interface software parameter name: 4: Whether MG register to MGC with wildcard 0: Yes 1: No huawei(config-if-h248-0)#mg-software parameter 6 0 huawei(config-if-h248-0)#auth auth_mgid ua5000 initial_key 0123456789ABCDEF huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display auth [AUTH_PARA config]
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
319
Initial Key : 0123456789ABCDEF Auth MGid : UA5000 Algorithm : MD5 huawei(config-if-h248-0)#reset coldstart Are you sure to reset MG interface?(y/n)[n]:y huawei(config-if-h248-0)# Reset MG interface 0 success!
28.2.2 Configuring the Device Authentication (the MGCP Protocol)

When the MGCP protocol is used, you can configure the UA5000 device authentication by configuring the registration mode of the MG interface, authentication initial key, and authentication gateway ID of the MG interface.
Prerequisite
l l The MG interface must be added successfully. The encryption type, initial key, and DH authentication MG ID must be configured on the MGC. The parameters configured on the UA5000 must be the same as the parameters configured on the MGC.
Context
l When the MGC is the SoftX3000 of Huawei, the authentication MG ID must be a string with more than eight digits, and the initial key must be a string with more than eight and less than 16 digits. In the case of single endpoint registration, the UA5000 supports only the passive authentication mode and does not support the active authentication mode.
Procedure
l Active authentication mode
NOTE
When the UA5000 uses the MGCP protocol and the MGC need not authenticate the subscribers of the UA5000, select the passive authentication mode.
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. l 1. 2.
In the global config mode, run the interface mgcp command to enter the MG interface mode. Run the mg-software parameter 4 0 command to select the wildcard registration mode. Run the auth command to set the active authentication mode, and set the authentication MG ID and initial key. Run the display auth command to query the device authentication parameters. Run the reset command to reset the MG interface. In the global config mode, run the interface mgcp command to enter the MG interface mode. To register all the subscribers under the MG interface, run the mg-software parameter 4 0 command to select the wildcard registration mode. To register a single subscriber, proceed to Step 3. Run the auth command to set the passive authentication mode, and set the authentication key.
Passive authentication mode
3.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
4. 5. ----End
Run the display auth command to query the device authentication parameters. Run the reset command to reset the MG interface.
Example
The following example describes how to configure the active authentication mode for the UA5000. Table 28-5 provides the data plan for configuring the active authentication mode. Table 28-5 Data plan for configuring the active authentication mode (through the MGCP protocol) Item MG interface ID Authentication MG ID Data 0 UA5000 Item Whether to use the wildcard for registration Initial key Data Yes 0123456789ABCDEF
huawei(config)#interface mgcp 0 huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#mg-software parameter 4 0 huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#auth mode2 auth_mgid UA5000 initial_key 0123456789ABCDEF huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#display auth active request authentication mode config: Initial Key : 123456789ABCDEF Auth MGid : UA5000 Algorithm : MD5 huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#reset Are you sure to reset MG interface?(y/n)[n]:y huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)# Reset MG interface 0 success!
The following example describes how to configure the passive authentication mode for theUA5000. Table 28-6 provides the data plan for configuring the passive authentication mode. Table 28-6 Data plan for configuring the passive authentication mode (through the MGCP protocol) Item MG interface ID Data 0 Item Whether to use the wildcard for registration Data Yes
Initial key
0123456789ABCDEF
huawei(config)#interface mgcp 0 huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#mg-software parameter 4 0 huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#auth mode1 key 0123456789ABCDEF huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#display auth passive respond authentication mode config:
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
321
Auth Key : 123456789ABCDEF Algorithm : MD5 huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#reset Are you sure to reset MG interface?(y/n)[n]:y huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)# Reset MG interface 0 success!
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
322
29 Configuring the Reliability of the Voice Service
29
Configuring the Reliability of the Voice Service
About This Chapter

UA5000 provides the assurance function of the reliable voice service. Configuring the reliability of the voice service includes the application of the technology of the voice service reliability and the process for configuring the voice service reliability of the UA5000. 29.1 Introduction to the Voice Service Reliability The reliability of the UA5000 voice service is implemented through features such as dual homing, standalone, emergency channel, and separation of the signaling stream and the media stream. 29.2 Configuring the Dual Homing Dual-homing is a disaster recovery mechanism to provide communication during emergency situations when the softswitch device is down or an unexpected disaster occurs (such as fire in the equipment room, disconnection of cables connected to the equipment room, and abnormal power supply). 29.3 Configuring the Standalone Service Configure the standalone service of the UA5000. When the UA5000 is disconnected from the MGC, the UA5000 processes the services of the internal subscribers on the same MG interface so that they can call each other without the support of the MGC. 29.4 Configuring an Emergency Channel Configure an emergency channel of the UA5000. When the UA5000 is disconnected from the MGC, the subscribers of the UA5000 can dial the external phone numbers that matches the emergency digitmap. 29.5 Configuring the Separation Between the Signaling Stream and the Media Stream This topic describes how to configure the signaling IP address and the media IP address for the VAG to separate the signaling stream from the media stream.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
323
29.1 Introduction to the Voice Service Reliability

The reliability of the UA5000 voice service is implemented through features such as dual homing, standalone, emergency channel, and separation of the signaling stream and the media stream.
Service Description
The details about the reliability of the UA5000 voice service are as follows: l Dual homing In dual homing, one UA5000 can register with two MGCs when the H.248 protocol is used or one UA5000 can register with three MGCs when the MGCP protocol is used. When the primary MGC is faulty and cannot communicate with the UA5000, the services are switched to a secondary MGC. The dual homing of the UA5000 is carried out by the heartbeat detection. Figure 29-1 shows the heartbeat detection and the switchover process. Figure 29-1 Heartbeat detection and switchover process
UA5000 (1) Notify (it/ito) Heatbeat lost (2) ServiceChange (Method=Failover, Reason=909) (3) Reply Registration on MGC2 succeeds Registration on MGC2 fails (4) ServiceChange (Method=Disconnected, Reason=909) (5) Reply MGC1 MGC2
Table 29-1 describes the heartbeat detection and the switchover process. Table 29-1 Description of the heartbeat detection and the switchover process No. (1) Description The UA5000 sends several consecutive heartbeat detection messages (Notify) and does not receive any response. This indicates that the primary MGC (MGC1) is faulty. The UA5000 sends a registration request message ServiceChange (Method = Failover, Reason = 909) to the MGC2 according to the preset order in the MGC list.
(2)
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
No. (3)
Description If the UA5000 receives a response Reply from the MGC2, it indicates that the registration on the MGC2 is successful and the process is complete. If the UA5000 does not receive a response from the MGC2 after sending the several consecutive ServiceChange messages, it indicates that the registration on the MGC2 has failed. If there is another MGC in the secondary MGC list, the UA5000 repeats step 2 and step 3 for the next MGC. If there is no other secondary MGC, the UA5000 sends the registration message ServiceChange (Method = Disconnected, Reason = 909 (neighboring MGC fault)) to the original primary MGC (MGC 1) based on the avalanche mechanism for preventing the reset after a random delay. If the UA5000 receives the response Reply from the MGC1, the communication between the UA5000 and the MGC1 is restored and the process is complete. If the UA5000 does not receive a response after sending several consecutive ServiceChange requests to the MGC1, the registration on the MGC1 fails and the UA5000 proceeds with step 2.
(4)
(5)
Internal call standalone When the UA5000 is disconnected from the MGC, the subscribers on the same MG interface can call each other. The MG interface is supported by the UA5000 instead of the MGC.
Emergency channel When the UA5000 is disconnected from the MGC, the subscribers of the UA5000 can dial the external phone numbers that are listed in the digitmap as emergency call phone numbers. For example, in the case of a fire, you can dial the fire emergency number, such as 911 in the United States.
Separation of the signaling stream and the media stream Each VAG can be configured with independent signaling IP address and media stream IP address, and can be configured in different VLANs. You can separate the control and the transmission by separating the signaling stream from the media stream to enhance the reliability of the voice service. The H.248 protocol supports this feature and the MGCP protocol does not support this feature.
29.2 Configuring the Dual Homing

Dual-homing is a disaster recovery mechanism to provide communication during emergency situations when the softswitch device is down or an unexpected disaster occurs (such as fire in the equipment room, disconnection of cables connected to the equipment room, and abnormal power supply).
29.2.1 Configuring the Dual Homing (the H.248 Protocol)

Configuring the dual homing means registering one UA5000 with two MGCs. When one MGC is faulty and cannot support the communication, the UA5000 automatically switches to the other MGC.
Prerequisite
l l l The MG interface must be added successfully. In the MG interface attributes, MGC1 and MGC2 must be configured. On the MGCs, the data for interconnecting to the UA5000 must be configured.
Procedure
Step 1 In the global config mode, run the interface h248 command to enter the MG interface mode. Step 2 Run the mg-software parameter command to configure the MG interface to support dual homing. ----End
Example
To configure the MG interface (with ID 0) on the UA5000 to support dual homing through the heartbeat detection, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface h248 0 huawei(config-if-h248-0)#mg-software parameter 2 0
29.2.2 Configuring the Dual Homing (the MGCP Protocol)

Configuring the dual homing means registering one UA5000 with two MGCs. When one MGC is faulty and cannot communicate with the MG, the UA5000 automatically switches to the other MGC.
Prerequisite
Procedure
Step 1 In the global config mode, run the interface mgcp command to enter the MG interface mode. Step 2 Run the mg-software parameter command to enable the function of the heartbeat message. Step 3 Run the mg-software parameter command to configure the MG interface to support dual homing. ----End
Example
To configure the MG interface (with ID 0) on the UA5000 to support dual homing through heartbeat detection, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface mgcp 0 huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#mg-software parameter 3 1 huawei(config-if-mgcp-0)#mg-software parameter 2 0
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
326
29.3 Configuring the Standalone Service

Configure the standalone service of the UA5000. When the UA5000 is disconnected from the MGC, the UA5000 processes the services of the internal subscribers on the same MG interface so that they can call each other without the support of the MGC.
l Currently, the telephone numbers configured for the standalone service cannot be checked for repetition. When configuring the telephone numbers for the standalone service, make sure that the telephone numbers are unique. Otherwise, the standalone service cannot be implemented. The telephone numbers configured on the UA5000 must be the same as the telephone numbers configured on the MGC. The UA5000 supports the standalone service only when it uses the H.248 protocol.
l l
Figure 29-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the standalone service. Figure 29-2 Flowchart for configuring the standalone service
Start
Configure voice subscriber data
Configure service types in standalone
(Optional) Configure standalone timers
Configure the digitmap for internal calls
End
NOTE
For details about how to configure the voice subscriber data, see "10 Configuring the VoIP Service."
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
327
29.4 Configuring an Emergency Channel

Configure an emergency channel of the UA5000. When the UA5000 is disconnected from the MGC, the subscribers of the UA5000 can dial the external phone numbers that matches the emergency digitmap.
Context
The UA5000 supports the emergency channel function only when it uses the H.248 protocol.
Service Description
Emergency call applies when the network to which the caller is connected fails. The caller is configured with ports for emergency calls on the CDI board, and the ports are connected to the ports for outgoing calls. These ports serve as the agent for setting up external calls. As the resources on the ports are limited, only important and emergency numbers are configured in the digitmap for emergency calls to ensure the connectivity of these calls.
Figure 29-3 shows the flowchart for configuring the emergency channels. Figure 29-3 Flowchart for configuring the emergency channels
Start
Configure voice subscriber data
Add a CDI board
Configure attributes for the CDI ports Configure emergency channels (Optional) Configure standalone timers Configure digitmap for emergency calls
End
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
328
Procedure
Step 1 Run the board add command to add the CDI board. Step 2 Run the board confirm command to confirm the CDI board. Step 3 Run the cdi command to enter the CDI mode. Step 4 Run the port attribute set command to configure the attributes for the CDI ports. Step 5 Run the quit command to exit the CDI mode. Step 6 Run the esl user command to enter the ESL user mode. Step 7 Run the mgddiuser add frameid/slotid/portid emergency command to configure the port as the port for an emergency channel. Step 8 Run the quit command to exit the ESL user mode. Step 9 Run the interface h248 command to enter the MG interface mode. Step 10 Run the digitmap set emergency command to set the digitmap for emergency calls. ----End
Example
The following example describes how to set port 0 on the CDI board at frame 0/slot 10 as the port of the emergency channel, and set the digitmap for emergency calls as 119|110|168xxxxx.
huawei(config)#board add 0/10 cdi huawei(config)#board confirm 0/10 huawei(config)#cdi huawei(config-cdi)#port attribute set 0/10/0 workmode ddi huawei(config-cdi)#quit huawei(config)#esl user huawei(config-esl-user)#mgddiuser add 0/10/0 emergency huawei(config-esl-user)#quit huawei(config)#interface h248 0 huawei(config-h248-0)#digitmap set emergency 119|110|168xxxxx
29.5 Configuring the Separation Between the Signaling Stream and the Media Stream
This topic describes how to configure the signaling IP address and the media IP address for the VAG to separate the signaling stream from the media stream.
Prerequisite
l l The system must be configured to support the H.248 protocol. The IP address to be used in the example must be configured in the IP address pool. For details of adding the IP address, see the ip address command.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
Context
The signaling IP address and the media IP address of the VAG are two optional parameters in the attributes of the MG interface. For information about the other parameters of the MG interface attributes, see "9.6 Configuring the Attributes of the MG Interface (the H.248 Protocol)."
Procedure
Step 1 In global config mode, run the interface h248 command to enter the MG interface mode. Step 2 Run the if-h248 attribute command to configure the signaling IP address and the media IP address so that they are different from each other. Step 3 Run the display if-h248 attribute command to query the configuration of the signaling IP address and the media IP address. ----End
Example
To configure the signaling IP address as 10.10.10.2 and the media IP address as 192.168.10.2 for MG interface 0 of the UA5000, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface h248 1 huawei(config-if-h248-1)#if-h248 attribute mgip 10.10.10.2 mgport 2944 mgcip_1 10.10.10.4 mgcport_1 9800 code text transfer udp mg-media-ip 10.144.78.138 huawei(config-if-h248-1)#display if-h248 attribute --------------------------------------------------------------------MGID 1 MG Description MG DomainName Protocol H248 H248version Negotiated Originally 3 Profile Negotiation Para disable Profile 0:NoProfile("") 2833Encrypt Codetype Transmode HeartBeatTimer(s) HeartBeatRetransTimes HeartBeatRetransTimer(s) MG signalling IP MG signalling Port MG media IP MIDType DeviceName Text UDP 60 3 60 10.10.10.2 2944 10.144.78.138 IP4_ADDR -
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
330
30 Configuring the Link Detection
30
Configuring the Link Detection
About This Chapter

The UA5000 provides the function of the layer 2 link detection. Configuring the link detection includes the application of the UA5000 link detection technology and the process for configuring the link detection. 30.1 Introduction to the Link Detection The link detection that the UA5000 supports includes the ARP link detection, BFD link detection, and ETH_OAM link detection. 30.2 Configuration Example of the ARP Link Detection This topic describes how to configure the ARP link detection on the UA5000. When the ARP link detection on the UA5000 is enabled, the UA5000 can monitor the link status. When the link is faulty, the UA5000 switches the links to avoid the long-time service interruption (the interruption lasts for several seconds). 30.3 Configuration Example of the BFD Link Detection This topic describes how to configure the BFD link detection on the UA5000. When the BFD link detection on the UA5000 is enabled, the UA5000 can monitor the link status. When the link is faulty, the UA5000 switches the links to avoid the long-time service interruption (the interruption lasts for a few hundred milliseconds). 30.4 Configuration Example of the ETH_OAM Layer 2 Link Detection This topic describes how to configure the ETH_OAM link detection on the UA5000. When the ETH_OAM link detection on the UA5000 is enabled, the UA5000 can monitor the link status. When the link is faulty, the UA5000 switches the links to avoid the long-time service interruption (the interruption lasts for a few hundred milliseconds).
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
331
30.1 Introduction to the Link Detection

The link detection that the UA5000 supports includes the ARP link detection, BFD link detection, and ETH_OAM link detection.
Service Description
l An increasingly important feature of the network device is: The UA5000 is required to quickly detect the fault in the communication between the adjacent systems or in the endto-end communication. When the device is faulty, the UA5000 can set up the alternative channel or switch the service to other links in less time. The UA5000 can use the mechanism of active/standby switchover to ensure the service stability. Functions of the link protection on the UA5000 include the following: ARP link detection: After the ARP link detection is enabled, the UA5000 sends the ARP packet to the gateway that matches the primary service IP address to detect the link. After the UA5000 detects that the link is faulty, it performs the active/standby switchover between the two uplink network ports. In this case, the service is switched to the standby link to ensure the normal transmission of the service. BFD link detection: BFD can detect the fault in any type of channel between systems. BFD focuses on quickly detecting the fault of the link, and ensures better QoS for transmitting the voice, video, and VoD services. It provides subscribers with the services featuring high reliability and high applicability, such as VoIP services and other realtime services. ETH_OAM link detection: ETH_OAM performs the link detection and the link switchover protection as quickly as BFD.
Service specifications of the ARP, BFD, and ETH_OAM link detections are as follows: l l l ARP link detection: It supports the detection of a single link only. The control boards that support this feature are PVMB, and PVMD. BFD link detection: It supports the detection of a single link and double links. The control board that supports this feature is PVMD. ETH_OAM link detection: It supports the detection of double links only. The control board that supports this feature is PVMD.
30.2 Configuration Example of the ARP Link Detection

This topic describes how to configure the ARP link detection on the UA5000. When the ARP link detection on the UA5000 is enabled, the UA5000 can monitor the link status. When the link is faulty, the UA5000 switches the links to avoid the long-time service interruption (the interruption lasts for several seconds).
Prerequisite
l The networking of the UA5000 must support the ARP link detection. The networking modes that support the ARP link detection are as follows:
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
Independent uplink networking through the active service port with the configuration of two PVM control boards The UA5000 is configured with two PVM control boards. The UA5000 uses the independent uplink mode and transmits the service packets upstream to the upper layer device through the active network port on the PVM control board. Uplink networking with the configuration of one PVM control board The UA5000 is configured with one PVM control board. The UA5000 transmits the service packets upstream to the upper layer device through the network port on the PVM control board.
NOTE
In the mode of the uplink networking with the configuration of one PVM control board, when the link is faulty, the UA5000 reports only the status of the link to you and does not perform the active/standby switchover for the uplink network port. The integrated networking of IPMB or PVM does not support the ARP link detection.
The UA5000 uses PVMB, or PVMDas its control boards.
Networking
Figure 30-1 shows the example network for configuring the ARP link detection. Use network cables to connect network ports of slot 0/4 and slot 0/5 of the UA5000 to the router. Set up an ARP link between slot 0/4 of the UA5000 and the router. Figure 30-1 Example network for configuring the ARP link detection
MGC
Router
ARP link FE P P V V M M B B 0/4 0/5 FE 0/11 A 3 2
UA5000
phone1
phone32
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
333
Data Plan
Table 30-1 provides the data plan for configuring the ARP link detection. Table 30-1 Data plan for configuring the ARP link detection Type Detection link group Item Name of the detection link group Detection mode of the link group Data group1 single-detect
NOTE The ARP link detection supports only the single-link detection.
Detection protocol of the link group ARP detection link Name of the ARP detection link
arp-detect Adetect
Figure 30-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the ARP link detection. Figure 30-2 Flowchart for configuring the ARP link detection
Start
Add a detection link group
Add an ARP detection link
Activate the detection link group
Query the status and the configuration of the detection link
End
CAUTION
Add a detection link group before setting up an ARP detection link.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
334
Procedure
Step 1 Add a detection link group.
huawei(config)#interface eth huawei(interface-eth)#detect-group add group1 mode single-detect protocol arp-detect
Step 2 Add an ARP detection link.

huawei(interface-eth)#arp-detect add Adetect detect-group group1
Step 3 Activate the detection link group.

huawei(interface-eth)#detect-group enable group1
Step 4 Query the status and the configuration of the detection link.
huawei(interface-eth)#display arp-detect state ----------------------------------------------------------------------LinkName State F/S M/S GroupName ----------------------------------------------------------------------Adetect Up 0/4 master group1 ----------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(interface-eth)#display arp-detect configuration ----------------------------------------------------------------------LinkName Tx_interval(ms) Rx_interval(ms) Multiplier GroupName ----------------------------------------------------------------------Adetect 2000 2000 3 group1 -----------------------------------------------------------------------
----End
Result
l l l Run the display arp-detect state command to query the status of the detection link. Run the display arp-detect configuration command to query the configuration of the detection link. When the link is faulty, the UA5000 can detect the faulty link and can automatically perform the switchover. This shortens the duration of the service interruption (the interruption lasts for only several seconds) on the UA5000.
30.3 Configuration Example of the BFD Link Detection

This topic describes how to configure the BFD link detection on the UA5000. When the BFD link detection on the UA5000 is enabled, the UA5000 can monitor the link status. When the link is faulty, the UA5000 switches the links to avoid the long-time service interruption (the interruption lasts for a few hundred milliseconds).
Prerequisite
l The networking of the UA5000 must support the BFD link detection. The networking modes that support the BFD link detection are as follows: Independent uplink networking through the active service port with the configuration of two PVM control boards The UA5000 is configured with two PVM control boards. The UA5000 uses the independent uplink mode and transmits the service packets upstream to the upper layer device through the active network port on the PVM control board. In this case, you can configure the BFD single-link detection or the BFD double-link detection.
Uplink networking with the configuration of one PVM control board The UA5000 is configured with one PVM control board. The UA5000 transmits the service packets upstream to the upper layer device through the network port on the PVM control board. In this case, you can configure the BFD single-link detection.
NOTE
In the mode of the uplink networking with the configuration of one PVM control board, when the link is faulty, the UA5000 reports only the status of the link to you and does not perform the active/standby switchover for the uplink network port. The integrated networking of IPMB or PVM does not support the BFD link detection.
The UA5000 uses PVMD as its control board.
Networking
Figure 30-3 shows the example network for configuring the BFD link detection. Connect network ports of slot 0/4 and slot 0/5 of the UA5000 to the router by using network cables. Set up a BFD link between slot 0/4 of the UA5000 and the router and a link between slot 0/5 and the router.
NOTE
The following network uses the detection of double BFD links as an example. The networking and the configuration for the detection of a single BFD link is similar to the networking and configuration for the ARP detection. See "30.2 Configuration Example of the ARP Link Detection."
Figure 30-3 Example network for configuring the BFD link detection
MGC Router 10.10.10.90 Link 1 FE/GE 10.10.10.70 P P V V M M D D 0/4 0/5 0/11 Link 2 10.10.10.78 FE/GE A 3 2 Router 10.10.10.94
UA5000
phone1
phone32
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
336
Data Plan
Table 30-2 provides the data plan for configuring the BFD link detection. Table 30-2 Data plan for configuring the BFD link detection Type Detection link group Item Name of the detection link group Detection mode of the link group Data group1 double-detect
NOTE The BFD link detection supports the single-link detection or the doublelink detection. The following uses the double-link detection as an example.
Detection protocol of the link group BFD detection link Name of the BFD detection link
bfd Bdetect1 Bdetect2
peerip
10.10.10.94 10.10.10.90
localip
10.10.10.78 10.10.10.70
NOTE When you configure the BFD double-link detection, localip must be configured with different IP addresses.
Figure 30-4 shows the flowchart for configuring the BFD link detection.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
337
Figure 30-4 Flowchart for configuring the BFD link detection

Start
Enable the uplink port of the standby control board
Add a BFD detection link
End
CAUTION
l Add a detection link group before setting up a BFD detection link. l Run the uplink tps on command to enable the uplink port of the standby control board before setting up the detection for double BFD links. Otherwise, when the active link is faulty, the services cannot be switched to the standby link. l When you set up the detection for a single BFD link, you need not enable the port on the standby control board.
Procedure
Step 1 Enable the uplink port of the standby control board.
huawei(config)#uplink tps on

huawei(config)#interface eth huawei(interface-eth)#detect-group add group1 mode double-detect protocol bfd
Step 3 Add a BFD detection link.

huawei(interface-eth)#bfd add Bdetect1 detect-group group1 peerip 10.10.10.94 interface 0/4 discriminator 2 localip 10.10.10.78 rx-interval 50 tx-interval 50 echo on multiplier 5
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
338
huawei(interface-eth)#bfd add Bdetect2 detect-group group1 peerip 10.10.10.90 interface 0/5 discriminator 3 localip 10.10.10.70 rx-interval 50 tx-interval 50 echo on multiplier 5

huawei(interface-eth)#display bfd state ----------------------------------------------------------------------LinkName State F/S M/S GroupName ----------------------------------------------------------------------Bdetect1 Up 0/4 master group1 Bdetect2 Up 0/5 slave group1 ----------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(interface-eth)#display bfd configuration ----------------------------------------------------------------------LinkName : Bdetect1 Peer IP : 10.10.10.94 Interface : 0/4 Descriminator : 2 Local IP : 10.10.10.78 RX-interval(ms) : 50 TX-interval(ms) : 50 AcRXinterval(ms): 300 AcTXinterval(ms): 300 Multiplier : 5 Echo : On GroupName : group1 ----------------------------------------------------------------------LinkName : Bdetect2 Peer IP : 10.10.10.90 Interface : 0/5 Descriminator : 3 Local IP : 10.10.10.70 RX-interval(ms) : 50 TX-interval(ms) : 50 AcRXinterval(ms): 300 AcTXinterval(ms): 300 Multiplier : 5 Echo : On GroupName : group1 -----------------------------------------------------------------------
----End
Result
l l l Run the display bfd state command to query the status of the detection link. Run the display bfd configuration command to query the configuration of the detection link. When the link is faulty, the UA5000 can detect the faulty link and can automatically perform the switchover. This ensures that the service lasts for only a few hundred milliseconds.
30.4 Configuration Example of the ETH_OAM Layer 2 Link Detection

This topic describes how to configure the ETH_OAM link detection on the UA5000. When the ETH_OAM link detection on the UA5000 is enabled, the UA5000 can monitor the link status. When the link is faulty, the UA5000 switches the links to avoid the long-time service interruption (the interruption lasts for a few hundred milliseconds).
Prerequisite
l The networking of the UA5000 must support the ETH_OAM layer 2 link detection. The networking modes that support the ETH_OAM link detection are as follows: Independent uplink networking through the active service port with the configuration of two PVM control boards. The UA5000 is configured with two PVM control boards. The UA5000 uses the independent uplink mode and transmits the service packets upstream to the upper layer device through the active network port on the PVM control board.
NOTE
The integrated networking of IPMB or PVM does not support the ETH_OAM link detection.
The UA5000 uses PVMD as its control board.
Networking
Figure 30-5 shows the example network for configuring the ETH_OAM layer 2 link detection. Use network cables to connect network ports of slot 0/4 and slot 0/5 of the UA5000 to the router. Set up an ETH_OAM link between slot 0/4 of the UA5000 and the router, and an ETH_OAM link between slot 0/5 and the router. Figure 30-5 Example network for configuring the ETH_OAM layer 2 link detection
MGC Router Router
Link 1
FE/GE P P V V M M D D 0/4 0/5
Link 2 FE/GE 0/11 A 3 2
UA5000
phone1
phone32
Data Plan
Table 30-3 provides the data plan for configuring the ETH_OAM layer 2 link detection.
Table 30-3 Data plan for configuring the ETH_OAM layer 2 link detection Type Detection link group Item Name of the detection link group Detection mode of the link group Data group1 double-detect
NOTE The ETH_OAM link detection supports only the double-link detection.
Detection protocol of the link group ETH_OAM detection link Name of the ETH_OAM detection link
ethoam Edetect1 Edetect2
peerip
10.10.10.220 10.10.10.210
localip
10.10.10.221 10.10.10.221
NOTE When you configure the ETH_OAM link detection, localip must be configured with the same IP addresses.
Figure 30-6 shows the flowchart for configuring the ETH_OAM link detection.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
341
Figure 30-6 Flowchart for configuring the ETH_OAM link detection

Start
Enable the uplink port of the standby control board
Add an ETH_OAM detection link
End
CAUTION
l Add a detection link group before setting up an ETH_OAM detection link. l Run the uplink tps on command to enable the uplink port of the standby control board before setting up the ETH_OAM detection link. Otherwise, when the active link is faulty, the services cannot be switched to the standby link.
Procedure
Step 1 Enable the uplink port of the standby control board.
huawei(config)#uplink tps on

huawei(config)#interface eth huawei(interface-eth)#detect-group add group1 mode double-detect protocol ethoam
Step 3 Add an ETH_OAM detection link.

huawei(interface-eth)#ethoam add Edetect1 peerip 10.10.10.220 interface 0/4 localip tx-interval 40 multiplier 4 mdlevel 1 huawei(interface-eth)#ethoam add Edetect2 peerip 10.10.10.210 interface 0/5 localip tx-interval 40 multiplier 4 mdlevel 1 detect-group group1 10.10.10.221 rx-interval 30 detect-group group1 10.10.10.221 rx-interval 30
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
342

huawei(interface-eth)#display ethoam state ----------------------------------------------------------------------LinkName State F/S M/S GroupName ----------------------------------------------------------------------Edetect1 Up 0/4 master group1 Edetect2 Up 0/5 slave group1 ----------------------------------------------------------------------huawei(interface-eth)#display ethoam configuration ----------------------------------------------------------------------LinkName : Edetect1 Peer IP : 10.10.10.220 Interface : 0/4 Local IP : 10.10.10.221 RX-interval(ms) : 30 TX-interval(ms) : 40 AcRXinterval(ms): 30 AcTXinterval(ms): 40 Multiplier : 4 MDLevel : 1 GroupName : group1 ----------------------------------------------------------------------LinkName : Edetect2 Peer IP : 10.10.10.210 Interface : 0/5 Local IP : 10.10.10.211 RX-interval(ms) : 30 TX-interval(ms) : 40 AcRXinterval(ms): 30 AcTXinterval(ms): 40 Multiplier : 4 MDLevel : 1 GroupName : group1 ----------------------------------------------------------------------
----End
Result
l l l Run the display ethoam state command to query the status of the detection link. Run the display ethoam configuration command to query the configuration of the detection link. When the link is faulty, the UA5000 can detect the faulty link and can automatically perform the switchover. This ensures that the service interruption lasts for only a few hundred milliseconds.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
343
31 Configuring the Environment Monitoring
31
About This Chapter
Configuring the Environment Monitoring
This topic provides an overview of the environment monitoring and describes how to configure the environment monitoring on the UA5000. 31.1 Introduction to the Environment Monitoring During the environment monitoring, the environment monitoring serial port of the device is connected to the communication serial port of the monitored device. Through the master-slave node protocol or the access network protocol, the operator can directly monitor the environment conditions of devices. 31.2 Configuration Example of the ESC This topic describes how to set the analog and digital parameters of the ESC. In this example, configuring the ESCM whose serial port type is RS232 is considered as an example. The configuration procedures of the H302ESC, H303ESC, H304ESC, and H801ESC are the same as the configuration procedure of the ESCM. 31.3 Configuration Example of the Fan Monitoring This topic describes how to configure the speed adjustment mode and the alarm switch of the fan. Thus, the fan speed of the UA5000 can be adjusted automatically, and the fan tray of the UA5000 can be monitored. 31.4 Configuration Example of the Power Monitoring This topic considers the Power4875L as an example and describes how to configure its environment monitoring parameters. The procedures for configuring the Power4875, Power4845, and Power4820 are the same as the procedure for configuring the Power4875L. 31.5 Configuration Example of the Universal Power Monitoring This topic describes how to monitor the universal power through the ESC by using the configuration example of the PSM-A power monitoring through the H303ESC. (The PSM-A is one type of Emerson power and is displayed as PSMA on the CLI.) 31.6 Adding an EMU This topic describes how to add an EMU. After connecting the EMU to the monitoring serial port correctly, you need to add the corresponding EMU to the host system of the UA5000. 31.7 Setting the ESC Analog Parameters
This topic describes how to set the upper and lower alarm thresholds of the analog parameters, such as temperature, humidity, voltage, and current, or how to set the customized alarms of the analog parameters. 31.8 Setting the ESC Digital Parameters This topic describes how to set the alarm levels of digital parameters such as the door status sensor, or how to configure the customized alarms of the digital parameters. 31.9 Configuring the Fan Alarm Reporting This topic describes how to configure the reporting of all the fan alarms to the control unit. 31.10 Setting the Fan Speed Adjustment Mode This topic describes how to set the fan speed adjustment mode. If the fan is not in the automatic speed adjustment mode, the flow of air is more when the temperature is low or normal. 31.11 Setting the Fan Speed This topic describes how to set the fan speed. 31.12 Setting the Power Supply Parameters This topic describes how to set the parameters of the power shelf in the UA5000 to ensure the normal running of the power shelf.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
345
31.1 Introduction to the Environment Monitoring

During the environment monitoring, the environment monitoring serial port of the device is connected to the communication serial port of the monitored device. Through the master-slave node protocol or the access network protocol, the operator can directly monitor the environment conditions of devices.
Service Description
The environment parameters such as temperature, humidity, and power voltage can be monitored to ensure that the UA5000 works stably in a suitable environment. To perform the environment monitoring on a device, the environment monitoring functional modules, such as the H303ESC, H304ESC, or ESCM must be provided. In addition, some monitored devices provide the built-in monitoring modules, such as the Power4845, Power4860, Power4875, and Power4875L. These functional modules that can implement the monitoring are referred to as the environment monitor units (EMUs), regardless of whether they are built-in or not.
The EMU supported by the UA5000 can be classified into the following four categories: l Environment supervision circuit (ESC): Includes the H303ESC, H302ESC, H801ESC, H304ESC, and ESCM. Monitors the environment parameters such as ambient temperature, humidity, smoke, water, fire, voltage, and power through various sensors. FAN: Monitors the running status of the fan and adjusts the running speed of the fan according to the settings. DIS: Refers to the power distribution unit (PDU). Divides one or two DC inputs into multiple outputs. Power: Includes the Power4820, Power4845, Power4875, Power4875L, and PSE158. Monitors the environment parameters such as temperature, humidity, voltage, and power supply through various sensors.
l l l
According to the type of the adopted power supply mode (power distributionDC, powerAC), the device is generally configured with power shelf EMU or PDU EMU. When the UA5000 is connected to the corresponding EMU, bits 1 to 5 of DIP switch S1 on the ESC of the PDU need to be switched on. The five bits of the DIP switch define the address of the slave node for the PDU EMU to communicate with the host of the UA5000. When all the five bits are switched on, it indicates that the address of the slave node is 0. This is the number of the slave node of the EMU assigned by the UA5000.
NOTE
For the hardware connections of the environment monitoring board and the settings of the DIP switch, see "ESC board" in the UA5000 Hardware Description. For the principles, configuration table, functions, and sensors of the environment monitoring, see "Environment Monitoring."
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
346
31.2 Configuration Example of the ESC

This topic describes how to set the analog and digital parameters of the ESC. In this example, configuring the ESCM whose serial port type is RS232 is considered as an example. The configuration procedures of the H302ESC, H303ESC, H304ESC, and H801ESC are the same as the configuration procedure of the ESCM.
Prerequisite
l l The ESCM and the shelf of the UA5000 must be connected through the RS232 serial port cable according to the serial port type of the shelf. The settings of the ESCM DIP switch must be consistent with the slave node of the EMU.
NOTE
For the detailed settings of the DIP switch, see "ESC - Environment Monitoring."
When you add the EMU to the device, you must comply with the following rules: The system supports only one type of EMU except the ESCM. If the ESCM is added to the system, you can add the other EMU.
Data Plan
In this example, the serial port type is RS232. Table 31-1 provides the data plan for configuring the ESCM. Table 31-1 Data plan for configuring the ESCM Item EMU Data Type: MiniESC Number: 0 Subnode: 30 Remarks The ESCM is displayed as MiniESC on the CLI. When the RS232 serial port is selected for the ESCM, the slave node number must be set to 30. Set the analog parameter according to the actual requirement. The built-in analog parameter is set to monitor the ambient temperature for the device running. For the value of the parameter and the details, see the esc analog command.
Analog parameters
Analog parameter ID: 0
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
347
Item
Data Upper alarm threshold of analog parameter 0: 54
Remarks When the ambient temperature of the device reaches or exceeds 54C, the host reports an alarm. When the ambient temperature of the device is equal to or lower than 6C, the host reports an alarm. The customized humidity monitoring analog parameter is added to monitor the humidity of the device. For the value of the parameter and the details, see the esc analog command.
Lower alarm threshold of analog parameter 0: 6
Analog parameter ID: 2
Upper alarm threshold of analog parameter 2: 75% RH
When the humidity of the device reaches or exceeds 75% RH, the host reports an alarm. When the humidity of the device is equal to or lower than 5% RH, the host reports an alarm. The customized humidity alarm of the system is used. Set the digital parameter according to the actual requirement. The monitoring digital parameter of the MDF is configured to monitor the MDF status. When the MDF is faulty, the host reports an alarm. When the high level is used to represent the valid level, the host does not report an alarm in case of high level.
Lower alarm threshold of analog parameter 2: 5% RH
Name of analog parameter 2: humidity Alarm index ID of analog parameter 2: 2 Unit of analog parameter 2: % RH Sensor type of analog parameter 2: voltage type Digital parameters Digital parameter ID: 0
Valid level of digital parameter 0: high level
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
348
Item
Data Digital parameter ID: 1
Remarks Set the digital parameter according to the actual requirement. The monitoring digital parameter of the cabinet door is set to monitor the cabinet door status. When the cabinet door is open, the host reports an alarm. When the low level is used to represent the valid level, the host does not report an alarm in case of low level.
Valid level of digital parameter 1: low level
Context
l The differences between the analog parameter and digital parameter are as follows: An analog parameter is a continuous value, such as temperature, voltage, and current. When the analog parameter is used to monitor the interface, an analog parameter sensor is usually used, which provides test analog parameters in real time. A digital parameter is a discrete value that indicates a state. A digital sensor has only two values: normal and faulty. l When you set the slave node and communication baud rate, ensure that the following conditions are met: When the serial port for the ESCM is RS485, the settings of the slave node ID and the DIP switch must be consistent. The communication baud rate must be set to 19200 bit/ s. When the serial port for the ESCM is RS232, the slave node ID must be set to 30. The communication baud rate must be set to 9600 bit/s.
Figure 31-1 shows the flowchart for configuring the ESCM.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
349
Figure 31-1 Flowchart for configuring the ESCM
Procedure
Step 1 Add an EMU. Add the EMU with the EMU ID 0, the type ESCM (MiniESC on the CLI), the slave node 30, and the serial port type RS232.
huawei(config)#emu add 0 MiniESC 0 30 rs232 MiniESC
Step 2 Set the analog parameters.

huawei(config)#interface emu 0 huawei(config-if-MiniESC-0)#esc analog 0 alarm-upper-limit 54 alarm-lower-limit 6 huawei(config-if-MiniESC-0)#esc analog 2 alarm-upper-limit 75 alarm-lower-limit 5 name humidity sensor-type 0:voltage analog-alarm 2 unit %RH
Step 3 Set the digital parameters.

huawei(config-if-MiniESC-0)#esc digital 0 available-level high-level huawei(config-if-MiniESC-0)#esc digital 1 available-level low-level
Step 4 Query the ESC environment information.

huawei(config-if-MiniESC-0)#display esc environment info EMU ID: 0 ESC environment state ---------------------------Analog Environment Info-------------------------ID Name State Value AlmUpper AlmLower Unit 0 Temperature Normal 29.000 54 6 C 1 Input_-48V_0 Normal 48.046 70 35 volt 2 Humidity Normal 10.000 75 5 %RH 3 Normal -128.000 127 -128 ---------------------------Digital Environment Info--------------------------ID Name State Value |ID Name State Value 0 Wiring Normal 1 |1 Door0 Alarm 1 2 Normal 1 |3 Normal 1
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
350
4 Normal 1 |5 Normal 1 6 Normal 1 |7 Normal 1 8 Normal 1 |9 Normal 1 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------

huawei(config-if-MiniESC-0)#quit huawei(config)#save
----End
Result
After the configuration, the ESCM works in the normal state and monitors the analog and digital monitoring parameters set on the UA5000. When a monitoring parameter exceeds the normal range, the host reports an alarm.
31.3 Configuration Example of the Fan Monitoring

This topic describes how to configure the speed adjustment mode and the alarm switch of the fan. Thus, the fan speed of the UA5000 can be adjusted automatically, and the fan tray of the UA5000 can be monitored.
Prerequisite
The hardware DIP switch of the fan tray must be set so that it is consistent with the slave node value of the EMU. The baud rate must be set to 19200 bit/s.
Data Plan
Table 31-2 provides the data plan for configuring the fan monitoring. Table 31-2 Data plan for configuring the fan monitoring Item EMU Data Type: FAN Number: 1 Subnode: 6 Remarks This parameter corresponds to the hardware DIP switch of the fan tray, but cannot be the same as the slave node of the ESC. The serial port of environment monitoring communication of the fan tray must be set to RS485. In this mode, the fan speed is adjusted according to the temperature automatically. By default, the fan speed adjustment mode is automatic.
351
Serial port of environment monitoring communication: RS485 FAN parameters Fan speed adjustment mode: automatic
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
Item
Data Report the alarm that the fan tray fails to read the temperature sensor: permit Report the alarm that the fan is blocked: permit Report the alarm that the temperature is very high: permit Report the alarm that the power supply is faulty: permit
Remarks When the fan tray fails to read the temperature sensor, the host reports the alarm automatically. When the fan is blocked, the host reports the alarm automatically. When the temperature of the fan tray is very high, the host reports the alarm automatically. When the power supply of the fan tray is faulty, the host reports the alarm automatically.
Figure 31-2 shows the flowchart for configuring the fan monitoring.
Figure 31-2 Flowchart for configuring the fan monitoring

start
Add a fan tray
Set the fan speed adjustment mode Manual Set the fan speed
Automatic
Set whether to report the alarm Query the configuration parameters Save the data
End
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
352
Procedure
Step 1 Add a fan tray.
huawei(config)#emu add 1 fan 0 6 rs485
Step 2 Set whether to report the alarm.

huawei(config-if-fan-1)#fan alarmset block permit Send command to environment monitor board ,please waiting huawei(config-if-fan-1)# Execute command successful huawei(config-if-fan-1)#fan alarmset read_tem_fault permit Send command to environment monitor board ,please waiting huawei(config-if-fan-1)# Execute command successful huawei(config-if-fan-1)#fan alarmset tem_high permit Send command to environment monitor board ,please waiting huawei(config-if-fan-1)# Execute command successful huawei(config-if-fan-1)#fan alarmset fault permit Send command to environment monitor board ,please waiting huawei(config-if-fan-1)# Execute command successful for the ack...
for the ack...
for the ack...
for the ack...
Step 3 Query the configuration parameters.

huawei(config-if-fan-1)#display fan system parameter EMU ID: 1 Fan configration parameter: ---------------------------------------------------------------------------fan timing mode: auto timing ---------------------------------------------------------------------------alarm_name alarm(permit/forbid) read temperature sensor fault permit fan block permit temperature high permit board fault permit ----------------------------------------------------------------------------

huawei(config-if-fan-1)#quit huawei(config)#save
----End
Result
After the configuration, the fan tray can work in the normal state, and can adjust the fan speed automatically. At the same time, the host reports an alarm when the fan fails to read the temperature sensor, the fan is blocked, the temperature is very high, or the power supply is faulty.
31.4 Configuration Example of the Power Monitoring

This topic considers the Power4875L as an example and describes how to configure its environment monitoring parameters. The procedures for configuring the Power4875, Power4845, and Power4820 are the same as the procedure for configuring the Power4875L.
Prerequisite
l l l
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
The ESC board and host must be connected through the environment monitoring cable. The settings of the ESC DIP switch must be consistent with the slave node of the EMU. When you add the EMU to the device, you must comply with the following rules:
The system supports only one type of EMU except the ESCM. If the ESCM is added to the system, you can add the other EMU.
Data Plan
This example describes how to configure only the upper and lower alarm thresholds of ambient temperature and upper and lower measurement thresholds of ambient temperature of the Power4875L. Other parameters are set by default. For more information about the configurations of the Power4875L parameters, see "31.12 Setting the Power Supply Parameters." Table 31-3 provides the data plan for configuring the Power4875L. Table 31-3 Data plan for configuring the Power4875L Item EMU Data Type: Power4875L Number: 2 Shelf ID: 0 Subnode: 15 Remarks This parameter corresponds to the hardware DIP switches of the ESC, but cannot be the same as the slave node of the FAN. Other analog parameters are set by default.
Name: test Parameter configuration Upper alarm threshold of ambient temperature: 55 C Lower alarm threshold of ambient temperature: 5C Upper measurement threshold of ambient temperature: 100C Lower measurement threshold of ambient temperature: 0C
Figure 31-3 shows the flowchart for configuring the Power4875L.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
354
Figure 31-3 Flowchart for configuring the Power4875L
Procedure
Step 1 Add an EMU.
huawei(config)#emu add 2 power4875L 0 15 rs232 test
Step 2 Set the environment monitoring parameters of the power.

huawei(config)#interface emu 2 huawei(config-if-power4875L-2)#power environment temperature 55 5 100 0 This command is invalid unless in the contition of install the sensor, would you continue? (y/n)[n]:y Send command to environment monitor board ,please waiting for the ack... huawei(config-if-power4875L-2)# Execute command successful
Step 3 Query the environment monitoring parameters of the power.

huawei(config-if-power4875L-2)#display power environment parameter EMU ID: 2 power environment configration parameter ---------------------------------------------------------------------------AnalogID Name AlmUpper AlmLower TestHigh TestLow Unit type 0 Temperature 55 5 100 0 C Current 1 Humidity 80 10 100 0 %R.H. Current ---------------------------------------------------------------------------DigitalID Name Available Level|DigitalID Name Available Level 0 1 | 1 1 2 1 | 3 1 4 1 | 5 1 6 1 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------


huawei(config-if-power4875L-2)#quit huawei(config)#save
----End
Result
After the configuration, the Power4875L can work in the normal state. At the same time, when the ambient temperature exceeds the configured upper or lower alarm threshold of ambient temperature, the host reports an alarm.
31.5 Configuration Example of the Universal Power Monitoring

This topic describes how to monitor the universal power through the ESC by using the configuration example of the PSM-A power monitoring through the H303ESC. (The PSM-A is one type of Emerson power and is displayed as PSMA on the CLI.)
Prerequisite
The settings of the H303ESC DIP switch must be consistent with the slave node of the EMU.
Data Plan
Table 31-4 provides the data plan for configuring the universal power monitoring. Table 31-4 Data plan for configuring the universal power monitoring Item EMU Data Type: H303ESC Number: 0 Subnode: 30 Universal power Type: PSM-A (displayed as PSMA on the CLI) Protocol file name: power.pwr Remarks The subnode of the H303ESC is always 30. Use the name of the actual loaded protocol file.
Context
The UA5000 mainly uses the following types of the universal power: l l l l
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
Zhujiang power Emerson power Beijing dynamic power Eltek power

l l
Delta-cimic power Zhongheng power
Figure 31-4 shows the flowchart for configuring the universal power monitoring.
Figure 31-4 Flowchart for configuring the universal power monitoring

Start
Add an EMU
Load the protocol file of the universal power Configure the type of the universal power Query the ESC environment information
Save the data
End
Procedure
Step 1 Add an EMU. Add the EMU with the EMU ID 0, the type H303ESC, the slave node 20, and the serial port type RS232.
huawei(config)#emu add 0 H303ESC 0 30 rs232 H303ESC
Step 2 Load the protocol file of the universal power. Obtain the protocol file of the universal power through the TFTP server. Then, run the following command on the CLI with using the IP address of the actual server.
huawei(config)#load universal-power-protocol tftp 10.144.78.132 power.pwr
Step 3 Configure the type of the universal power.

huawei(config)#interface emu 0 huawei(config-if-H303ESC-0)#esc power powertype 1
Step 4 Query the ESC environment information.

huawei(config-if-H303ESC-0)#display esc power run info huawei(config-if-H303ESC-0)#display esc power state
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
357

huawei(config-if-H303ESC-0)#quit huawei(config)#save
----End
Result
After the configuration, the H303ESC works in the normal state, and monitors the universal power used by the UA5000. When the monitored parameter exceeds the normal range, the host reports an alarm.
31.6 Adding an EMU

This topic describes how to add an EMU. After connecting the EMU to the monitoring serial port correctly, you need to add the corresponding EMU to the host system of the UA5000.
Context
The EMU supported by the UA5000 can be classified into the following four categories: l Environment supervision circuit (ESC): Includes the H302ESC, H303ESC, H304ESC, H801ESC, and ESCM. Monitors the environment parameters such as temperature, humidity, smoke, water, fire, voltage, and power through various sensors. FAN: Monitors the running status of the fan and adjusts the running speed of the fan according to the settings. DIS: Refers to the power distribution unit (PDU). Divides one or two DC inputs into multiple outputs. Power: Includes the Power4820, Power4845, Power4875, Power4875L, and PSE158. Monitors the environment parameters such as temperature, humidity, voltage, and power supply through various sensors.
l l l
The serial ports of the preceding EMUs are as follows: l l The serial port type of the H302ESC, H303ESC, H304ESC, Power4820, Power4875, Power4845, and Power4875L is RS232. The serial port types of the ESCM are RS485 and RS232. Select one serial port type during the configuration according to the type of the monitored shelf.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the emu add command to add an EMU. Step 2 Run the display emu command to query the status of the EMU. ----End
Example
To add an EMU with the EMU ID 0, the type ESCM (MiniESC on the CLI), the slave node 30, and the serial port type RS232, do as follows:
huawei(config)#emu add 0 MiniESC 0 30 rs232 MiniESC huawei(config)#display emu 0
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
358
EMU ID: 0 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------EMU name : MiniESC EMU type : MiniESC EMU state : Fault Frame ID : 0 Subnode : 30 COM Port : RS232 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------NOTE
If the status of the EMU is displayed as Fault, check the following points: l Check whether the physical connection is correct. l Check whether the EMU type, shelf ID, subnode ID, and communication serial port are configured correctly.
Related Operation
Table 31-5 lists the related operations for adding an EMU. Table 31-5 Related operations for adding an EMU To... Delete an EMU Run the Command... emu del Remarks If the EMU in the shelf needs to be replaced, you need to delete the configured EMU, and then add an EMU. The EMU ID must be unique, whereas the EMU name can be duplicate.
Change the EMU name
emu modify
31.7 Setting the ESC Analog Parameters

This topic describes how to set the upper and lower alarm thresholds of the analog parameters, such as temperature, humidity, voltage, and current, or how to set the customized alarms of the analog parameters.
Prerequisite
The EMU must be added and work in the normal state.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the interface emu command to enter the corresponding environment monitoring mode. Step 2 Run the esc analog command to set the ESC analog parameters. Step 3 Run the display esc environment info command to query the ESC system analog parameters. ----End
Example
The ESCM (MiniESC on the CLI) is used in the following example. To set the upper temperature threshold to 55C, and lower temperature threshold to 5C, do as follows: Enter the ESCM config mode.
huawei(config)#interface emu 0
Set the ESCM analog parameters as follows: set the analog parameter ID to 0, the upper temperature threshold to 55C, and the lower temperature threshold to 5C
huawei(config-if-MiniESC-0)#esc analog 0 alarm-upper-limit 55 alarm-lower-limit 5
Query the ESCM system analog parameters.

huawei(config-if-MiniESC-0)#display esc environment info EMU ID: 0 ESC environment state ---------------------------Analog Environment Info-------------------------ID Name State Value AlmUpper AlmLower Unit 0 Temperature Normal 29.000 55 5 C 1 Input_-48V_0 Normal 48.046 70 35 volt 2 Humidity Normal 10.000 75 5 %RH 3 Normal -128.000 127 -128 ---------------------------Digital Environment Info--------------------------ID Name State Value |ID Name State Value 0 Wiring Normal 1 |1 Door0 Alarm 1 2 Normal 1 |3 Normal 1 4 Normal 1 |5 Normal 1 6 Normal 1 |7 Normal 1 8 Normal 1 |9 Normal 1 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Related Operation
Table 31-6 lists the related operations for setting the ESC analog parameters. Table 31-6 Related operations for setting the ESC analog parameters To... Query the alarm information Run the Command... display esc alarm Remarks Only valid for the H302ESC, H303ESC, H304ESC, and H801ESC Only valid for the H302ESC, H303ESC, H304ESC, and H801ESC Only valid for the H302ESC, H303ESC, H304ESC, and H801ESC Only valid for the H302ESC, H303ESC, H304ESC, H801ESC, Power4875, Power4875L, DIS, and PSE158
Query the ESC system configuration parameters Query the ESC power supply information Query the customized alarm information of the analog parameters
display esc system parameter display esc power
display outside_analog private-alarm
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
360
31.8 Setting the ESC Digital Parameters

This topic describes how to set the alarm levels of digital parameters such as the door status sensor, or how to configure the customized alarms of the digital parameters.
Prerequisite
The EMU must be added and work in the normal state.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the interface emu command to enter the environment monitoring mode. Step 2 Run the esc digital command to set the ESC digital parameters. Step 3 Run the display esc environment info command to query the ESC system digital parameters. ----End
Example
The ESCM (MiniESC on the CLI) is used in the following example. To set the alarm of the door status sensor to high level, do as follows: Enter the ESCM config mode.
huawei(config)#interface emu 0
Set the ESCM digital parameters.

huawei(config-if-MiniESC-0)#esc digital 0 available-level high-level
Query the settings of the digital parameters.

huawei(config-if-MiniESC-0)#display esc environment info EMU ID: 0 ESC environment state ---------------------------Analog Environment Info-------------------------ID Name State Value AlmUpper AlmLower Unit 0 Temperature Normal 29.000 55 5 C 1 Input_-48V_0 Normal 48.046 70 35 volt 2 Humidity Normal 10.000 75 0 %RH 3 Normal -128.000 127 -128 ---------------------------Digital Environment Info--------------------------ID Name State Value |ID Name State Value 0 Wiring Normal 1 |1 Door0 Alarm 1 2 Normal 1 |3 Normal 1 4 Normal 1 |5 Normal 1 6 Normal 1 |7 Normal 1 8 Normal 1 |9 Normal 1 ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Related Operation
Table 31-7 lists the related operations for setting the ESC digital parameters.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
361
Table 31-7 Related operations for setting the ESC digital parameters To... Query the alarm information Run the Command... display esc alarm Remarks Only valid for the H302ESC, H303ESC, H304ESC, and H801ESC Only valid for the H302ESC, H303ESC, H304ESC, and H801ESC Only valid for the H302ESC, H303ESC, H304ESC, and H801ESC Only valid for the H302ESC, H303ESC, H304ESC, H801ESC, Power4875, Power4875L, DIS, and PSE158
Query the ESC system configuration parameters Query the ESC power supply information Query the customized alarm information of the digital parameters
display esc system parameter display esc power
display outside-digital private-alarm
31.9 Configuring the Fan Alarm Reporting

This topic describes how to configure the reporting of all the fan alarms to the control unit.
Prerequisite
The EMU of the fan tray must be in the position and work in the normal state.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the interface emu command to enter the FAN environment monitoring mode. Step 2 Run the fan alarmset command to configure the fan alarm reporting. Step 3 Run the display fan system parameter command to query the fan alarm information. ----End
Example
To forbid the reporting of the fan block alarm, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface emu 1 huawei(config-if-fan-1)#fan alarmset block forbid Send command to environment monitor board ,please waiting for the ack... huawei(config-if-fan-1)# Execute command successful huawei(config-if-fan-1)#display fan system parameter EMU ID: 1 Fan configration parameter: ---------------------------------------------------------------------------fan timing mode: auto timing ---------------------------------------------------------------------------alarm_name alarm(permit/forbid)
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
362
read temperature sensor fault permit fan block forbid temperature high permit board fault permit ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Related Operation
Table 31-8 lists the related operations for configuring the fan alarm reporting. Table 31-8 Related operations for configuring the fan alarm reporting To... Query the running information of a fan tray Query the alarm information of a fan tray Run the Command... display fan environment info display fan alarm Remarks FAN environment monitoring mode FAN environment monitoring mode
31.10 Setting the Fan Speed Adjustment Mode

This topic describes how to set the fan speed adjustment mode. If the fan is not in the automatic speed adjustment mode, the flow of air is more when the temperature is low or normal.
Prerequisite
The EMU of the fan tray must be in the position and work in the normal state.
Context
The fan tray of the UA5000 supports the following fan speed adjustment modes: l l Automatic Manual
By default, the mode is manual with the fan speed level 5. It is recommended that you change the mode to automatic.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the interface emu command to enter the FAN environment monitoring mode. Step 2 Run the fan speed command to set the fan speed adjustment mode. Step 3 Run the display fan system parameter command to query the set parameters. ----End
Example
To set the fan speed adjustment mode to automatic, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface emu 1 huawei(config-if-fan-1)#fan speed mode automatic
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
363
Send command to environment monitor board ,please waiting for the ack... huawei(config-if-fan-1)# Execute command successful huawei(config-if-fan-1)#display fan system parameter EMU ID: 1 Fan configration parameter: ---------------------------------------------------------------------------fan timing mode: auto timing ---------------------------------------------------------------------------alarm_name alarm(permit/forbid) read temperature sensor fault permit fan block forbid temperature high permit board fault permit ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Related Operation
Table 31-9 lists the related operations for setting the fan speed adjustment mode. Table 31-9 Related operations for setting the fan speed adjustment mode To... Set the fan speed Run the Command... fan speed adjust Remarks You can set the fan speed in the manual fan speed adjustment mode. -
Configure the reporting of all the fan alarms to the control unit Query the alarm information of a fan tray
fan alarmset
display fan alarm
31.11 Setting the Fan Speed

This topic describes how to set the fan speed.
Prerequisite
l l The EMU of the fan tray must be in the position and work in the normal state. The fan speed adjustment mode must be set to manual.
Context
The fan speed levels are 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5. Level 0 indicates the lowest fan speed and level 5 indicates the highest fan speed. l l l The rated fan speed can meet the heat dissipation requirement of the system in the permitted highest ambient temperature. When the fan runs at a low speed, the damage to the fan is reduced and its life is prolonged. When the system is abnormal or one fan is faulty, the normal fans can switch to the high speed to increase the air flow so that the heat is dissipated.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
l l
Reduction of the fan speed reduces the dust absorption and prevents the air filter from being blocked. You can set the fan speed in the manual fan speed adjustment mode.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the interface emu command to enter the FAN environment monitoring mode. Step 2 Run the fan speed command to set the fan speed. Step 3 Run the display fan system parameter command to query the set parameters. ----End
Example
To set the fan speed to 3, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface emu 1 huawei(config-if-fan-1)#fan speed adjust 3 Send command to environment monitor board ,please waiting for the ack... huawei(config-if-fan-1)# Execute command successful huawei(config-if-fan-1)#display fan system parameter EMU ID: 1 Fan configration parameter: ---------------------------------------------------------------------------fan timing mode: manual timing fan speed level: 3 ---------------------------------------------------------------------------alarm_name alarm(permit/forbid) read temperature sensor fault permit fan block forbid temperature high permit board fault permit ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Related Operation
Table 31-10 lists the related operations for setting the fan speed. Table 31-10 Related operations for setting the fan speed To... Set the fan speed adjustment mode Set the reporting of all the fan alarm information to the control unit Query the alarm information of a fan tray Run the Command... fan speed mode fan alarmset display fan alarm
31.12 Setting the Power Supply Parameters

This topic describes how to set the parameters of the power shelf in the UA5000 to ensure the normal running of the power shelf.
Context
Table 31-11 lists the configuration commands of the power shelf. Table 31-11 Configuration commands of the power shelf Function Command Remarks
The configuration commands supported by the Power4875, Power4875L, Power4845, and Power4820 are as follows: Set the battery parameters power battery Set the charging currentlimiting coefficient, timed even charging duration, number, and capacity of the battery sets. Set the battery charging parameters, including the charging mode and charging voltage. Set the upper and lower alarm thresholds, and upper and lower measurement thresholds of the temperature or humidity of the power supply monitoring. Thus, an alarm is generated when the power supply works in the environment that does not meet the preset criteria, to ensure the normal running of the device. The Power4845 supports a maximum of three rectifier modules. Set the on and off states of the Power4845. The default state is on. That is, the power module is in the working state.
Set the battery charging parameters
power charge
Set the environment parameters of the power supply
power environment
Set the number of the power modules Set the parameters of the power module
power module-num
power module-parameter
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
366
Function Set the power-off parameters of the power supply
Command power off
Remarks Set the power-off thresholds of the load and battery set. l The power-off types of the power supply are the load power off and the battery set power off. l When the mains supply is cut off, the battery set supplies the power to the shelf. l When the voltage of the battery set is lower than the power-off threshold of the load, the system cuts off the power supply to the load. l When the voltage of the battery set is lower than the power-off threshold of the battery set, the system cuts off the power supply to the battery set.
Set the standby digital parameters of the power supply
power outside_digital
Set the valid level, name, and customized alarm of the extended digital parameters to monitor the digital parameters of the device in real time. Set the alarm thresholds of AC over-voltage, AC undervoltage, DC over-voltage, and DC under-voltage. Thus, when the AC voltage or DC voltage is abnormal, the rectifier module can power off automatically to protect the system.
Set the power distribution parameters of the power supply
power supply-parameter
The configuration commands only supported by the Power4875L, Power4845, and Power4820 are as follows: Set the battery test parameters power battery-test Set the auto-test period parameter of the battery and the end voltage of the battery discharging to implement the auto-discharging test of the battery.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
367
Function Set the high-temperature power-off parameters of the power supply
Command power temperature-off
Remarks Set the high-temperature power-off parameter for the load or battery. Thus, the load or battery powers off automatically in the high working temperature for selfprotection.
The configuration commands only supported by the Power4875 and Power4875L are as follows: Set the standby analog parameters of the power supply power outside_analog Set the upper and lower alarm thresholds, upper and lower measurement thresholds, sensor type, unit, name, and customized alarm of the analog parameters.
The configuration commands only supported by the Power4875L are as follows: Set the installation time of the battery of the Power4875L system power batteryinstall Set the installation time of the battery of the Power4875L system. Thus, the battery can be replaced in time when the battery life expires. When you need to initialize certain parameters of the Power4875L system, run this command.
Set certain parameters of the Power4875L system
power default
When you set the parameters, ensure that the following conditions are met: l l l DC over-voltage voltage > battery even charging voltage > battery float charging voltage > DC under-voltage voltage > load power-off voltage > battery power-off voltage DC over-voltage > (float charging voltage + 2 V) Float charging voltage > (DC under-voltage + 2 V)
NOTE
Run the following commands to set the preceding parameters: l Run the power charge command to set the even charging voltage and float charging voltage of the battery. l Run the power battery parameter command to set the DC over-voltage and under-voltage. l Run the power temperature-off command to set the load power-off voltage of the battery and the power-off voltage of the battery set.
Procedure
Step 1 Run the commands listed in Table 31-11 to configure the EMU of the power shelf. ----End
Example
To set the charging current-limiting coefficient to 0.2, timed even charging duration to 60 days, number of battery sets to 1, and capacity of battery set 0 to 130 AH, do as follows:
huawei(config)#interface emu 3 huawei(config-if-power4875L-0)#power battery parameter 1 0.2 60 130 Send command to environment monitor board ,please waiting for the ack... huawei(config-if-power4875L-0)# Execute command successful
Related Operation
Table 31-12 lists the related operations for configuring the EMU of the power shelf. Table 31-12 Related operations for configuring the EMU of the power shelf To... Run the Command...
The configuration commands supported by the Power4875, Power4875L, Power4845, and Power4820 are as follows: Query the alarm information of the power supply Query the environment information of the power supply Query the environment configuration parameters of the power supply Query the running information of the power supply Query the system configuration parameters of the power supply display power alarm display power environment info display power environment parameter
display power run info display power system parameter
The configuration commands only supported by the Power4845 and Power4875L are as follows: Query the battery test parameters display power battery-test info
The configuration commands only supported by the Power4875L are as follows: Query the installation time of the Power4875L battery Query the current use status of the Power4875L battery Query the current running time of the Power4875L Query the system information of the Power4875L display power batteryinstalltime display power battery-test-times display power current-time display power info
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
369
To... Query the related information of the Power4875L
Run the Command... display power module-time
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
370
32 Configuring the Integrated Data and Voice Networking
32
Configuring the Integrated Data and Voice Networking
About This Chapter

This topic describes the related operation for configuring the integrated data and voice networking of the UA5000. 32.1 Networking The UA5000 accesses the data and voice service through the CSRI and ETDB boards. It transmits the IP service upstream to the IP network through the IPM board, and transmits the traditional voice service to the PSTN network through the PVM board. 32.2 Prerequisites Before configuring the integrated data and voice networking, ensure that the UA5000 meets the configuration prerequisites. 32.3 Data Plan (IPM) Before the configuration, it is recommended that you implement the service data plan for the required broadband services such as the ADSL access service and the SHDSL access service. When configuring the service, configure according to the planned data. 32.4 Data Plan (PVM) Before the configuration, it is recommended that you implement the service data plan for the required voice services such as the ISDN service. When configuring the service, configure according to the planned data. 32.5 Configuration Procedure (IPM) Log in to the IPM through the serial port or the Telnet mode to configure the broadband services of the UA5000 according to the planned broadband service data. 32.6 Configuration Procedure (PVM) Log in to the PVM through the serial port or the Telnet mode to configure the narrowband services of the UA5000 according to the planned voice service data. 32.7 Verification
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
371
After the broadband service is configured successfully, the subscribers should be able to access the Internet through their PCs. After the voice service is configured successfully, the subscribers should be able to call each other.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
372
32.1 Networking
The UA5000 accesses the data and voice service through the CSRI and ETDB boards. It transmits the IP service upstream to the IP network through the IPM board, and transmits the traditional voice service to the PSTN network through the PVM board. Figure 32-1 shows the integrated data and voice networking of the UA5000. Figure 32-1 Integrated data and voice networking of the UA5000
OSS
NMS DHCP Server IPTV Server
MGC
BRAS
Router V5 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 P P I I P P C C S S E E D E T W W P P V V S S D D D D S D S X X M M M M R R L L T T L B B B B B B I I B B B B D T B S B
Splitter
NT1
PBX
phone
ISDN Phone
ISDN Phone
phone
phone
STB
PC
TV
32.2 Prerequisites
Before configuring the integrated data and voice networking, ensure that the UA5000 meets the configuration prerequisites.
The prerequisites for configuring the integrated data and voice networking of the UA5000 are as follows: l l l The hardware commissioning must be complete, and the system must be ready for service configuration. The modem must be connected and must be in the normal state. The upper layer devices, including the BRAS, DHCP sever, multicast sever, MGC, and NMS workstation must work in the normal state.
32.3 Data Plan (IPM)

Before the configuration, it is recommended that you implement the service data plan for the required broadband services such as the ADSL access service and the SHDSL access service. When configuring the service, configure according to the planned data. Table 32-1 provides the data plan for configuring the integrated data and voice networking of the UA5000. Table 32-1 Data plan for configuring the integrated data and voice networking Item Upstream port Data Port number: 0/2/0; Rate: 100 Mbit/s; Flow control switch state: enabled NM VLAN ID: 31; type: standard IP address of the L3 interface: 10.5.24.3 IP address of the next hop router: 10.5.24.2 IP address of the NMS host: 10.140.5.79 l Community name: public, with the read-only right. l Community name: private, with the read-write right. l Enable the standard SNMP trap message. ADSL service Subscriber access port number: 0/7/0 0/7/31 VPI: 8; VCI: 35 VLAN ID: 32-63; type: Mux Traffic profile: Upstream bandwidth 512 kbit/s, downstream bandwidth 1 Mbit/s Upstream port: 0/2/0 Traffic entry priority: 1
Remarks If the upstream port is a GE port, use the default configuration. The inband NMS manages the PVM board through the packet transmission of the IPM board. -
Inband NMS
Item SHDSL service
Data Subscriber access port number: 0/8/0 0/8/15 VPI: 8; VCI: 35 VLAN ID: 64-79; type: Mux Traffic profile: 1 Mbit/s Upstream port: 0/2/0
Remarks -
Multicast service
VLAN ID: 104; type: Smart Subscriber access port number: 0/7/0 0/7/31 VPI: 0; VCI: 35 Upstream port: 0/2/0 IP address of the L3 interface: 10.2.2.1 IP addresses of the DHCP server: 10.2.2.2, 10.2.2.3 IP address of the multicast program: 224.1.1.1 Right profile name: profile0 Program name: program1 Traffic entry priority: 5
The multicast service uses the DHCP mode to obtain the IP address. The priority of the multicast traffic entry is higher than the priority of the Internet access subscriber.
Internet access mode
xDSL service: VPI 8, VCI 35, PPPoE mode, set the modem to the bridge mode. Multicast service: VPI 0, VCI 35, IPoE mode, set the modem to the bridge mode.
The xDSL services use the PC dialing method. If the modem dialing method is required, set the modem to the bridged PPPoE mode.
32.4 Data Plan (PVM)

Before the configuration, it is recommended that you implement the service data plan for the required voice services such as the ISDN service. When configuring the service, configure according to the planned data. Table 32-2 provides the data plan for configuring the integrated data and voice networking of the UA5000.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
375
Table 32-2 Data plan for configuring the integrated data and voice networking Item MG interface Data mgid: 0 code: text Protocol: H.248 MG port: 2944; MGC: 2944 Whether the termination ID on the MG interface supports the layering configuration: Yes System parameter IP address Overseas version flag: Britain Signaling IP address of MG interface 0 of the UA5000: 10.140.24.10/24 Media IP address of MG interface 0 of the UA5000: 10.140.24.10/24 Default gateway of MG interface 0 of the UA5000: 10.140.24.1/24 IP address of the MGC: 10.140.25.10/24 (Optional)Type of service (ToS) strategy ISDN BRA service IUA link parameters IP priority and ToS priority: Default values IUA link set number: 1 IUA link number: 15 Local port number: 1401 Peer port number: 1400 ISDN PRA service IUA link parameters IUA link set number: 2 IUA link number: 1 Local port number: 1402 Peer port number: 1404
32.5 Configuration Procedure (IPM)

Log in to the IPM through the serial port or the Telnet mode to configure the broadband services of the UA5000 according to the planned broadband service data.
Procedure
Step 1 Query the host software version.
huawei(config)#display language
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
376

NOTE
If the queried host version does not match the planned host version, see the upgrade guide to update the host software to the planned version.
Step 2 Query and confirm the board.

huawei(config)#display board 0 huawei(config)#board confirm 0
Step 3 Set the upstream port of the UA5000.

huawei(config)#interface ipm 0/2 huawei(config-if-ipm-0/2)#speed 0 100 huawei(config-if-ipm-0/2)#flow-control 0 huawei(config-if-ipm-0/2)#quit
Step 4 Configure a log host.

huawei(config)#loghost huawei(config)#loghost huawei(config)#loghost huawei(config)#loghost add 10.188.56.40 syslog-1 activate ip 10.188.56.40 add 10.188.57.40 syslog-2 activate ip 10.188.57.40
Step 5 Add a standard VLAN, and assign FE ports 6 and 7 and IP upstream port 0 to the VLAN.
Step 6 Configure the inband NMS.

huawei(config)#vlan 31 standard huawei(config)#port vlan 31 0/2 0 huawei(config)#interface vlanif 31 huawei(conffig-if-vlanif31)#ip address 10.5.24.3 255.255.255.0 huawei(conffig-if-vlanif31)#quit huawei(config)#ip route-static 0.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 10.5.24.2 huawei(config)#snmp-agent community read public huawei(config)#snmp-agent community write private huawei(config)#snmp-agent trap enable standard huawei(config)#snmp-agent target-host trap address 10.140.5.79 securityname private huawei(config)#snmp-agent trap source vlanif 31
Step 7 Configure the ADSL service.

huawei(config)#vlan 32 to 63 mux huawei(config)#port vlan 32 to 63 0/2 0 huawei(config)#display traffic table from-index 0 huawei(config)#traffic table index 7 ip car 10240 priority 1 priority-policy tag-InPackage huawei(config)#service-port vlan 32 adsl 0/7/0 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 33 adsl 0/7/1 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 34 adsl 0/7/2 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 35 adsl 0/7/3 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 36 adsl 0/7/4 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 37 adsl 0/7/5 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 38 adsl 0/7/6 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 39 adsl 0/7/7 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 40 adsl 0/7/8 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 41 adsl 0/7/9 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 42 adsl 0/7/10 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 43 adsl 0/7/11 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 44 adsl 0/7/12 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 45 adsl 0/7/13 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 46 adsl 0/7/14 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 47 adsl 0/7/15 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 48 adsl 0/7/16 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 49 adsl 0/7/17 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 50 adsl 0/7/18 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 51 adsl 0/7/19 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 7 tx-cttr 7
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
377

huawei(config)#service-port vlan huawei(config)#service-port vlan huawei(config)#service-port vlan huawei(config)#service-port vlan huawei(config)#service-port vlan huawei(config)#service-port vlan huawei(config)#service-port vlan huawei(config)#service-port vlan huawei(config)#service-port vlan huawei(config)#service-port vlan huawei(config)#service-port vlan huawei(config)#service-port vlan huawei(config)#adsl line-profile Command: adsl line-profile add 3

52 adsl 53 adsl 54 adsl 55 adsl 56 adsl 57 adsl 58 adsl 59 adsl 60 adsl 61 adsl 62 adsl 63 adsl add 3 0/7/20 0/7/21 0/7/22 0/7/23 0/7/24 0/7/25 0/7/26 0/7/27 0/7/28 0/7/29 0/7/30 0/7/31 vpi vpi vpi vpi vpi vpi vpi vpi vpi vpi vpi vpi 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 8 vci vci vci vci vci vci vci vci vci vci vci vci 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 35 rx-cttr rx-cttr rx-cttr rx-cttr rx-cttr rx-cttr rx-cttr rx-cttr rx-cttr rx-cttr rx-cttr rx-cttr 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 tx-cttr tx-cttr tx-cttr tx-cttr tx-cttr tx-cttr tx-cttr tx-cttr tx-cttr tx-cttr tx-cttr tx-cttr 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7
Start adding profile Press 'Q' to quit the current configuration and new configuration will be neglected > Do you want to name the profile (y/n) [n]: > Please choose default value type 0-adsl 1-adsl2+ (0~1) [0]: > Will you set basic configuration for modem? (y/n)[n]: > Please select channel mode 0-interleaved 1-fast (0~1) [0]: > Will you set interleaved delay? (y/n) [n]: > Please select form of transmit rate adaptation in downstream: > 0-fixed 1-adaptAtStartup 2-adaptAtRuntime (0~2) [1]:1 > Will you set SNR margin for modem? (y/n)[n]:y > Target SNR margin in downstream(0~15 dB) [6]: > Minimum SNR margin in downstream (0~6 dB) [0]: > Maximum SNR margin in downstream (6~31 dB) [31]: > Target SNR margin in upstream (0~15 dB) [6]: > Minimum SNR margin in upstream (0~6 dB) [0]: > Maximum SNR margin in upstream (6~31 dB) [31]: > Will you set parameters for rate? (y/n)[n]:y > Minimum transmit rate in downstream (32~8160 Kbps) [32]: > Maximum transmit rate in downstream (32~8160 Kbps) [6144]:1024 > Minimum transmit rate in upstream (32~896 Kbps) [32]: > Maximum transmit rate in upstream (32~896 Kbps) [640]:512 Add profile 3 successfully huawei(config)#interface adsl 0/7 huawei(config-if-adsl-0/7)#alarm-config all 1 huawei(config-if-adsl-0/7)#deactivate all huawei(config-if-adsl-0/7)#activate all profile-index 3
Step 8 Configure the SHDSL service.

huawei(config)#vlan 64 to 79 mux huawei(config)#port vlan 64 to 79 0/2 0 huawei(config)#display traffic table from-index 0 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 64 shdsl 0/8/0 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 65 shdsl 0/8/1 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 66 shdsl 0/8/2 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 67 shdsl 0/8/3 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 68 shdsl 0/8/4 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 69 shdsl 0/8/5 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 70 shdsl 0/8/6 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 71 shdsl 0/8/7 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 72 shdsl 0/8/8 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 73 shdsl 0/8/9 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 74 shdsl 0/8/10 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 75 shdsl 0/8/11 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 76 shdsl 0/8/12 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 77 shdsl 0/8/13 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
378
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 78 shdsl 0/8/14 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 79 shdsl 0/8/15 vpi 8 vci 35 rx-cttr 6 tx-cttr 6 huawei(config)#shdsl line-profile add 2 Command: shdsl line-profile add Start adding profile 2 During inputting,press 'Q' to quit,then settings at this time will be ignored > G.SHDSL interface mode of line (1--two wire;2--four wire) [1]: > Do you use the default data to create a line profile?(y/n) [y]:n > G.SHDSL minimum line rate (Value must be multiple of 64,except 2312kbps,192~2304,2312 kbps)[2048]:1024 > G.SHDSL maximum line rate (Value must be multiple of 64,except 2312kbps,1024~2304,2312 kbps)[2048]: 1024 > Power Spectral Density mode (1--symmetric;2--asymmetric) [1]: > Transmission mode (1--G.991.2 Annex A;2--G.991.2 Annex B; 3--support Annex A&B) [3]: > Remote enable (1--enabled;2--disabled) [1]: > Probe enable (1--disabled;2--enabled) [1]: > Do you config the target SNR margin?(y/n) [n]: Add profile 2 successfully huawei(config)#interface sdl 0/7 huawei(config-if-sdl-0/7)#alarm-config all 1 huawei(config-if-sdl-0/7)#deactivate all huawei(config-if-sdl-0/7)#activate all 2
Step 9 Configure the multicast service.

huawei(config)#vlan 104 smart huawei(config)#port vlan 104 0/2 0 huawei(config)#traffic table index 8 ip car 10240 priority 5 priority-policy tag-InPackage huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/0 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/1 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/2 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/3 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/4 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/5 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/6 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/7 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/8 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/9 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/10 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/11 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/12 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/13 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/14 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/15 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/16 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/17 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/18 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/19 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/20 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/21 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/22 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/23 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/24 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/25 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/26 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/27 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
379
huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/28 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/29 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/30 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8 huawei(config)#service-port vlan 104 adsl 0/7/31 vpi 0 vci 35 rx-cttr 8 tx-cttr 8 huawei(config)#dhcp mode layer-3 option-60 huawei(config)#dhcp-server 2 ip 10.2.2.2 10.2.2.3 huawei(config)#dhcp domain video //Refer to the actual DHCP option 60 threshold. huawei(config-dhcp-domain-video)#dhcp-server 2 huawei(config)#interface vlanif 104 huawei(config-if-vlanif104)#ip address 10.2.2.1 24 huawei(config-if-vlanif104)#dhcp domain video gateway 10.2.2.1 huawei(config)#interface ipm 0/2 huawei(config-if-ipm-0/2)#native-vlan 0 vlan 104 huawei(config-if-ipm-0/2)#quit huawei(config)#btv huawei(config-btv)#igmp uplink-port 0/2/0 huawei(config-btv)#igmp video-port vpi 0 vci 35 huawei(config-btv)#igmp program add name program1 ip 224.1.1.1 vlan 104 bind 0/2/0 huawei(config-btv)#igmp profile profile0 program-name program1 watch huawei(config-btv)#igmp user add slot 0/7 auth huawei(config-btv)#igmp user bind-profile slot 0/7 profile-name profile0
Step 10 Configure the Internet access mode (configure the modem). l PPPoE mode Set the modem to the bridge mode. Set the VPI/VCI of the WAN port on the modem to 8/35. Install the PPPoE dialup software on the computer terminal, and set the user name and password. l IPoE mode Set the modem to the bridge mode. Set the VPI/VCI of the WAN port on the modem to 0/35. ----End
32.6 Configuration Procedure (PVM)

Log in to the PVM through the serial port or the Telnet mode to configure the narrowband services of the UA5000 according to the planned voice service data.
Procedure
Step 1 Configure the system networking mode to the integrated access networking.
huawei(config)#working mode integrated
Step 2 Query the host software version.

huawei(config)#display language
NOTE
If the version does not match, see the version upgrading guide to update the host software to a proper version.
Step 3 Set the IP address of service network port.

huawei(config)#interface eth huawei(interface-eth)#ip address 10.140.24.10 255.255.255.0 10.140.24.1 vlan_tag 1001 huawei(interface-eth)#display ip address
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
380
Step 4 Configure the QoS IP strategy.

huawei(config)#qos ip 10.140.24.10 strategy tos
Step 5 Configure the overseas version flag.

huawei(config)#system parameters 1 8 huawei(config)#display system parameters 1
Step 6 Configure the VoIP voice service.

huawei(config)#board add 0/6 a32 huawei(config)#board confirm 0/6 huawei(config)#display board 0 huawei(config)#interface h248 0 Are you sure to add MG interface? (y/n)[n]:y huawei(config-if-h248-0)#if-h248 attribute mgip 10.140.24.10 mgport 2944 code text transfer udp domainName UA5000.com mgcip_1 10.140.25.10 mgcport_1 2944 mg-media-ip 10.140.24.10 start-nego tiate-versi 2 huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display if-h248 attribute huawei(config-if-h248-0)#display mg-software parameter 0 huawei(config-if-h248-0)#reset Are you sure to reset MG interface?(y/n)[n]:y huawei(config-if-h248-0)#quit huawei(config)#display if-h248 all huawei(config)#esl user huawei(config-esl-user)#mgpstnuser batadd 0/6/0 0/6/31 0 telno 12340001 huawei(config-esl-user)#display mgpstnuser 0/6 huawei(config-esl-user)#quit huawei(config)#save
Step 7 Configure the ISDN BRA service.

huawei(config)#board add 0/12 h601dsld huawei(config)#board confirm 0/12 huawei(config)#display board 0 huawei(config)#sigtran huawei(config-sigtran)#iua-linkset add 1 0 pendingtime 4 huawei(config-sigtran)#iua-link add 15 1 1401 10.140.24.10 1400 10.140.25.10 huawei(config-sigtran)#display iua-link attribute huawei(config-sigtran)#display iua-link state huawei(config-sigtran)#quit huawei(config)#esl user huawei(config-esl-user)#mgbrauser batadd 0/12/0 0/12/1 1 15 huawei(config-esl-user)#display port state 0/12 huawei(config-esl-user)#display mgbrauser 0/12 huawei(config-esl-user)#quit huawei(config)#save
Step 8 Configure the ISDN PRA service.

huawei(config)#board add 0/15 h601edtb huawei(config)#board confirm 0/15 huawei(config)#display board 0 huawei(config)#interface edt 0/15 huawei(config-if-edt-0/13)#runmode indep huawei(config-if-edt-0/13)#quit huawei(config)#sigtran huawei(config-sigtran)#iua-linkset add 2 0 pendingtime 4 huawei(config-sigtran)#iua-link add 1 2 1402 10.140.24.10 1404 10.140.25.10 huawei(config-sigtran)#display iua-link attribute huawei(config-sigtran)#display iua-link state huawei(config-sigtran)#quit huawei(config)#esl user huawei(config-esl-user)#mgprauser add 0/15/0 2 10 huawei(config-esl-user)#display port state 0/15/0 huawei(config-esl-user)#display mgprauser 0/15 huawei(config-esl-user)#quit huawei(config)#save
----End
32.7 Verification
After the broadband service is configured successfully, the subscribers should be able to access the Internet through their PCs. After the voice service is configured successfully, the subscribers should be able to call each other.
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
382
A Acronyms and Abbreviations
A
A ADSL AG B BE BRA BRI
Acronyms and Abbreviations
asymmetric digital subscriber line access gateway
best effort basic rate access basic rate interface
C CCS CCITT CLI common channel signaling International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee command line interface
D DNS DSL DSCP DSP DTMF domain name server digital subscriber line board differentiated service codepoint digital signal processor dual-tone multifrequency
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
383
EPON
Ethernet passive optical network
F FE FoIP FSK FTP fast Ethernet fax over IP frequency shift keying File Transfer Protocol
G GE GPON gigabit Ethernet Gigabit-capable Passive Optical Network
H HW highway
I IP ISDN IUA Internet Protocol integrated services digital network ISDN Q.921-User Adaptation Layer
M MAC MDU MG MGC MGCP MoIP media access control multi dwelling unit media gateway media gateway controller Media Gateway Control Protocol modem over IP
N NGN NM NMS next generation network network management network management system
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
384
NT1
network termination 1
O OAM OLT ONU operations, administration and maintenance optical line terminal optical network unit
P PBX PCM POS POTS PRA PRI PSTN PVM
optical network unit private branch exchange pulse code modulation passive optical splitter plain old telephone service primary rate access primary rate interface public switched telephone network packet voice module
Q QoS quality of service
R RTP Real-time Transfer Protocol
S SCTP SIGTRAN SNMP Stream Control Transmission Protocol signaling transport Simple Network Management Protocol
T TCP TFTP Transmission Control Protocol Trivial File Transfer Protocol
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
385
U UDP User Datagram Protocol
V VAG VLAN VoIP VQE virtual access gateway virtual local area network voice over IP voice quality enhancements
Issue 08 (2011-11-15)
386

UA5000 Configuration Guide-PVM CLI (V100R017 - 08)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

UA5000 Configuration Guide-PVM CLI (V100R017 - 08)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

UA5000 Configuration Guide-PVM CLI (V100R017 - 08)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the purpose of this document?

What is the purpose of this document?

What are the main topics covered in this document?

What are the main topics covered in this document?

UA5000 Universal Access Unit V100R017

Configuration Guide-PVM CLI

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

UA5000 Universal Access Unit Configuration Guide-PVM CLI

About This Document

About This Document

UA5000 Universal Access Unit Configuration Guide-PVM CLI

About This Document

4 Configuring the NMS

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

UA5000 Universal Access Unit Configuration Guide-PVM CLI

About This Document

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

UA5000 Universal Access Unit Configuration Guide-PVM CLI

About This Document

UA5000 Universal Access Unit Configuration Guide-PVM CLI

About This Document

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

UA5000 Universal Access Unit Configuration Guide-PVM CLI

About This Document

Updates in Issue 08 (2011-11-15)

Updates in Issue 07 (2010-10-30)

Updates in Issue 06 (2010-05-30)

Updates in Issue 05 (2009-04-30)

Updates in Issue 04 (2008-11-20)

UA5000 Universal Access Unit Configuration Guide-PVM CLI

About This Document

Updates in Issue 03 (2008-08-20)

Updates in Issue 02 (2008-05-20)

Updates in Issue 01 (2008-03-25)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

UA5000 Universal Access Unit Configuration Guide-PVM CLI

2 Configuring the Maintenance Terminal...................................................................................9

3 CLI Operation Basics..................................................................................................................26

UA5000 Universal Access Unit Configuration Guide-PVM CLI

4 Configuring the NMS.................................................................................................................42

7 Configuring the System DSP Channels..................................................................................74

8 Configuring the Clock................................................................................................................83

UA5000 Universal Access Unit Configuration Guide-PVM CLI

9 Configuring the MG Interface..................................................................................................90

10 Configuring the VoIP Service...............................................................................................126

11 Configuring the VAG Service...............................................................................................157

12 Configuring the ISDN Service..............................................................................................167

UA5000 Universal Access Unit Configuration Guide-PVM CLI

13 Configuring the FoIP Service................................................................................................187

14 Configuring the MoIP Service..............................................................................................208

15 Configuring the R2 Access Service......................................................................................212

16 Configuring the V5 Voice Service........................................................................................226

17 Configuring the SPC...............................................................................................................238

18 Configuring the DDI Service................................................................................................246

UA5000 Universal Access Unit Configuration Guide-PVM CLI

18.2 Configuration Example of the DDI Service.................................................................................................248